Electronics and communications engineering Books

Book SynopsisElectrostatic discharge (ESD) continues to impact semiconductor components and systems as technologies scale from micro- to nano-electronics. This book studies electrical overstress, ESD, and latchup from a whole-chip ESD design synthesis approach. It provides a clear insight into the integration of ESD protection networks from a generalist perspective, followed by examples in specific technologies, circuits, and chips. Uniquely both the semiconductor chip integration issues and floorplanning of ESD networks are covered from a top-down'' design approach. Look inside for extensive coverage on: integration of cores, power bussing, and signal pins in DRAM, SRAM, CMOS image processing chips, microprocessors, analog products, RF components and how the integration influences ESD design and integration architecturing of mixed voltage, mixed signal, to RF design for ESD analysis floorplanning for peripheral and core I/O designs, and the implications onTable of ContentsAbout the Author. Preface. Acknowledgements. 1 ESD Design Synthesis. 1.1 ESD Design Synthesis and Architecture Flow. 1.2 ESD Design - The Signal Path and the Alternate Current Path. 1.3 ESD Electrical Circuit and Schematic Architecture Concepts. 1.4 Mapping Semiconductor Chips and ESD Design. 1.5 ESD Chip Architecture and ESD Test Standards. 1.6 ESD Testing. 1.7 ESD Chip Architecture and ESD Alternative Current Path. 1.8 ESD Networks, Sequencing and Chip Architecture. 1.9 ESD Design Synthesis - Latchup-Free ESD Networks. 1.10 ESD Design Concepts - Buffering - Inter-Device. 1.11 ESD Design Concepts - Ballasting - Inter-Device. 1.12 ESD Design Concepts - Ballasting - Intra-Device. 1.13 ESD Design Concepts - Distributed Load Techniques. 1.14 ESD Design Concepts - Dummy Circuits. 1.15 ESD Design Concepts - Power Supply De-coupling. 1.16 ESD Design Concepts - Feedback Loop De-Coupling. 1.17 ESD Layout and Floorplan-Related Concepts. 1.18 ESD Design Concepts - Analog Circuit Techniques. 1.19 ESD Design Concepts - Wire Bonds. 1.20 Design Rules. 1.21 Summary and Closing Comments. Problems. References. 2 ESD Architecture and Floorplanning. 2.1 ESD Design Floorplan. 2.2 Peripheral I/O Design. 2.3 Lumped ESD Power Clamp in Peripheral I/O Design Architecture. 2.4 Lumped ESD Power Clamp in Peripheral I/O Design Architecture Master/Slave ESD Power Clamp System. 2.5 Array I/O. 2.6 ESD Architecture - Dummy Bus Architecture. 2.7 Native Voltage Power Supply Architecture. 2.8 Mixed-Voltage Architecture. 2.9 Mixed-Signal Architecture. 2.10 Mixed-System Architecture - Digital and Analog CMOS. 2.11 Mixed-Signal Architecture - Digital, Analog, and RF Architecture. 2.12 Summary and Closing Comments. Problems. References. 3 ESD Power Grid Design. 3.1 ESD Power Grid. 3.2 Semiconductor Chip Impedance. 3.3 Interconnect Failure and Dynamic On-Resistance. 3.4 Interconnect Wire and Via Guidelines. 3.5 ESD Power Grid Resistance. 3.6 Power Grid Layout Design. 3.7 ESD Specification Power Grid Considerations. 3.8 Power Grid Design Synthesis - ESD Design Rule Checking Methods. 3.9 Summary and Closing Comments. Problems. References. 4 ESD Power Clamp. 4.1 ESD Power Clamps. 4.2 Design Synthesis of ESD Power Clamps. 4.3 Design Synthesis of ESD Power Clamps - The ESD Power Clamp Shunting Element. 4.4 ESD Power Clamp Issues. 4.5 ESD Power Clamp Design. 4.6 ESD Power Clamp Design Synthesis - Bipolar ESD Power Clamps. 4.7 Master/Slave ESD Power Clamp Systems. 4.8 Summary and Closing Comments. Problems. References. 5 ESD Signal Pin Network Design and Synthesis. 5.1 ESD Signal Pin Structures. 5.2 ESD Signal Input Structures - ESD and Bond Pads Layout. 5.3 ESD Design Synthesis and Layout of MOSFETs. 5.4 ESD Design Synthesis and Layout of Diodes. 5.5 ESD Design Synthesis of SCRs. 5.6 ESD Design Synthesis and Layout of Resistors. 5.7 ESD Design Synthesis of Inductors. 5.8 Summary and Closing Comments. Problems. References. 6 Guard Ring Design and Synthesis. 6.1 Guard Ring Design and Integration. 6.2 Guard Ring Characterization. 6.3 Semiconductor Chip Guard Ring Seal. 6.4 I/O to Core Guard Rings. 6.5 I/O to I/O Guard Rings. 6.6 Within I/O Guard Rings. 6.7 ESD Signal Pin Guard Rings. 6.8 Library Element Guard Rings. 6.9 Mixed-Signal Guard Rings - Digital to Analog. 6.10 Mixed-Voltage Guard Rings - High Voltage to Low Voltage. 6.11 Passive and Active Guard Rings. 6.12 Trench Guard Rings. 6.13 TSV Guard Rings 6.14 Guard Ring DRC. 6.15 Guard Ring and Computer Aided Design Methods. 6.16 Summary and Closing Comments. Problems. References. 7 ESD Full-Chip Design Integration and Architecture. 7.1 Design Synthesis and Integration. 7.2 Digital Design. 7.3 Custom Design vs. Standard Cell Design. 7.4 Memory ESD Design. 7.5 Microprocessor ESD Design. 7.6 Application-Specific Integrated Circuits. 7.7 CMOS Image Processing Chip Design. 7.8 Mixed-Signal Architecture. 7.9 Summary and Closing Comments. Problems. References. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisMIMO-OFDM for LTE, WIFI and WIMAX: Coherent versus Non-Coherent and Cooperative Turbo-Transceivers provides an up-to-date portrayal of wireless transmission based on OFDM techniques augmented with Space-Time Block Codes (STBCs) and Spatial-Division Multiple Access (SDMA).Trade Review"This book provides a comprehensive and up-to-date portrayal of wireless transmission based on OFDM techniques augmented with Space-Time Block Codes (STBCs) and Spatial-Division Multiple Access (SDMA) . . . the book also includes an extensive bibliography, as well as both subject and author indexes. (Annotation ©2011 Book News Inc. Portland, OR)." (Booknews, 1 April 2011) "The book systematically converts the lessons of Shannon's information theory into design principles applicable to practical wireless systems; the depth of discussions increases towards the end of the book.". (4G Wireless Evolution , 26 January 2011)Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xix Other Wiley–IEEE Press Books on Related Topics xxi Preface xxiii Acknowledgments xxvii List of Symbols xxix 1 Introduction to OFDM and MIMO-OFDM 1 1.1 OFDM History 1 1.2 OFDM Schematic 9 1.3 Channel Estimation for Multi-carrier Systems 12 1.4 Channel Estimation for MIMO-OFDM 15 1.5 Signal Detection in MIMO-OFDM Systems 16 1.6 Iterative Signal Processing for SDM-OFDM 21 1.7 System Model 22 1.8 SDM-OFDM System Model 29 1.9 Novel Aspects and Outline of the Book 33 1.10 Chapter Summary 36 2 OFDM Standards 37 2.1 Wi-Fi 37 2.2 3GPP LTE 38 2.3 WiMAX Evolution 39 2.4 Chapter Summary 59 Part I Coherently Detected SDMA-OFDM Systems 61 3 Channel Coding Assisted STBC-OFDM Systems 63 3.1 Introduction 63 3.2 Space–Time Block Codes 63 3.3 Channel-Coded STBCs 75 3.4 Channel Coding Aided STBC-OFDM 95 3.5 Chapter Summary 106 4 Coded Modulation Assisted Multi-user SDMA-OFDM Using Frequency-Domain Spreading 109 4.1 Introduction 109 4.2 System Model 110 4.3 Simulation Results 113 4.4 Chapter Summary 135 5 Hybrid Multi-user Detection for SDMA-OFDM Systems 139 5.1 Introduction 139 5.2 GA-Assisted MUD 140 5.3 Enhanced GA-based MUD 148 5.4 Chapter Summary 168 6 Direct-Sequence Spreading and Slow Subcarrier-Hopping Aided Multi-user SDMA-OFDM Systems 171 6.1 Conventional SDMA-OFDM Systems 171 6.2 Introduction to Hybrid SDMA-OFDM 172 6.3 Subband Hopping Versus Subcarrier Hopping 173 6.4 System Architecture 175 6.5 Simulation Results 188 6.6 Complexity Issues 196 6.7 Conclusions 197 6.8 Chapter Summary 197 7 Channel Estimation for OFDM and MC-CDMA 201 7.1 Pilot-Assisted Channel Estimation 201 7.2 Decision-Directed Channel Estimation 202 7.3 A Posteriori FD-CTF Estimation 203 7.4 A Posteriori CIR Estimation 206 7.5 Parametric FS-CIR Estimation 216 7.6 Time-Domain A Priori CIR Tap Prediction 223 7.7 PASTD-Aided DDCE 230 7.8 Channel Estimation for MIMO-OFDM 233 7.9 Chapter Summary 245 8 Iterative Joint Channel Estimation and MUD for SDMA-OFDM Systems 247 8.1 Introduction 247 8.2 System Overview 249 8.3 GA-Assisted Iterative Joint Channel Estimation and MUD 250 8.4 Simulation Results 259 8.5 Conclusions 268 8.6 Chapter Summary 268 Part II Coherent versus Non-coherent and Cooperative OFDM Systems 271 List of Symbols in Part II 273 9 Reduced-Complexity Sphere Detection for Uncoded SDMA-OFDM Systems 275 9.1 Introduction 275 9.2 Principle of SD 278 9.3 Complexity-Reduction Schemes for SD 289 9.4 Comparison of the Depth-First, K-Best and OHRSA Detectors 301 9.5 Chapter Conclusions 303 10 Reduced-Complexity Iterative Sphere Detection for Channel-Coded SDMA-OFDM Systems 307 10.1 Introduction 307 10.2 Channel-Coded Iterative Centre-Shifting SD 311 10.3 A Priori LLR-Threshold-Assisted Low-Complexity SD 334 10.4 URC-Aided Three-Stage Iterative Receiver Employing SD 343 10.5 Chapter Conclusions 353 11 Sphere-Packing Modulated STBC-OFDM and its Sphere Detection 357 11.1 Introduction 357 11.2 Orthogonal Transmit Diversity Design with SP Modulation 360 11.3 Sphere Detection Design for SP Modulation 369 11.4 Chapter Conclusions 376 12 Multiple-Symbol Differential Sphere Detection for Differentially Modulated Cooperative OFDM Systems 379 12.1 Introduction 379 12.2 Principle of Single-Path MSDSD 385 12.3 Multi-path MSDSD Design for Cooperative Communication 390 12.4 Chapter Conclusions 416 13 Resource Allocation for the Differentially Modulated Cooperation-Aided Cellular Uplink in Fast Rayleigh Fading Channels 419 13.1 Introduction 419 13.2 Performance Analysis of the Cooperation-Aided UL 421 13.3 CUS for the Uplink 432 13.4 Joint CPS and CUS for the Differential Cooperative Cellular UL Using APC 449 13.5 Chapter Conclusions 456 14 The Near-Capacity Differentially Modulated Cooperative Cellular Uplink 459 14.1 Introduction 459 14.2 Channel Capacity of Non-coherent Detectors 463 14.3 SISO MSDSD 465 14.4 Approaching the Capacity of the Differentially Modulated Cooperative Cellular Uplink 472 14.5 Chapter Conclusions 487 Part III Coherent SDM-OFDM Systems 491 List of Symbols in Part III 493 15 Multi-stream Detection for SDM-OFDM Systems 495 15.1 SDM/V-BLAST OFDM Architecture 495 15.2 Linear Detection Methods 496 15.3 Nonlinear SDM Detection Methods 501 15.4 Performance Enhancement Using Space–Frequency Interleaving 509 15.5 Performance Comparison and Discussion 511 15.6 Conclusions 512 16 Approximate Log-MAP SDM-OFDM Multi-stream Detection 515 16.1 OHRSA-Aided SDM Detection 515 17 Iterative Channel Estimation and Multi-stream Detection for SDM-OFDM 549 17.1 Iterative Signal Processing 549 17.2 Turbo Forward Error-Correction Coding 550 17.3 Iterative Detection–Decoding 552 17.4 Iterative Channel Estimation–Detection and Decoding 554 17.5 Chapter Summary 560 18 Summary, Conclusions and Future Research 563 18.1 Summary of Results 563 18.2 Suggestions for Future Research 587 A Appendix to Chapter 5 597 A.1 A Brief Introduction to Genetic Algorithms 597 A.2 Normalization of the Mutation-Induced Transition Probability 601 Glossary 603 Bibliography 611 Subject Index 641 Author Index 647

Read more less

Book SynopsisSpoken language understanding (SLU) is an emerging field in between speech and language processing, investigating human/ machine and human/ human communication by leveraging technologies from signal processing, pattern recognition, machine learning and artificial intelligence. SLU systems are designed to extract the meaning from speech utterances and its applications are vast, from voice search in mobile devices to meeting summarization, attracting interest from both commercial and academic sectors. Both human/machine and human/human communications can benefit from the application of SLU, using differing tasks and approaches to better understand and utilize such communications. This book covers the state-of-the-art approaches for the most popular SLU tasks with chapters written by well-known researchers in the respective fields. Key features include: Presents a fully integrated view of the two distinct disciplines of speech processing and language processing for SLU taTrade Review“The book also contains references to existing datasets that can be used by researchers interested in the field; these, together with the presented baseline, equip one with the necessary tools to step into this very daring and fascinating domain.” (Zentralblatt MATH, 2012) Table of ContentsList of Contributors. Forward. Preface. 1 Introduction (Gokhan Tur and Renato De Mori). 1.1 A Brief History of Spoken Language Understanding. 1.2 Organization of the Book. PART 1 SPOKEN LANGUAGE UNDERSTANDING FOR HUMAN/MACHINE INTERACTIONS. 2 History of Knowledge and Processes for Spoken Language Understanding (Renato De Mori). 2.1 Introduction. 2.2 Meaning Representation and Sentence Interpretation. 2.3 Knowledge Fragments and Semantic Composition. 2.4 Probabilistic Interpretation in SLU Systems. 2.5 Interpretation with Partial Syntactic Analysis. 2.6 Classification Models for Interpretation. 2.7 Advanced Methods and Resources for Semantic Modeling and Interpretation. 2.8 Recent Systems. 2.9 Conclusions. References. 3 Semantic Frame-based Spoken Language Understanding (Ye-Yi Wang, Li Deng and Alex Acero). 3.1 Background. 3.2 Knowledge-based Solutions. 3.3 Data-driven Approaches. 3.4 Summary. References. 4 Intent Determination and Spoken Utterance Classification (Gokhan Tur and Li Deng). 4.1 Background. 4.2 Task Description. 4.3 Technical Challenges. 4.4 Benchmark Data Sets. 4.5 Evaluation Metrics. 4.6 Technical Approaches. 4.7 Discussion and Conclusions. References. 5 Voice Search (Ye-Yi Wang, Dong Yu, Yun-Cheng Ju and Alex Acero). 5.1 Background. 5.2 Technology Review. 5.3 Summary. References. 6 Spoken Question Answering (Sophie Rosset, Olivier Galibert and Lori Lamel). 6.1 Introduction. 6.2 Specific Aspects of Handling Speech in QA Systems. 6.3 QA Evaluation Campaigns. 6.4 Question-answering Systems. 6.5 Projects Integrating Spoken Requests and Question Answering. 6.6 Conclusions. References. 7 SLU in Commercial and Research Spoken Dialogue Systems (David Suendermann and Roberto Pieraccini). 7.1 Why Spoken Dialogue Systems (Do Not) Have to Understand. 7.2 Approaches to SLU for Dialogue Systems. 7.3 From Call Flow to POMDP: How Dialogue Management Integrates with SLU. 7.4 Benchmark Projects and Data Sets. 7.5 Time is Money: The Relationship between SLU and Overall Dialogue System Performance. 7.6 Conclusion. References. 8 Active Learning (Dilek Hakkani-Tür and Giuseppe Riccardi). 8.1 Introduction. 8.2 Motivation. 8.3 Learning Architectures. 8.4 Active Learning Methods. 8.5 Combining Active Learning with Semi-supervised Learning. 8.6 Applications. 8.7 Evaluation of Active Learning Methods. 8.8 Discussion and Conclusions. References. PART 2 SPOKEN LANGUAGE UNDERSTANDING FOR HUMAN/HUMAN CONVERSATIONS. 9 Human/Human Conversation Understanding (Gokhan Tur and Dilek Hakkani-Tür). 9.1 Background. 9.2 Human/Human Conversation Understanding Tasks. 9.3 Dialogue Act Segmentation and Tagging. 9.4 Action Item and Decision Detection. 9.5 Addressee Detection and Co-reference Resolution. 9.6 Hot Spot Detection. 9.7 Subjectivity, Sentiment, and Opinion Detection. 9.8 Speaker Role Detection. 9.9 Modeling Dominance. 9.10 Argument Diagramming. 9.11 Discussion and Conclusions. References. 10 Named Entity Recognition (Frédéric Béchet). 10.1 Task Description. 10.2 Challenges Using Speech Input. 10.3 Benchmark Data Sets, Applications. 10.4 Evaluation Metrics. 10.5 Main Approaches for Extracting NEs from Text. 10.6 Comparative Methods for NER from Speech. 10.7 New Trends in NER from Speech. 10.8 Conclusions. References. 11 Topic Segmentation (Matthew Purver). 11.1 Task Description. 11.2 Basic Approaches, and the Challenge of Speech. 11.3 Applications and Benchmark Datasets. 11.4 Evaluation Metrics. 11.5 Technical Approaches. 11.6 New Trends and Future Directions. References. 12 Topic Identification (Timothy J. Hazen). 12.1 Task Description. 12.2 Challenges Using Speech Input. 12.3 Applications and Benchmark Tasks. 12.4 Evaluation Metrics. 12.5 Technical Approaches. 12.6 New Trends and Future Directions. References. 13 Speech Summarization (Yang Liu and Dilek Hakkani-Tür). 13.1 Task Description. 13.2 Challenges when Using Speech Input. 13.3 Data Sets. 13.4 Evaluation Metrics. 13.5 General Approaches. 13.6 More Discussions on Speech versus Text Summarization. 13.7 Conclusions. References. 14 Speech Analytics (I. Dan Melamed and Mazin Gilbert) 14.1 Introduction. 14.2 System Architecture. 14.3 Speech Transcription. 14.4 Text Feature Extraction. 14.5 Acoustic Feature Extraction. 14.6 Relational Feature Extraction. 14.7 DBMS. 14.8 Media Server and Player. 14.9 Trend Analysis. 14.10 Alerting System. 14.11 Conclusion. References. 15 Speech Retrieval (Ciprian Chelba, Timothy J. Hazen, Bhuvana Ramabhadran and Murat Saraçlar). 15.1 Task Description. 15.2 Applications. 15.3 Challenges Using Speech Input. 15.4 Evaluation Metrics. 15.5 Benchmark Data Sets. 15.6 Approaches. 15.7 New Trends. 15.8 Discussion and Conclusions. References. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisShort Message Service (SMS): The Creation of Personal Text Messaging presents a chronological history of SMS. The book starts by describing text communication in the early 1980s. It characterizes the SMS concept developed via Franco-German cooperation and describes how GSM is different, detailing the succeeding factors.Table of ContentsIntroduction xiii 1 Communication Networks in the Early 1980s and the Portfolio of GSM Services 1 F. Hillebrand 1.1 Station-to-station Morse Telegraphy, the Origin of All Modern Technical Text Communication 1 1.2 Network-based Communication Services in the Early 1980s 1 1.3 Services Portfolio of GSM 7 1.4 GSM Mobile Telephony and SMS – the Most Successful Telecommunication Services 12 2 Who Invented SMS? 15 F. Hillebrand 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 Clarification of the Terms ‘Invention’ and ‘Innovation’ 15 2.3 Was SMS Invented during the ISDN Work? 16 2.4 Was SMS Invented by Test Engineers, Students or in a Pizzeria Session? 17 2.5 A Clarifying Discussion within the GSM Community in Spring 2009 18 2.6 Timetables of SMS Genesis 19 3 The Creation of the SMS Concept from Mid-1984 to Early 1987 23 F. Hillebrand 3.1 The Birth of the SMS Concept in the French and German Network Operators 23 3.2 The Standardisation of the SMS Concept in the GSM Committee from February 1985 to April 1987 34 3.3 The Acceleration of the GSM Project, Including SMS in 1987 42 4 The Technical Design of SMS in DGMH from June 1987 to October 1990 45 F. Trosby 4.1 Background 45 4.2 Some Personal Sentiments at the Start 46 4.3 The Instructions that IDEG Were Given for Provision of SMS 47 4.4 Overall Description of the Work in the Period from 1987 to 1990 and Work Items Dealt with 48 4.5 The SMS of September 1990 55 4.6 Major Design Issues 64 4.7 Final Remarks on the Period of the First Three Years of DGMH 71 4.8 Work on SMS in GSM Bodies Outside GSM4 72 4.9 Other Tasks of DGMH 73 5 The Evolution of SMS Features and Specifications from October 1990 to the End of 1996 75 K. Holley 5.1 Topics Discussed in this Chapter 76 5.2 Technical Improvements to SMS 1990-1996 77 5.3 Concluding Remarks on the SMS Period 1990-1996 97 6 The Evolution of SMS Features and Specifications from the Beginning of 1997 to Mid-2009 99 I. Harris 6.1 SIM Toolkit Data Download and Secure Messaging 100 6.2 SMS Compression 100 6.3 Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS) 101 6.4 Voicemail Management 103 6.5 Routers 104 6.6 Language Tables 105 6.7 Other Important Standards Work for SMS 107 6.8 The End of an Era 108 6.9 Further Reading 109 7 Early Commercial Applications and Operational Aspects 111 I. Harris 7.1 Fixed-network Connection to the SMS-SC 112 7.2 Network Operator Interworking, Roaming and Number Portability 114 7.3 Third-party SMS-SCs 115 7.4 Intelligent Terminal Connections to Mobile Phones 116 7.5 SMS Keyboard Text Entry 117 7.6 SMS to Fax and SMS to Email 117 7.7 Two-way Real-time Messaging Applications 119 7.8 Performance 120 7.9 SMS Traffic Growth 121 7.10 Billing 122 7.11 The Content Provider Access (CPA) Model Deployed in Norway 123 7.12 SMS in 2009 123 8 Global Market Development 125 F. Hillebrand 8.1 The Creation of a Large Base of Mobiles and the Global SMS Infrastructure 125 8.2 First Use of SMS by Network Operators 126 8.3 How SMS Was Discovered by Young People and Became a Part of the Youth Culture and Widely Accepted 126 8.4 SMS Has Become the Leading Mobile Messaging Service and Will Stay in the Lead in the Foreseeable Future 127 9 Conclusions 131 F. Hillebrand 9.1 Factors that Were Critical for the Success of SMS 131 9.2 Proposals for a Further Evolution of SMS: SMS Phase 3 132 9.3 What Can be Learnt from SMS for Standardisation in Other Areas 133 Annex 1 Abbreviations Used in Several Parts of the Book 135 Annex 2 Sources for Quoted GSM Documents and Other Documents 139 Annex 3 Meetings of IDEG/WP4/GSM4 and DGMH in the Period from May 1987 to September 1990 143 Annex 4 DGMH Attendance in the Period from May 1987 to September 1990 145 Annex 5 Meetings of GSM4/SMG 4 and DGMH in the Period from October 1990 to the End of 1996 147 Annex 6 DGMH Attendance in the Period from October 1990 to the End of 1996 149 Annex 7 Evolution of GSM Specification 03.40 157 Annex 8 Literature 165 Annex 9 Brief Biographies of the Authors 167 Index 173

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis practical guide covers both the civilian and military uses of radio communications, focusing on the applications of radio propagation and prediction. It introduces the basic theory of radio prediction, then provides a step-by-step explanation of how this theory can be translated into real-life applications.Table of ContentsPreface. Glossary. PART ONE – BASIC THEORY. 1 Introduction. 1.1 The Aim of this Book. 1.2 Current Radio Technology. 1.3 Factors Constraining Radio Communications. References and Further Reading. 2 Management of the Radio Spectrum. 2.1 Spectrum Management Fundamentals. 2.2 Civil Spectrum Management. 2.3 Military Spectrum Management. 2.4 Management of EWActivities. References and Further Reading. 3 The Radio Channel. 3.1 Frequency Aspects of the Radio Channel. 3.2 Narrowband Signals. 3.3 Frequency Hopping Signals. 3.4 Wideband Signals. 3.5 The Effect of Movement on the Radio Channel. References and Further Reading. 4 Radio Links in the Presence of Noise. 4.1 Sources of Radio Noise. 4.2 Effects of Noise. 4.3 The Radio Receiver. 4.4 Radio Link Budgets in the Presence of Noise. References and Further Reading. 5 Radio Links in the Presence of Interference. 5.1 Sources of Radio Interference. 5.2 Interference in the Spectral Domain. 5.3 Interference in the Time Domain. 5.4 Interference Mitigation Techniques. References and Further Reading. 6 Radio Links and Deliberate Jamming. 6.1 The Purpose of Jamming. 6.2 How Jamming Works. 6.3 Types of Communications Jammers. 6.4 Jamming Mitigation Techniques. References and Further Reading. 7 Radar and Radar Jamming. 7.1 Introduction to Radars. 7.2 The Radar Equation. 7.3 Types of Radar. 7.4 Radar Jamming Techniques. 7.5 Radar Jamming Mitigation Techniques. References and Further Reading. 8 Radio-Controlled Improvised Explosive Devices. 8.1 The Poor Man’s Weapon of Choice: IEDs. 8.2 Radio Control for IEDs. 8.3 Detection of IED Radio Control Systems. References and Further Reading. PART TWO – PRACTICAL. 9 Predicting HF Radio. 9.1 Propagation at HF. 9.2 HF Skywave Link Budgets. 9.3 Groundwave. References and Further Reading. 10 VHF to SHF Radio Prediction. 10.1 Propagation above HF. 10.2 Modelling Methods. 10.3 Deterministic Models. 10.4 Empirical Models. 10.5 Combined Models. 10.6 Link Budgets. References and Further Reading. 11 Data Requirements for Radio Prediction. 11.1 Why Consider Modelling Requirements? 11.2 Communications System Parameters. 11.3 ES Specific Parameters. 11.4 EA Specific Parameters. 11.5 Radar Specific Parameters. 11.6 Third-Party Characteristics. 11.7 General Antenna Characteristics. 11.8 Antenna Environment Considerations. 11.9 Terrain Data. 11.10 Ground and Radio Clutter Data. 11.11 Sunspots, Ionospheric and Atmospheric Data. References and Further Reading. 12 Planning and Optimising Radio Links. 12.1 Path Profile Prediction. 12.2 Optimising a Link. 12.3 Re-Broadcast Links. 12.4 Linked Networks. References and Further Reading. 13 Planning Radio Networks for Coverage. 13.1 Coverage Predictions. 13.2 Optimisation of Radio Networks. 13.3 Limiting Coverage. References and Further Reading. 14 Interference Analysis. 14.1 Introduction to Radio Interference Analysis. 14.2 Fading Considerations. 14.3 Interference from other Channels. 14.4 Different Ways of Representing Co-Existing Signals. References and Further Reading. 15 Management Techniques for Interference. 15.1 Preventing Interference. 15.2 Managing Interference. 15.3 Interference Reports. References and Further Reading. 16 Management of Interference at a Radio Site. 16.1 Special Features of Radio Sites with Multiple Systems. 16.2 Sources of Interference at a Radio Site. 16.3 Methods of Managing Interference at Radio Sites. References and Further Reading. 17 Communications Electronic Warfare. 17.1 Introduction. 17.2 Detection and Intercept Networks. 17.3 Direction Finding Networks. 17.4 Communications Jammers. 17.5 The Role of Unmanned Airborne Vehicles. 17.6 Countering Enemy Communications Electronic Warfare. References and Further Reading. 18 Non-Communications Electronic Warfare. 18.1 Non-Communications EW. 18.2 Radar Jamming Techniques. 18.3 Platform Self Protection Methods. 18.4 Parametric Information Collection Methods. References and Further Reading. 19 Countering Radio-Controlled IEDs. 19.1 Introduction to IEDs. 19.2 Radio Controlled IED. 19.3 Basic IED Counter Methods. 20 Summary and Conclusions. Appendix A: Working with Decibels. Appendix B: Common Conversion Formulae and Reference Tables. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisOffering complete and comprehensive coverage of modern sonar spectrum system analysis, Underwater Acoustics: Analysis, Design and Performance of Sonar provides a state-of-the-art introduction to the subject and has been carefully structured to offer a much-needed update to the classic text by Urick. Expanded to included computational approaches to the topic, this book treads the line between the highly theoretical and mathematical texts and the more populist, non-mathematical books that characterize the existing literature in the field. The author compares and contrasts different techniques for sonar design, analysis and performance prediction and includes key experimental and theoretical results, pointing the reader towards further detail with extensive references. Practitioners in the field of sonar design, analysis and performance prediction as well as graduate students and researchers will appreciate this new reference as an invaluable and timely contribution to the field.Table of ContentsAbout the Author xiii Preface xv Acknowledgements xvii 1 Introduction to Sonar 1 1.1 Acoustic Waves 1 1.1.1 Compressions and Rarefactions 3 1.2 Speed of Propagation 4 1.3 Acoustic Wave Parameters 5 1.4 Doppler Shift 9 1.5 Intensity, SPL, and Decibels 10 1.6 Combining Acoustic Waves 11 1.7 Comparative Parameter for Sound in Water and Air 14 References 15 2 The Sonar Equations 17 2.1 Signal-to-Noise Ratio 17 2.2 Active Sonar Equation 18 2.3 Signal Excess 20 2.4 Figure of Merit 20 References 21 3 Transducers, Directionality, and Arrays 23 3.1 Transducer Response 25 3.2 Beam Pattern Response 25 3.3 Linear Arrays 27 3.3.1 Triplet Towed Array 33 3.3.2 Multiline Towed Arrays 33 3.4 Rectangular Planar Array 33 3.5 Amplitude Shading 37 3.6 Continuous Arrays 37 3.7 Volumetric Arrays 41 3.8 Product Theorem 44 3.9 Broadband Beam Patterns 45 3.10 Directivity and Array Gain 45 3.11 Noise Cross-Correlation between Hydrophones 47 3.12 Directivity of Line Arrays 49 3.13 Directivity of Area Arrays 51 3.14 Directivity of Volumetric Arrays 52 3.15 Difference Arrays 54 3.16 Multiplicative Arrays 57 3.17 Sparsely Populated Arrays 59 3.18 Adaptive Beamforming 60 References 62 4 Active Sonar Sources 63 4.1 Source Level 63 4.2 Cavitation 64 4.3 Near-Field Interactions 67 4.4 Explosive Sources 67 4.5 Physics of Shock Waves in Water 68 4.6 Bubble Pulses 72 4.7 Pros and Cons of Explosive Charges 73 4.8 Parametric Acoustic Sources 73 References 74 5 Transmission Loss 75 5.1 Sound Speed Profile in the Sea 76 5.2 Snell’s Law and Transmission across an Interface 77 5.3 Reflection and Transmission Coefficients 79 5.4 Transmission through a Plate 82 5.5 Ray Tracing 84 5.6 Spreading Loss 91 5.7 Absorption of Sound in the Ocean 92 5.7.1 Mechanisms of Absorption 92 References 95 6 Transmission Loss: Interaction with Boundaries 97 6.1 Sea State, Wind Speed, and Wave Height 97 6.2 Pierson–Moskowitz Model for Fully Developed Seas 99 6.3 Sea Surface Interaction 101 6.3.1 Lloyd Mirror Interference 101 6.3.2 Loss Due to Interaction with the Surface 104 6.4 Bottom Loss 112 6.4.1 Simple Rayleigh Bottom Loss Model 113 6.4.2 U.S. Navy OAML Approved Models of Bottom Loss 113 6.4.3 Low-Frequency Bottom Loss (LFBL) Model: 50 to 1000 Hz 113 6.4.4 High-Frequency Bottom Loss (HFBL) Model 114 6.4.5 High-Frequency Environment Acoustic (HFEVA) Model 117 6.5 Leakage Out of a Duct, Low-Frequency Cutoff 117 6.6 Propagation Loss Model Descriptions 120 6.6.1 Ray Models 120 6.6.2 Normal Modes 121 6.6.3 Parabolic Equations 122 6.6.4 U.S. Navy Standard Models 123 References 125 7 Ambient Noise 127 7.1 Ambient Noise Models 127 7.2 Seismic Noise 128 7.3 Ocean Turbulence 130 7.4 Shipping Noise 131 7.5 Wave Noise 131 7.6 Thermal Noise 131 7.7 Rain Noise 131 7.8 Temporal Variability of Ambient Noise 133 7.9 Depth Effects on Noise 133 7.10 Directionality of Noise 133 7.11 Under Ice Noise 137 7.12 Spatial Coherence of Ambient Noise 138 References 140 8 Reverberation 143 8.1 Scattering, Backscattering Strength, and Target Strength 143 8.1.1 Surface and Bottom Scattering 143 8.1.2 Volume Scattering 152 8.1.3 Bottom Scattering 152 8.1.4 Reverberation Target Strength 153 8.1.5 Calculation of Reverberation for Use in the Sonar Equation 154 8.1.6 Volume Reverberation Level 156 8.2 Reverberation Frequency Spread and Doppler Gain Potential 157 8.2.1 Power Spectral Density of a CW Pulse 159 8.2.2 Environmental Frequency Spreading 161 8.2.3 Frequency Spreading Due to Transmitter and Receiver Motion 161 8.2.4 Frequency Spreading Due to Target 162 8.3 Important Observation with Respect to Reverberation 164 References 164 9 Active Target Strength 167 9.1 Target Strength Definition 167 9.2 Active Target Strength of a Large Sphere 169 9.3 Active Target Strength of a Very Small Sphere 170 9.4 Target Strengths of Simple Geometric Forms 173 9.5 Target Strength of Submarines 173 9.6 The TAP Model 174 9.7 Target Strength of Surface Ships 176 9.8 Target Strength of Mines and Torpedoes 176 9.9 Target Strength of Fish 178 References 181 10 Radiated Noise 183 10.1 General Characteristics of Ship Radiated Noise 183 10.2 Propeller Radiated Noise 184 10.3 Machinery Noise 186 10.4 Resonance Noise 187 10.5 Hydrodynamic Noise 187 10.6 Platform Quieting 189 10.7 Total Radiated Noise 189 Reference 192 11 Self Noise 193 11.1 Flow Noise 193 11.2 Turbulent Noise Coherence 198 11.3 Strumming Noise 199 References 199 12 Statistical Detection Theory 201 12.1 Introduction 201 12.2 Case 1: Signal Is Known Exactly 205 12.2.1 Observations on Case 1 210 12.3 Case 2: Signal Is White Gaussian Noise 210 12.3.1 Observations on Case 2 213 References 214 13 Methodology for Calculation of the Recognition Differential 215 13.1 Continuous Broadband Signals (PBB) 216 13.1.1 PBB Step 1: Theoretical Broadband Nrd 217 13.1.2 PBB Step 2: Correction for Noise Spectrum 217 13.1.3 PBB Step 3: Correction for Processor Implementation 220 13.1.4 PBB Step 4: Correction for Nonideal Signal Characteristics 226 13.1.5 PBB Step 5: Adjustment for Additional At-Sea Losses 227 13.2 Continuous Narrowband Signals (PNB) 227 13.2.1 PNB Step 1: Theoretical Narrowband Nrd 229 13.2.2 PNB Step 2: Correction for Noise Spectrum 230 13.2.3 PNB Step 3: Correction for Processor Implementation 233 13.2.4 PNB Step 4: Correction for Nonideal Signal Characteristics (Signal Is Not a Perfect Sine Wave) 239 13.2.5 PNB Step 5: Adjustment for Additional At-Sea Losses 240 13.2.6 Nrd Calculation Example 241 13.3 Active Sonar 241 13.3.1 CW Active Pulse Active Step 1: Theoretical Nrd 242 13.3.2 Active Step 2: Correction for Noise Spectrum 253 13.3.3 Active Step 3: Correction for Processor Implementation 255 13.3.4 Active Step 4: Correction for Nonideal Signal Characteristics 257 13.3.5 Active Step 5: Adjustment for Additional At-Sea Losses 257 13.3.6 Nrd Calculation Examples 258 13.4 Aural Detection 258 13.5 Display Nomenclature 261 References 264 14 False Alarms, False Contacts, and False Targets 265 14.1 Sea Story 265 14.2 Failure to Detect 266 14.3 Detection Theory 266 14.3.1 Hypothesis Testing 266 14.3.2 Probability Density Function 267 14.3.3 Detection of Constant Level 268 14.4 False Alarm Probability Calculation 269 14.5 False/Nonthreat Contacts 271 14.6 False Targets 271 14.7 Summary and Conclusions 272 References 272 15 Variability and Uncertainty 273 15.1 Random Variability of a Sonar 276 15.2 Sources of Variability 276 References 281 16 Modeling Detection and Tactical Decision Aids 283 16.1 Figure of Merit Range or R50 % 283 16.2 Tactical Decision Aids 287 References 289 17 Cumulative Probability of Detection 291 17.1 Why is CPD Important? 291 17.2 Discrete Glimpse and Continuous Looking 291 17.3 Lambda–Sigma Jump Model 292 17.4 Nonjump Processes 293 17.5 What Are Appropriate Random Parameters? 293 17.6 Approximation Method for Computation of the Cumulative Probability of Detection (CPD) 296 References 298 18 Tracking, Target Motion Analysis, and Localization 299 18.1 Bearing Trackers 299 18.1.1 Amplitude Difference Method 299 18.1.2 Phase Difference Method or Cross-Correlation Method 300 18.2 General Principle of Tracking and Bearing Measurement 301 18.3 Other Sources of Bearing Error for Area Arrays 303 18.4 Additional Sources of Errors for Line Arrays 305 18.5 Bottom Bounce 306 18.6 Manual versus Automatic Tracking 306 18.7 Localization and Target Motion Analysis 307 18.7.1 Localization 307 18.7.2 Wave Front Curvature Ranging (WFCR) 312 18.7.3 Multipath Ranging (MPR) 314 18.7.4 Depression/Elevation (D/E) Ranging 317 18.7.5 Triangulation Ranging 317 18.8 Bearings Only Methodologies 319 18.9 Four-Bearing TMA 319 18.10 Ekelund Ranging 321 18.11 Range and Bearing TMA 322 18.12 Other Bearings Only TMA Methodologies 323 18.13 Other TMA and Localization Schemes 324 References 324 19 Design and Evaluation of Sonars 325 19.1 Choice of Frequency and Size 325 19.2 Computational Requirements 327 19.2.1 Beamforming 328 19.3 Signal Processing after Beamformer 329 19.3.1 Detection 329 19.4 Active Pulse Choice 330 19.5 Monostatic, Bistatic, and Multistatic Active Sonars 332 19.6 Ambiguity Functions 334 19.7 Mine Hunting and Bottom Survey Sonars 334 19.8 Echo Sounding and Fishing Sonars 335 19.9 Navigation 336 19.10 Vehicle Location and At-Sea Rescue 336 19.11 Intercept Receivers 336 19.12 Communications 336 19.13 Marine Mammals and Active Sonar 337 References 337 A Fourier Transforms 339 A.1 Definitions 339 A.2 Parseval’s Theorem and Plancherel’s Theorem 340 A.3 Properties of Fourier Transforms 341 A.4 Localization or Uncertainty Property 341 B Analysis of Errors Associated with a Least Squares Methodology 343 Reference 346 Index 347

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresenting a number of methods and techniques for the modeling and optimization of liquid crystal devices, Modeling and Optimization of Liquid Crystal Displays represents modeling methods that are more accurate, versatile, reliable, and quicker than analogues in competing books.Table of ContentsSeries Editor's Foreword xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xix List of Abbreviations xxi About the Companion Website xxiii 1 Polarization of Monochromatic Waves. Background of the Jones Matrix Methods. The Jones Calculus 1 1.1 Homogeneous Waves in Isotropic Media 1 1.1.1 Plane Waves 1 1.1.2 Polarization. Jones Vectors 3 1.1.3 Coordinate Transformation Rules for Jones Vectors. Orthogonal Polarizations. Decomposition of a Wave into Two Orthogonally Polarized Waves 9 1.2 Interface Optics for Isotropic Media 14 1.2.1 Fresnel's Formulas. Snell's Law 14 1.2.2 Reflection and Transmission Jones Matrices for a Plane Interface between Isotropic Media 20 1.3 Wave Propagation in Anisotropic Media 23 1.3.1 Wave Equations 23 1.3.2 Waves in a Uniaxial Layer 25 1.3.3 A Simple Birefringent Layer and Its Principal Axes 30 1.3.4 Transmission Jones Matrices of a Simple Birefringent Layer at Normal Incidence 32 1.3.5 Linear Retarders 36 1.3.6 Jones Matrices of Absorptive Polarizers. Ideal Polarizer 38 1.4 Jones Calculus 41 1.4.1 Basic Principles of the Jones Calculus 42 1.4.2 Three Useful Theorems for Transmissive Systems 46 1.4.3 Reciprocity Relations. Jones's Reversibility Theorem 50 1.4.4 Theorem of Polarization Reversibility for Systems Without Diattenuation 53 1.4.5 Particular Variants of Application of the Jones Calculus. Cartesian Jones Vectors for Wave Fields in Anisotropic Media 55 References 57 2 The Jones Calculus: Solutions for Ideal Twisted Structures and Their Applications in LCD Optics 59 2.1 Jones Matrix and Eigenmodes of a Liquid Crystal Layer with an Ideal Twisted Structure 59 2.2 LCD Optics and the Gooch–Tarry Formulas 64 2.3 Interactive Simulation 67 2.4 Parameter Space 69 References 73 3 Optical Equivalence Theorem 75 3.1 General Optical Equivalence Theorem 75 3.2 Optical Equivalence for the Twisted Nematic Liquid Crystal Cell 77 3.3 Polarization Conserving Modes 77 3.3.1 LP1 Modes 78 3.3.2 LP2 Modes 79 3.3.3 LP3 Modes 80 3.3.4 CP Modes 81 3.4 Application to Nematic Bistable LCDs 82 3.4.1 2pi Bistable TN Displays 82 3.4.2 Pi Bistable TN Displays 83 3.5 Application to Reflective Displays 84 3.6 Measurement of Characteristic Parameters of an LC Cell 86 3.6.1 Characteristic Angle Omega 86 3.6.2 Characteristic Phase Gamma 87 References 87 4 Electro-optical Modes: Practical Examples of LCD Modeling and Optimization 91 4.1 Optimization of LCD Performance in Various Electro-optical Modes 91 4.1.1 Electrically Controlled Birefringence 91 4.1.2 Twist Effect 101 4.1.3 Supertwist Effect 109 4.1.4 Optimization of Optical Performance of Reflective LCDs 116 4.2 Transflective LCDs 119 4.2.1 Dual-Mode Single-Cell-Gap Approach 119 4.2.2 Single-Mode Single-Cell-Gap Approach 122 4.3 Total Internal Reflection Mode 124 4.4 Ferroelectric LCDs 131 4.4.1 Basic Physical Properties 131 4.4.2 Electro-optical Effects in FLC Cells 135 4.5 Birefringent Color Generation in Dichromatic Reflective FLCDs 145 References 149 5 Necessary Mathematics. Radiometric Terms. Conventions. Various Stokes and Jones Vectors 153 5.1 Some Definitions and Relations from Matrix Algebra 153 5.1.1 General Definitions 153 5.1.2 Some Important Properties of Matrix Products 160 5.1.3 Unitary Matrices. Unimodular Unitary 2 x 2 Matrices. STU Matrices 160 5.1.4 Norms of Vectors and Matrices 163 5.1.5 Kronecker Product of Matrices 166 5.1.6 Approximations 167 5.2 Some Radiometric Quantities. Conventions 167 5.3 Stokes Vectors of Plane Waves and Collimated Beams Propagating in Isotropic Nonabsorbing Media 169 5.4 Jones Vectors 171 5.4.1 Fitted-to-Electric-Field Jones Vectors and Fitted-to-Transverse-Component-of-Electric-Field Jones Vectors 171 5.4.2 Fitted-to-Irradiance Jones Vectors 172 5.4.3 Conventional Jones Vectors 175 References 176 6 Simple Models and Representations for Solving Optimization and Inverse Optical Problems. Real Optics of LC Cells and Useful Approximations 177 6.1 Polarization Transfer Factor of an Optical System 178 6.2 Optics of LC Cells in Terms of Polarization Transport Coefficients 182 6.2.1 Polarization-Dependent Losses and Depolarization. Unpolarized Transmittance 185 6.2.2 Rotations 187 6.2.3 Symmetry of the Sample 190 6.3 Retroreflection Geometry 192 6.4 Applications of Polarization Transport Coefficients in Optimization of LC Devices 195 6.5 Evaluation of Ultimate Characteristics of an LCD that can be Attained by Fitting the Compensation System. Modulation Efficiency of LC Layers 207 References 216 7 Some Physical Models and Mathematical Algorithms Used in Modeling the Optical Performance of LCDs 217 7.1 Physical Models of the Light–Layered System Interaction Used in Modeling the Optical Behavior of LC Devices. Plane-Wave Approximations. Transfer Channel Approach 217 7.2 Transfer Matrix Technique and Adding Technique 237 7.2.1 Transfer Matrix Technique 238 7.2.2 Adding Technique 242 7.3 Optical Models of Some Elements of LCDs 246 References 248 8 Modeling Methods Based on the Rigorous Theory of the Interaction of a Plane Monochromatic Wave with an Ideal Stratified Medium. Eigenwave (EW) Methods. EW Jones Matrix Method 251 8.1 General Properties of the Electromagnetic Field Induced by a Plane Monochromatic Wave in a Linear Stratified Medium 252 8.1.1 Maxwell's Equations and Constitutive Relations 252 8.1.2 Plane Waves 256 8.1.3 Field Geometry 259 8.2 Transmission and Reflection Operators of Fragments (TR Units) of a Stratified Medium and Their Calculation 275 8.2.1 EW Jones Vector. EW Jones Matrices. Transmission and Reflection Operators 275 8.2.2 Calculation of Overall Transmission and Overall Reflection Operators for Layered Systems by Using Transfer Matrices 281 8.3 Berreman’s Method 283 8.3.1 Transfer Matrices 283 8.3.2 Transfer Matrix of a Homogeneous Layer 285 8.3.3 Transfer Matrix of a Smoothly Inhomogeneous Layer. Staircase Approximation 287 8.3.4 Coordinate Systems 289 8.4 Simplifications, Useful Relations, and Advanced Techniques 291 8.4.1 Orthogonality Relations and Other Useful Relations for Eigenwave Bases 291 8.4.2 Simple General Formulas for Transmission Operators of Interfaces 297 8.4.3 Calculation of Transmission and Reflection Operators of Layered Systems by Using the Adding Technique 303 8.5 Transmissivities and Reflectivities 304 8.6 Mathematical Properties of Transfer Matrices and Transmission and Reflection EW Jones Matrices of Lossless Media and Reciprocal Media 311 8.6.1 Properties of Matrix Operators for Nonabsorbing Regions 311 8.6.2 Properties of Matrix Operators for Reciprocal Regions 313 8.7 Calculation of EW 4 x 4 Transfer Matrices for LC Layers 319 8.8 Transformation of the Elements of EW Jones Vectors and EW Jones Matrices Under Changes of Eigenwave Bases 322 8.8.1 Coordinates of the EW Jones Vector of a Wave Field in Different Eigenwave Bases 322 8.8.2 EW Jones Operators in Different Eigenwave Bases 326 References 328 9 Choice of Eigenwave Bases for Isotropic, Uniaxial, and Biaxial Media 331 9.1 General Aspects of EWB Specification. EWB-generating routines 331 9.2 Isotropic Media 338 9.3 Uniaxial Media 342 9.4 Biaxial Media 352 References 365 10 Efficient Methods for Calculating Optical Characteristics of Layered Systems for Quasimonochromatic Incident Light. Main Routines of LMOPTICS Library 367 10.1 EW Stokes Vectors and EW Mueller Matrices 368 10.2 Calculation of the EW Mueller Matrices of the Overall Transmission and Reflection of a System Consisting of "Thin" and "Thick" Layers 375 10.3 Main Routines of LMOPTICS 384 10.3.1 Routines for Computing 4 x 4 Transfer Matrices and EW Jones Matrices 384 10.3.2 Routines for Computing EW Mueller Matrices 388 10.3.3 Other Useful Routines 391 References 392 11 Calculation of Transmission Characteristics of Inhomogeneous Liquid Crystal Layers with Negligible Bulk Reflection 393 11.1 Application of Jones Matrix Methods to Inhomogeneous LC Layers 394 11.1.1 Calculation of Transmission Jones Matrices of LC Layers Using the Classical Jones Calculus 394 11.1.2 Extended Jones Matrix Methods 404 11.2 NBRA. Basic Differential Equations 409 11.3 NBRA. Numerical Methods 420 11.3.1 Approximating Multilayer Method 421 11.3.2 Discretization Method 427 11.3.3 Power Series Method 428 11.4 NBRA. Analytical Solutions 430 11.4.1 Twisted Structures 430 11.4.2 Nontwisted Structures 432 11.4.3 NBRA and GOA. Adiabatic and Quasiadiabatic Approximations 434 11.5 Effect of Errors in Values of the Transmission Matrix of the LC Layer on the Accuracy of Modeling the Transmittance of the LCD Panel 437 References 438 12 Some Approximate Representations in EWJones Matrix Method and Their Application in Solving Optimization and Inverse Problems for LCDs 441 12.1 Theory of STUM Approximation 442 12.2 Exact and Approximate Expressions for Transmission Operators of Interfaces at Normal Incidence 447 12.3 Polarization Jones Matrix of an Inhomogeneous Nonabsorbing Anisotropic Layer with Negligible Bulk Reflection at Normal Incidence. Simple Representations of Polarization Matrices of LC Layers at Normal Incidence 463 12.4 Immersion Model of the Polarization-Converting System of an LCD 466 12.5 Determining Configurational and Optical Parameters of LC Layers With a Twisted Structure: Spectral Fitting Method 474 12.5.1 How to Bring Together the Experiment and Unitary Approximation 476 12.5.2 Parameterization and Solving the Inverse Problem 480 12.5.3 Appendix to Section 12.5 489 12.6 Optimization of Compensation Systems for Enhancement of Viewing Angle Performance of LCDs 490 References 504 13 A FewWords About Modeling of Fine-Structure LCDs and the Direct Ray Approximation 507 13.1 Virtual Microscope 508 13.2 Directional Illumination and Diffuse Illumination 513 References 516 A LCD Modeling Software MOUSE-LCD Used for the HKUST Students Final Year Projects (FYP) from 2003 to 2011 517 A.1 Introductory Remarks 517 A.2 Fast LCD 517 A.2.1 TN Cell 517 A.2.2 Effect of d/p Ratio 519 A.2.3 Effect of K22/K11 520 A.2.4 Effect of K33/K11 520 A.2.5 Effect of delta 521 A.2.6 Effect of gamma 521 A.2.7 Effect of Anchoring Strength W 523 A.2.8 Optimized TN Cell With Fast Response Time 523 A.2.9 Other LC Modes 524 A.3 Color LCD 524 A.3.1 The Super-Twisted Nematic Cell 524 A.3.2 STN Birefringent Colors in Transmissive and Reflective Modes 525 A.4 Transflective LCD 525 A.4.1 Vertical Aligned Nematic Cell 525 A.5 Switchable Viewing Angle LCD 535 A.6 Optimal e-paper Configurations 535 A.7 Color Filter Optimization 536 References 536 B Some Derivations and Examples 537 B.1 Conservation Law for Energy Flux 537 B.2 Lorentz’s Lemma 538 B.3 Nonexponential Waves 538 B.4 To the Power Series Method (Section 11.3.3) 540 B.5 One of the Ways to Obtain the Explicit Expressions for Transmission Jones Matrices of an Ideal Twisted LC Layer 541 Reference 543 Index 545

Read more less

Book SynopsisWritten by international experts in the field, this book covers the standards, architecture and deployment issues related to IP-based emergency services This book brings together contributions from experts on technical and operational aspects within the international standardisation and regulatory processes relating to routing and handling of IP-based emergency calls. Readers will learn how these standards work, how various standardization organizations contributed to them and about pilot projects, early deployment and current regulatory situation. Key Features: Provides an overview of how the standards related to IP-based emergency services work, and how various organizations contributed to them Focuses on SIP and IMS-based communication systems for the Internet Covers standards, architecture and deployment issues International focus, with coverage of the major national efforts in this area Written Trade Review“In addition, practitioners, product architects, and developers will find interesting and useful ideas. Many parts of the book can be recommended to experts working on standards and regulations.” (IEEE Communications Magazine, 1 February 2015) Table of ContentsList of Figures xiii List of Tables xvii List of Contributors xix Preface xxi Acknowledgments xxv Acronyms xxvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 History 1 1.2 Overview 5 1.3 Building Blocks 8 1.3.1 Recognizing Emergency Calls 8 1.3.2 Obtaining and Conveying Location Information 9 1.3.3 Routing Emergency Calls 9 2 Location: Formats, Encoding and Protocols 11 2.1 Applying the PIDF-LO civicAddress Type to US Addresses 14 2.1.1 Introduction: The Context and Purpose of PIDF-LO and CLDXF 15 2.1.2 CLDXF Elements 17 2.1.3 Conclusion 30 2.2 DHCP as a Location Configuration Protocol (LCP) 31 2.2.1 What’s New in RFC 6225? 32 2.2.2 DHCPv4 and DHCPv6 Option Formats 32 2.2.3 Option Support 35 2.2.4 Latitude and Longitude Fields 36 2.2.5 Altitude 36 2.2.6 Datum 37 2.3 Geography Markup Language (GML) 37 2.3.1 Introduction 37 2.3.2 Overview of the OGC 38 2.3.3 The OGC Geography Markup Language (GML) 38 2.3.4 Conclusion 47 2.4 A Taxonomy of the IETF HELD Protocol 47 2.4.1 The LIS and HELD 48 2.4.2 LIS Discovery 48 2.4.3 Basic HELD 53 2.4.4 HELD Target Identities and Third-Party Requests 59 2.4.5 HELD Measurements 62 2.4.6 HELD as a Dereference Protocol 64 2.4.7 HELD Policy URIs 66 2.4.8 HELD Device Capabilities 69 2.5 OMA Enablers and Emergency Services 72 2.5.1 SUPL 73 2.5.2 MLS 84 2.5.3 MLP 85 2.5.4 LOCSIP 89 2.6 3GPP Location Protocols 92 2.6.1 Introduction 92 2.6.2 Location Technology in 3GPP Networks 93 2.6.3 Emergency Location Information in 3GPP CS Domain, Control Plane 100 2.6.4 Emergency Location Information in the IMS 100 3 Architectures 103 3.1 NENA i2 104 3.1.1 Background 104 3.1.2 The i2 Architecture 105 3.1.3 Regulatory Situation and Deployment Status 117 3.2 NENA i3 119 3.2.1 History 119 3.2.2 Emergency Services IP Networks 120 3.2.3 Signaling and Routing IP-Originated Calls 121 3.2.4 Legacy Wireline and Wireless Origination 122 3.2.5 Emergency Events 123 3.2.6 Routing Calls Within the ESInet 123 3.2.7 Provisioning the ECRF 124 3.2.8 PSAPs 125 3.2.9 Other i3 Features 126 3.3 IETF Emergency Services for Internet Multimedia 126 3.3.1 Introduction 126 3.3.2 Recognizing Emergency Calls 128 3.3.3 Obtaining and Conveying Location Information 128 3.3.4 Routing Emergency Calls 129 3.3.5 Obligations 130 3.3.6 LoST Mapping Architecture 132 3.3.7 Steps Toward an IETF Emergency Services Architecture 135 3.3.8 Summary 138 3.4 Emergency Services Support in WiFi Networks 139 3.4.1 Introduction 139 3.4.2 Location Configuration 140 3.4.3 Support for Emergency Services 141 3.4.4 Support for Emergency Alert Systems 142 3.5 WiMAX 142 3.5.1 The WiMAX Network Architecture 143 3.5.2 Network Architecture for Emergency Services Support 148 3.5.3 The Fundamental Building Blocks 150 3.5.4 Roaming Considerations and Network Entry 152 3.5.5 Limited Access 154 3.5.6 Location Support in WiMAX 157 3.5.7 Conclusion 163 3.6 3GPP 163 3.6.1 Introduction 163 3.6.2 Requirements 164 3.6.3 Emergency Calls in the CS Domain 169 3.6.4 Emergency Calls in PS Domain 176 3.6.5 Identified Overload Problems 189 4 Deployment Examples 193 4.1 Emergency Calling in Sweden 195 4.1.1 Introduction 195 4.1.2 Overview 196 4.1.3 Protocols for PSAP Interconnection 198 4.1.4 Protocol Standards 200 4.1.5 Media 201 4.1.6 Emergency Call Routing 201 4.1.7 Testing 201 4.1.8 Examples 201 4.2 UK Specification for Locating VoIP Callers 209 4.2.1 Introduction 209 4.2.2 The Regulatory Environment 209 4.2.3 Standards Development 210 4.2.4 The Current UK Emergency Services Structure 210 4.2.5 Principles Driving the Specification 211 4.2.6 Putting It All Together 213 4.2.7 Implications for Access Network Providers 215 4.3 Implementation of VoIP 9-1-1 Services in Canada 216 4.3.1 Regulatory Framework (About the CRTC) 217 4.3.2 Canada’s Telecom Profile 217 4.3.3 Interim Solution for Nomadic and Fixed/Non-Native VoIP 220 4.3.4 The (Defunct) Canadian i2 Proposal 222 4.3.5 VoIP Regulatory Processes, Decisions and Milestones 227 4.3.6 Lessons Learned 229 4.3.7 Conclusion 230 4.4 US/Indiana Wireless Direct Network Project 230 4.4.1 Background and History of the IWDN 231 4.4.2 The IWDN Crossroads Project 231 4.4.3 The IN911 IP Network 232 4.4.4 Conclusion 235 5 Security for IP-Based Emergency Services 237 5.1 Introduction 237 5.2 Communication Model 238 5.3 Adversary Models and Security Threats 240 5.4 Security Threats 241 5.4.1 Denial-of-Service Attacks 242 5.4.2 Attacks Involving the Emergency Identifier 242 5.4.3 Attacks Against the Mapping System 243 5.4.4 Attacks Against the Location Information Server 244 5.4.5 Swatting 245 5.4.6 Attacks to Prevent a Specific Individual From Receiving Aid 246 5.4.7 Attacks to Gain Information About an Emergency 246 5.4.8 Interfering With the LIS and LoST Server Discovery Procedure 246 5.4.9 Call Identity Spoofing 247 5.5 Countermeasures 248 5.5.1 Discovery 248 5.5.2 Secure Session Setup and Caller Identity 250 5.5.3 Media Exchange 251 5.5.4 Mapping Database Security 251 6 Emergency Services for Persons With Disabilities 253 6.1 What Is Specific with Communication for People with Disabilities? 253 6.1.1 Important Characteristics of Regular Voice Telephony 253 6.1.2 Important Characteristics of Accessible Conversational Services Suitable for People with Disabilities 254 6.2 Reality Today 255 6.3 Interpretation of the Term “Equivalent Service” 255 6.4 Sad History 256 6.5 Policy and Regulation Support 256 6.5.1 UN Convention on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities 256 6.5.2 The European Union Universal Service Directive 257 6.5.3 The Telecom Act and Public Procurement Act in the United States 257 6.5.4 Americans With Disability Act 257 6.5.5 Relay Service Regulation in the United States 258 6.6 Good Opportunities in IP-Based Services 258 6.7 Implementation Experience 260 7 Regulatory Situation 261 7.1 Regulatory Aspects of Emergency Services in the United States 262 7.1.1 Introduction 262 7.1.2 Background 262 7.1.3 E9-1-1 Requirements 263 7.2 Regulatory Aspects of Emergency Services in the European Union 266 7.2.1 Introduction 266 7.2.2 Regulatory Development of Emergency Services Under EU Law 267 7.2.3 Current Legal Framework 267 7.2.4 New Legal Framework 274 7.2.5 Emergency Regulation Outside of the EU Telecom Regulatory Framework 276 7.2.6 Conclusion 276 8 Research Projects and Pilots 279 8.1 REACH112: Responding to All Citizens Needing Help 280 8.1.1 Outline 280 8.1.2 Emergency Service Access 282 8.1.3 The Obstacles 284 8.1.4 Conclusion 288 8.2 PEACE: IP-Based Emergency Applications and Services for Next-Generation Networks 288 8.2.1 Introduction 288 8.2.2 Project Scope 289 8.2.3 Development Status 291 8.3 US Department of Transportation’s NG 9-1-1 Pilot Project 298 8.3.1 Overview 298 8.3.2 Proof-of-Concept Description 300 8.3.3 Testing 313 8.3.4 Conclusion 317 9 Organizations 321 9.1 ETSI EMTEL 322 9.1.1 Purpose of ETSI Special Committee EMTEL (Emergency Communications) 322 9.1.2 Main Features of EMTEL 322 9.1.3 Scope of ETSI SC EMTEL Work 323 9.1.4 Operation and Activities of SC EMTEL 324 9.1.5 EMTEL Evolution and Strategy 324 9.1.6 Vision for Future Emergency Services 325 9.2 NENA 326 9.3 EENA 327 9.3.1 What Is EENA? 327 9.3.2 What EENA Does? 327 9.3.3 What Are the EENA Memberships? 328 9.4 Ecma International 330 9.4.1 Ecma International 330 9.4.2 Ecma Technical Committee TC32 331 9.4.3 ECMA TR/101, Next Generation Corporate Networks (NGCN) – Emergency Calls 331 9.5 ATIS 332 9.5.1 Emergency Services Interconnection Forum (ESIF) 332 9.5.2 Next-Generation Emergency Services (NGES) Subcommittee 333 9.5.3 Example ESIF Issues 334 9.5.4 Summary 336 9.6 The NG9-1-1 Caucus and the NG9-1-1 Institute 336 9.7 COCOM EGEA 338 10 Conclusion and Outlook 341 10.1 Location 341 10.2 Architectures 342 10.3 Deployments 343 10.4 Security and Privacy 344 10.5 Emergency Services for Persons with Disabilities 344 10.6 Regulation 345 10.7 Research Projects and Pilots 345 10.8 Funding 346 References 349 Index 363

Read more less

Book SynopsisFourier Methods in Imaging first introduces the basic mathematical concepts of linear algebra for vectors and functions, a knowledge of which is necessary for understanding the subsequent discussions.Trade Review"Overall, this is an excellent text, appropriate for the graduate student approaching this material for the first time, and for the seasoned professional looking for an up-to-date reference." (Journal of Electronic Imaging, 1 April 2011) "This comprehensive textbook represents a practical review of Fourier techniques in imaging methods. It will be very useful for graduate students (in engineering, science, computer science, and applied mathematics) as well as engineers interested in linear imaging systems." (Zentralblatt Math, 2010)Table of ContentsSeries Editor’s Preface. Preface. 1 Introduction. 1.1 Signals, Operators, and Imaging Systems. 1.2 The Three Imaging Tasks. 1.3 Examples of Optical Imaging. 1.4 ImagingTasks inMedical Imaging. 2 Operators and Functions. 2.1 Classes of Imaging Operators. 2.2 Continuous and Discrete Functions. Problems. 3 Vectors with Real-Valued Components. 3.1 Scalar Products. 3.2 Matrices. 3.3 Vector Spaces. Problems. 4 Complex Numbers and Functions. 4.1 Arithmetic of Complex Numbers. 4.2 Graphical Representation of Complex Numbers. 4.3 Complex Functions. 4.4 Generalized Spatial Frequency – Negative Frequencies. 4.5 Argand Diagrams of Complex-Valued Functions. Problems. 5 Complex-Valued Matrices and Systems. 5.1 Vectors with Complex-Valued Components. 5.2 Matrix Analogues of Shift-Invariant Systems. 5.3 Matrix Formulation of ImagingTasks. 5.4 Continuous Analogues of Vector Operations. Problems. 6 1-D Special Functions. 6.1 Definitions of 1-D Special Functions. 6.2 1-D Dirac Delta Function. 6.3 1-D Complex-Valued Special Functions. 6.4 1-D Stochastic Functions–Noise. 6.5 Appendix A: Area of SINC[x] and SINC2[x]. 6.6 Appendix B: Series Solutions for Bessel Functions J0[x] and J1[x]. Problems. 7 2-D Special Functions. 7.1 2-D Separable Functions. 7.2 Definitions of 2-D Special Functions. 7.3 2-D Dirac Delta Function and its Relatives. 7.4 2-D Functions with Circular Symmetry. 7.5 Complex-Valued 2-D Functions. 7.6 Special Functions of Three (orMore) Variables. Problems. 8 Linear Operators. 8.1 Linear Operators. 8.2 Shift-Invariant.Operators. 8.3 Linear Shift-Invariant (LSI) Operators. 8.4 Calculating Convolutions. 8.5 Properties of Convolutions. 8.6 Autocorrelation. 8.7 Crosscorrelation. 8.8 2-DLSIOperations. 8.9 Crosscorrelations of 2-D Functions. 8.10 Autocorrelations of 2-D.Functions. Problems. 9 Fourier Transforms of 1-D Functions. 9.1 Transforms of Continuous-Domain Functions. 9.2 Linear Combinations of Reference Functions. 9.3 Complex-Valued Reference Functions. 9.4 Transforms of Complex-Valued Functions. 9.5 Fourier Analysis of Dirac Delta Functions. 9.6 Inverse Fourier Transform. 9.7 Fourier Transforms of 1-D Special Functions. 9.8 Theorems of the Fourier Transform. 9.9 Appendix: Spectrum of Gaussian via Path Integral. Problems. 10 Multidimensional Fourier Transforms. 10.1 2-D Fourier Transforms. 10.2 Spectra of Separable 2-D Functions. 10.3 Theorems of 2-D Fourier Transforms. Problems. 11 Spectra of Circular Functions. 11.1 The Hankel Transform. 11.2 Inverse Hankel Transform. 11.3 Theorems of Hankel Transforms. 11.4 Hankel Transforms of Special Functions. 11.5 Appendix: Derivations of Equations (11.12) and (11.14). Problems. 12 The Radon Transform. 12.1 Line-Integral Projections onto Radial Axes. 12.2 Radon Transforms of Special Functions. 12.3 Theorems of the Radon Transform. 12.4 Inverse Radon Transform. 12.5 Central-Slice Transform. 12.6 Three Transforms of Four Functions. 12.7 Fourier and Radon Transforms of Images. Problems. 13 Approximations to Fourier Transforms. 13.1 Moment Theorem. 13.2 1-D Spectra via Method of Stationary Phase. 13.3 Central-Limit Theorem. 13.4 Width Metrics and Uncertainty Relations. Problems. 14 Discrete Systems, Sampling, and Quantization. 14.1 Ideal Sampling. 14.2 Ideal Sampling of Special Functions. 14.3 Interpolation of Sampled Functions. 14.4 Whittaker–Shannon Sampling Theorem. 14.5 Aliasingand Interpolation. 14.6 “Prefiltering” to Prevent Aliasing. 14.7 Realistic Sampling. 14.8 Realistic Interpolation. 14.9 Quantization. 14.10 Discrete Convolution. Problems. 15 Discrete Fourier Transforms. 15.1 Inverse of the Infinite-Support DFT. 15.2 DFT over Finite Interval. 15.3 Fourier Series Derived from Fourier Transform. 15.4 Efficient Evaluation of the Finite DFT. 15.5 Practical Considerations for DFT and FFT. 15.6 FFTs of 2-D Arrays. 15.7 Discrete Cosine Transform. Problems. 16 Magnitude Filtering. 16.1 Classes of Filters. 16.2 Eigenfunctions of Convolution. 16.3 Power Transmission of Filters. 16.4 Lowpass Filters. 16.5 Highpass Filters. 16.6 Bandpass Filters. 16.7 Fourier Transform as a Bandpass Filter. 16.8 Bandboost and Bandstop Filters. 16.9 Wavelet Transform. Problems. 17 Allpass (Phase) Filters. 17.1 Power-Series Expansion for Allpass Filters. 17.2 Constant-Phase Allpass Filter. 17.3 Linear-Phase Allpass Filter. 17.4 Quadratic-Phase Filter. 17.5 Allpass Filters with Higher-Order Phase. 17.6 Allpass Random-Phase Filter. 17.7 Relative Importance of Magnitude and Phase. 17.8 Imaging of Phase Objects. 17.9 Chirp Fourier Transform. Problems. 18 Magnitude–Phase Filters. 18.1 Transfer Functions of Three Operations. 18.2 Fourier Transform of Ramp Function. 18.3 Causal Filters. 18.4 Damped Harmonic Oscillator. 18.5 Mixed Filters with Linear or Random Phase. 18.6 Mixed Filter with Quadratic Phase. Problems. 19 Applications of Linear Filters. 19.1 Linear Filters for the Imaging Tasks. 19.2 Deconvolution– “Inverse Filtering”. 19.3 Optimum Estimators for Signals in Noise. 19.4 Detection of Known Signals – Matched Filter. 19.5 Analogies of Inverse and Matched Filters. 19.6 Approximations to Reciprocal Filters. 19.7 Inverse Filtering of Shift-Variant Blur. Problems. 20 Filtering in Discrete Systems. 20.1 Translation, Leakage, and Interpolation. 20.2 Averaging Operators– Lowpass Filters. 20.3 Differencing Operators – Highpass Filters. 20.4 Discrete Sharpening Operators. 20.5 2-DGradient. 20.6 Pattern Matching. 20.7 Approximate Discrete Reciprocal Filters. Problems. 21 Optical Imaging in Monochromatic Light. 21.1 Imaging Systems Based on Ray Optics Model. 21.2 Mathematical Model of Light Propagation. 21.3 Fraunhofer Diffraction. 21.4 Imaging System based on Fraunhofer Diffraction. 21.5 Transmissive Optical Elements. 21.6 Monochromatic Optical Systems. 21.7 Shift-Variant Imaging Systems. Problems. 22 Incoherent Optical Imaging Systems. 22.1 Coherence. 22.2 Polychromatic Source – Temporal Coherence. 22.3 Imaging in Incoherent Light. 22.4 System Function in Incoherent Light. Problems. 23 Holography. 23.1 Fraunhofer Holography. 23.2 Holography in Fresnel Diffraction Region. 23.3 Computer-Generated Holography. 23.4 Matched Filtering with Cell-Type CGH. 23.5 Synthetic-Aperture Radar (SAR). Problems. References. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides a cross-disciplinary reference to speech in mobile and pervasive environments Speech in Mobile and Pervasive Environments addresses the issues related to speech processing on resource-constrained mobile devices.Table of ContentsAbout the Series Editors xiii List of Contributors xv Foreword xvii Preface xix Acknowledgments xxiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Application design 3 1.2 Interaction modality 3 1.3 Speech processing 4 1.4 Evaluations 5 2 Mobile Speech Hardware: The Case for Custom Silicon 7 2.1 Introduction 7 2.2 Mobile hardware: Capabilities and limitations 11 2.2.1 Looking inside a mobile device: Smartphone example 11 2.2.2 Processing limitations 14 2.2.3 Memory limitations 16 2.2.4 Power limitations 19 2.2.5 Silicon technology and mobile hardware 22 2.3 Profiling existing software systems 24 2.3.1 Speech recognition overview 24 2.3.2 Profiling techniques summary 25 2.3.3 Processing time breakdown 27 2.3.4 Memory usage 29 2.3.5 Power and energy breakdown 30 2.3.6 Summary 32 2.4 Recognizers for mobile hardware: Conventional approaches 32 2.4.1 Reduced-resource embedded recognizers 33 2.4.2 Network recognizers 35 2.4.3 Distributed recognizers 36 2.4.4 An alternative approach: Custom hardware 38 2.5 Custom hardware for mobile speech recognition 38 2.5.1 Motivation 38 2.5.2 Hardware implementation: Feature extraction 40 2.5.3 Hardware implementation: Feature scoring 41 2.5.4 Hardware implementation: Search 44 2.5.5 Hardware implementation: Performance and power evaluation 47 2.5.6 Hardware implementation: Summary 49 2.6 Conclusion 49 Bibliography 50 3 Embedded Automatic Speech Recognition and Text-to-Speech Synthesis 57 3.1 Automatic speech recognition 57 3.2 Mathematical formulation 58 3.3 Acoustic parameterization 60 3.3.1 Landmark-based approach 64 3.4 Acoustic modeling 64 3.4.1 Unit selection 64 3.4.2 Hidden Markov models 66 3.5 Language modeling 69 3.6 Modifications for embedded speech recognition 71 3.6.1 Feature computation 71 3.6.2 Likelihood computation 75 3.7 Applications 77 3.7.1 Car navigation systems 77 3.7.2 Smart homes 78 3.7.3 Interactive toys 78 3.7.4 Smartphones 79 3.8 Text-to-speech synthesis 79 3.9 Text to speech in a nutshell 80 3.10 Front end 81 3.11 Back end 84 3.11.1 Rule-based synthesis 84 3.11.2 Data-driven synthesis 86 3.11.3 Statistical parameteric speech synthesis 90 3.12 Embedded text-to-speech 91 3.13 Evaluation 92 3.14 Summary 94 Bibliography 94 4 Distributed Speech Recognition 99 4.1 Elements of distributed speech processing 100 4.2 Front-end processing 101 4.2.1 Device requirements 103 4.2.2 Transmission issues in DSR 104 4.2.3 Back-end processing 105 4.3 ETSI standards 106 4.3.1 Basic front-end standard ES 201 108 107 4.3.2 Noise-robust front-end standard ES 202 050 107 4.3.3 Tonal-language recognition standard ES 202 211 107 4.4 Transfer protocol 108 4.4.1 Signaling 109 4.4.2 RTP payload format 109 4.5 Energy-aware distributed speech recognition 110 4.6 ESR, NSR, DSR 111 Bibliography 113 5 Context in Conversation 115 5.1 Context modeling and aggregation 115 5.1.1 An example of composer specification 121 5.2 Context-based speech applications: Conspeakuous 122 5.2.1 Conspeakuous architecture 124 5.2.2 B-Conspeakuous 125 5.2.3 Learning as a source of context 125 5.2.4 Implementation 127 5.2.5 A tourist portal application 130 5.3 Context-based speech applications: Responsive information architect 132 5.4 Conclusion 133 Bibliography 134 6 Software: Infrastructure, Standards, Technologies 137 6.1 Introduction 137 6.2 Mobile operating systems 139 6.3 Voice over internet protocol 140 6.3.1 Implications for mobile speech 141 6.3.2 Sample speech applications 142 6.3.3 Access channels 142 6.4 Standards 143 6.5 Standards: VXML 144 6.6 Standards: VoiceFleXML 145 6.6.1 Brief overview of speech-based systems 147 6.6.2 System architecture 148 6.6.3 System architecture: VoiceFleXML interpreter 150 6.6.4 VoiceFleXML: Voice browser 155 6.6.5 A prototype implementation 159 6.7 SAMVAAD 163 6.7.1 Background and problem setting 165 6.7.2 Reorganization algorithms 166 6.7.3 Minimizing the number of dialogs 167 6.7.4 Hybrid call-flows 171 6.7.5 Minimally altered call-flows 172 6.7.6 Device-independent call-flow characterization 174 6.7.7 SAMVAAD: Architecture, implementation and experiments 175 6.7.8 Splitting dialog call-flows 180 6.8 Conclusion 188 6.9 Summary and future work 188 Bibliography 189 7 Architecture of Mobile Speech-Based and Multimodal Dialog Systems 191 7.1 Introduction 191 7.2 Multimodal architectures 193 7.3 Multimodal frameworks 195 7.4 Multimodal mobile applications 196 7.4.1 Mobile companion 197 7.4.2 MUMS 199 7.4.3 TravelMan 200 7.4.4 Stopman 203 7.5 Architectural models 206 7.5.1 Client–server systems 207 7.5.2 Dialog description systems 208 7.5.3 Generic model for distributed mobile multimodal speech systems 210 7.6 Distribution in the Stopman system 211 7.7 Conclusions 214 Bibliography 214 8 Evaluation of Mobile and Pervasive Speech Applications 219 8.1 Introduction 220 8.1.1 Spoken interaction 220 8.1.2 Mobile-use context 222 8.1.3 Speech and mobility 223 8.2 Evaluation of mobile speech-based systems 224 8.2.1 User interface evaluation methodology 225 8.2.2 Technical evaluation of speech-based systems 226 8.2.3 Usability evaluations 227 8.2.4 Subjective metrics and objective metrics 228 8.2.5 Laboratory and field studies 230 8.2.6 Simulating mobility in the laboratory 231 8.2.7 Studying social context 232 8.2.8 Long- and short-term studies 232 8.2.9 Validity 233 8.3 Case studies 235 8.3.1 STOPMAN evaluation 235 8.3.2 TravelMan evaluation 240 8.3.3 Discussion 247 8.4 Theoretical measures for dialog call-flows 248 8.4.1 Introduction 248 8.4.2 Dialog call-flow characterization 250 8.4.3 (m,q,a)-characterization 251 8.4.4 (m,q,a)-complexity 253 8.4.5 Call-flow analysis using (m,q,a)-complexity 254 8.5 Conclusions 257 Bibliography 258 9 Developing Regions 263 9.1 Introduction 264 9.2 Applications and studies 264 9.2.1 VoiKiosk 265 9.2.2 HealthLine 267 9.2.3 The spoken web 268 9.2.4 TapBack 271 9.3 Systems 275 9.4 Challenges 278 Bibliography 278 Index 281

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book is a collection of projects based around various microcontrollers from the PIC family. The reader is carefully guided through the book, from very simple to more complex projects in order to gradually build their knowledge about PIC microcontrollers and digital electronics in general.Table of ContentsAbout the Authors vii Preface ix Acknowledgements xiii 1 PREPARING TO DO A PIC PROJECT 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Overview of PIC Microcontroller 2 1.3 Basics of PIC Assembly Language 9 1.4 Introduction to C Programming for PIC Microcontroller 16 1.5 MPLAB Integrated Development Environment (IDE) 28 1.6 Advanced Debugger Features – Stimulus 48 2 SIMPLE INTERFACES 55 2.1 Introduction 55 2.2 PIC12F629 Circuit Design 56 2.3 The PIC12F629 Strip Board Design 57 2.4 The PIC12F629 PCB Board Design 58 2.5 The PIC12F629 – Flashing LED Application 59 2.6 PIC16F627A Circuit Design 68 2.7 PIC16F629 Strip Board Design 69 2.8 PIC16F627A PCB Board Design 70 2.9 PIC16F627A – Display Segments 71 3 DISPLAY INTERFACES 83 3.1 Introduction 83 3.2 PIC16F627A Four-Digit, Seven-Segment LED Display Circuit Design 84 3.3 PIC16F627A Four-Digit, Seven-Segment LED Display Circuit Strip Board Design 84 3.4 PIC12F629 PCB Board Design 86 3.5 PIC16F627A Four-Digit, Seven-Segment LED Display Circuit Application 86 3.6 PIC16F627A LCD Display Circuit Design 93 3.7 PIC16F627A Four-Digit, Seven-Segment LED Display Circuit Strip Board and PCB Design 95 3.8 PIC16F627A LCD Display Circuit Application 96 4 RS232 INTERFACES 105 4.1 Introduction 105 4.2 RS232 Interface Circuit Design 106 4.3 PIC16F627A MCU – Transmit – C Program 109 4.4 PIC16F627A MCU – Transmit – Assembly Program 115 4.5 PIC16F627A MCU – Receive – C Program 119 4.6 PIC16F627A MCU – Receive – Assembly Program 121 4.7 PIC16F627A MCU – Transmit-Receive – C Program 124 4.8 PIC16F627A MCU – Transmit-Receive – Assembly Program 126 5 INTERFACING PICS WITH THE ANALOG WORLD 129 5.1 Introduction 129 5.2 Hardware Description 132 5.3 Level Indicator Program and Advanced Simulator Features 133 5.4 Level Indicator with Timing 147 5.5 Level Indicator with Better Timing – Timer Interrupts 149 5.6 Talkthrough Program with Adjustable Sampling Rate 156 6 OTHER PIC PROJECTS 159 6.1 Introduction 159 6.2 Stepper Motor Controller using PIC12F675 159 6.3 DC Motor Controller using a PIC12F675 164 6.4 An Ultrasonic Measuring System using the PIC16F627A 167 6.5 Function Generator 173 6.6 Digital Filtering 178 Appendix 189 Index 191

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive, encompassing and accessible text examining a wide range of key Wireless Networking and Localization technologies This book provides a unified treatment of issues related to all wireless access and wireless localization techniques. The book reflects principles of design and deployment of infrastructure for wireless access and localization for wide, local, and personal networking. Description of wireless access methods includes design and deployment of traditional TDMA and CDMA technologies and emerging Long Term Evolution (LTE) techniques for wide area cellular networks, the IEEE 802.11/WiFi wireless local area networks as well as IEEE 802.15 Bluetooth, ZigBee, Ultra Wideband (UWB), RF Microwave and body area networks used for sensor and ad hoc networks. The principles of wireless localization techniques using time-of-arrival and received-signal-strength of the wireless signal used in military and commercial applications in smart devices operating in urTable of ContentsPreface xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Elements of Information Networks 3 1.3 Evolution of Wireless Access to the PSTN 17 1.4 Evolution of Wireless Access to the Internet 21 1.5 Evolution of Wireless Localization Technologies 27 1.6 Structure of this Book 29 Part I PRINCIPLES OF AIR–INTERFERENCE DESIGN 2 Characteristics of the Wireless Medium 39 2.1 Introduction 39 2.2 Modeling of Large-scale RSS, Path Loss, and Shadow Fading 45 2.3 Modeling of RSS Fluctuations and Doppler Spectrum 60 2.4 Wideband Modeling of Multipath Characteristics 72 2.5 Emerging Channel Models 79 Appendix A2: What Is the Decibel? 84 3 Physical Layer Alternatives forWireless Networks 99 3.1 Introduction 99 3.2 Physical Layer Basics: Data rate, Bandwidth, and Power 100 3.3 Performance in Multipath Wireless Channels 107 3.4 Wireless Transmission Techniques 112 3.5 Multipath Resistant Techniques 120 3.6 Coding Techniques for Wireless Communications 136 3.7 Cognitive Radio and Dynamic Spectrum Access 145 Appendix A3 145 4 Medium Access Methods 153 4.1 Introduction 153 4.2 Centralized Assigned-Access Schemes 155 4.3 Distributed Random Access for Data Oriented Networks 173 4.4 Integration of Voice and Data Traffic 195 Part II PRINCIPLES OF NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN 5 Deployment ofWireless Networks 217 5.1 Introduction 217 5.2 Wireless Network Architectures 218 5.3 Interference in Wireless Networks 224 5.4 Deployment of Wireless LANs 233 5.5 Cellular Topology, Cell Fundamentals, and Frequency Reuse 238 5.6 Capacity Expansion Techniques 248 5.7 Network Planning for CDMA Systems 268 5.8 Femtocells 270 6 Wireless Network Operations 275 6.1 Introduction 275 6.2 Cell Search and Registration 281 6.3 Mobility Management 283 6.4 Radio Resources and Power Management 301 7 Wireless Network Security 321 7.1 Introduction 321 7.2 Security in Wireless Local Networks 324 7.3 Security in Wireless Personal Networks 330 7.4 Security in Wide Area Wireless Networks 334 7.5 Miscellaneous Issues 340 Appendix A7: An Overview of Cryptography and Cryptographic Protocols 341 Part III WIRELESS LOCAL ACCESS 8 Wireless LANs 357 8.1 Introduction 357 8.2 Wireless Local Area Networks and Standards 363 8.3 IEEE 802.11 WLAN Operations 369 9 Low Power Sensor Networks 405 9.1 Introduction 405 9.2 Bluetooth 406 9.3 IEEE 802.15.4 and ZigBee 424 9.4 IEEE 802.15.6 Body Area Networks 434 10 GigabitWireless 447 10.1 Introduction 447 10.2 UWB Communications at 3.1–10.6 GHz 451 10.3 Gigabit Wireless at 60 GHz 467 Part IV WIDE AREA WIRELESS ACCESS 11 TDMA Cellular Systems 479 11.1 Introduction 479 11.2 What is TDMA Cellular? 480 11.3 Mechanisms to Support a Mobile Environment 486 11.4 Communication Protocols 491 11.5 Channel Models for Cellular Networks 501 11.6 Transmission Techniques in TDMA Cellular 508 11.7 Evolution of TDMA for Internet Access 512 12 CDMA Cellular Systems 519 12.1 Introduction 519 12.2 Why CDMA? 520 12.3 CDMA Based Cellular Systems 521 12.4 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum 522 12.5 Communication Channels and Protocols in Example CDMA Systems 534 12.6 Cell Search, Mobility, and Radio Resource Management in CDMA 546 12.7 High Speed Packet Access 554 13 OFDM and MIMO Cellular Systems 561 13.1 Introduction 561 13.2 Why OFDM? 562 13.3 Multiple Input Multiple Output 572 13.4 WiMax 576 13.5 Long Term Evolution 582 13.6 LTE Advanced 591 Part V WIRELESS LOCALIZATION 14 Geolocation Systems 597 14.1 Introduction 597 14.2 What is Wireless Geolocation? 598 14.3 RF Location Sensing and Positioning Methodologies 602 14.4 Location Services Architecture for Cellular Systems 613 14.5 Positioning in Ad Hoc and Sensor Networks 620 15 Fundamentals of RF Localization 625 15.1 Introduction 625 15.2 Modeling of the Behavior of RF Sensors 626 15.3 Performance Bounds for Ranging 631 15.4 Wireless Positioning Algorithms 639 16 Wireless Localization in Practice 653 16.1 Introduction 653 16.2 Emergence of Wi-Fi Localization 653 16.3 Comparison of Wi-Fi Localization Systems 657 16.4 Practical TOA Measurement 665 16.5 Localization in the Absence of DP 669 16.6 Challenges in Localization inside the Human Body 675 References 687 Index 701

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book offers a practical guide on how to use and apply channel models for system evaluation In this book, the authors focus on modeling and simulation of multiple antennas channels, including multiple input multiple output (MIMO) communication channels, and the impact of such models on channel estimation and system performance. Both narrowband and wideband models are addressed. Furthermore, the book covers topics related to modeling of MIMO channel, their numerical simulation, estimation and prediction, as well as applications to receive diversity, capacity and space-time coding techniques. Key Features: Contains significant background material, as well as novel research coverage, which make the book suitable for both graduate students and researchers Addresses issues such as key-hole, correlated and non i.i.d. channels in the frame of the Generalized Gaussian approach Provides a unique treatment of generalized GaussianTable of ContentsAbout the Series Editors xi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 General remarks 1 1.2 Signals, interference, and types of parallel channels 3 2 Four-parametric model of a SISO channel 7 2.1 Multipath propagation 7 2.2 Random walk approach to modeling of scattering field 13 2.2.1 Random walk in two dimensions as a model for scattering field 13 2.2.2 Phase distribution and scattering strength 14 2.2.3 Distribution of intensity 14 2.2.4 Distribution of the random phase 17 2.3 Gaussian case 18 2.3.1 Four-parametric distribution family 18 2.3.2 Distribution of the magnitude 20 2.3.3 Distribution of the phase 27 2.3.4 Moment generating function, moments and cumulants of four-parametric distribution 29 2.3.5 Some aspects of multiple scattering propagation 29 3 Models of MIMO channels 33 3.1 General classification of MIMO channel models 33 3.2 Physical models 33 3.2.1 Deterministic models 34 3.2.2 Geometry-based stochastic models 35 3.3 Analytical models 36 3.3.1 Channel matrix model 37 3.4 Geometrical phenomenological models 47 3.4.1 Scattering from rough surfaces 48 3.5 On the role of trigonometric polynomials in analysis and simulation of MIMO channels 49 3.5.1 Measures of dependency 50 3.5.2 Non-negative trigonometric polynomials and their use in estimation of AoD and AoA distribution 51 3.5.3 Approximation of marginal PDF using non-negative polynomials 51 3.6 Canonical expansions of bivariate distributions and the structure MIMO channel covariance matrix 52 3.6.1 Canonical variables and expansion 52 3.6.2 General structure of the full covariance matrix 54 3.6.3 Relationship to other models 54 3.7 Bivariate von Mises distribution with correlated transmit and receive sides 56 3.7.1 Single cluster scenario 56 3.7.2 Multiple clusters scenario 58 3.8 Bivariate uniform distributions 58 3.8.1 Harmonic coupling 58 3.8.2 Markov-type bivariate density 61 3.9 Analytical expression for the diversity measure of an antenna array 62 3.9.1 Relation of the shape of the spatial covariance function to trigonometric moments 62 3.9.2 Approximation of the diversity measure for a large number of antennas 64 3.9.3 Examples 66 3.9.4 Leading term analysis of degrees of freedom 70 3.10 Effect of AoA/AoD dependency on the SDoF 72 3.11 Space-time covariance function 72 3.11.1 Basic equation 72 3.11.2 Approximations 73 3.12 Examples: synthetic data and uniform linear array 75 3.13 Approximation of a matrix by a Toeplitz matrix 77 3.14 Asymptotic expansions of diversity measure 78 3.15 Distributed scattering model 79 4 Modeling of wideband multiple channels 81 4.1 Standard models of channels 82 4.1.1 COST 259/273 82 4.1.2 3GPP SCM 83 4.1.3 WINNER channel models 84 4.2 MDPSS based wideband channel simulator 84 4.2.1 Geometry of the problem 84 4.2.2 Statistical description 85 4.2.3 Multi-cluster environment 87 4.2.4 Simulation of dynamically changing environment 88 4.3 Measurement based simulator 89 4.4 Examples 91 4.4.1 Two cluster model 92 4.4.2 Environment specified by joint AoA/AoD/ToA distribution 93 4.4.3 Measurement based simulator 95 4.5 Appendix A: simulation parameters 96 5 Capacity of communication channels 99 5.1 Introduction 99 5.2 Ergodic capacity of MIMO channel 100 5.2.1 Capacity of a constant (static) MIMO channel 100 5.2.2 Alternative normalization 102 5.2.3 Capacity of a static MIMO channel under different operation modes 103 5.2.4 Ergodic capacity of a random channel 104 5.2.5 Ergodic capacity of MIMO channels 106 5.2.6 Asymptotic analysis of capacity and outage capacity 106 5.3 Effects of MIMO models and their parameters on the predicted capacity of MIMO channels 109 5.3.1 Channel estimation and effective SNR 110 5.3.2 Achievable rates in Rayleigh channels with partial CSI 113 5.3.3 Examples 116 5.4 Time evolution of capacity 119 5.4.1 Time evolution of capacity in SISO channels 119 5.4.2 SISO channel capacity evolution 120 5.5 Sparse MIMO channel model 122 5.6 Statistical properties of capacity 124 5.6.1 Some mathematical expressions 124 5.7 Time-varying statistics 125 5.7.1 Unordered eigenvalues 125 5.7.2 Single cluster capacity LCR and AFD 126 5.7.3 Approximation of multi-cluster capacity LCR and AFD 126 5.7.4 Statistical simulation results 129 6 Estimation and prediction of communication channels 131 6.1 General remarks on estimation of time-varying channels 131 6.2 Velocity estimation 131 6.2.1 Velocity estimation based on the covariance function approximation 131 6.2.2 Estimation based on reflection coefficients 132 6.3 K-factor estimation 133 6.3.1 Moment matching estimation 133 6.3.2 I/Q based methods 134 6.4 Estimation of four-parametric distributions 135 6.5 Estimation of narrowband MIMO channels 138 6.5.1 Superimposed pilot estimation scheme 138 6.5.2 LS estimation 140 6.5.3 Scaled least-square (SLS) estimation 142 6.5.4 Minimum MSE 144 6.5.5 Relaxed MMSE estimators 146 6.6 Using frames for channel state estimation 148 6.6.1 Properties of the spectrum of a mobile channel 149 6.6.2 Frames based on DPSS 150 6.6.3 Discrete prolate spheroidal sequences 150 6.6.4 Numerical simulation 154 7 Effects of prediction and estimation errors on performance of communication systems 157 7.1 Kolmogorov–Szeg¨o-Krein formula 160 7.2 Prediction error for different antennas and scattering characteristics 162 7.2.1 SISO channel 162 7.2.2 SIMO channel 165 7.2.3 MISO channel 167 7.2.4 MIMO channel 170 7.3 Summary of infinite horizon prediction results 174 7.4 Eigenstructure of two cluster correlation matrix 175 7.5 Preliminary comments on finite horizon prediction 176 7.6 SISO channel prediction 178 7.6.1 Wiener filter 178 7.6.2 Single pilot prediction in a two cluster environment 179 7.6.3 Single cluster prediction with multiple past samples 181 7.6.4 Two cluster prediction with multiple past samples 182 7.6.5 Role of oversampling 187 7.7 What is the narrowband signal for a rectangular array? 188 7.8 Prediction using the UIU model 190 7.8.1 Separable covariance matrix 191 7.8.2 1 × 2 unseparable example 192 7.8.3 Large number of antennas: no noise 193 7.8.4 Large number of antennas: estimation in noise 194 7.8.5 Effects of the number of antennas, scattering geometry, and observation time on the quality of prediction 195 7.9 Numerical simulations 198 7.9.1 SISO channel single cluster 198 7.9.2 Two cluster prediction 198 7.10 Wiener estimator 199 7.11 Approximation of the Wiener filter 201 7.11.1 Zero order approximation 202 7.11.2 Perturbation solution 202 7.12 Element-wise prediction of separable process 203 7.13 Effect of prediction and estimation errors on capacity calculations 204 7.14 Channel estimation and effective SNR 205 7.14.1 System model 205 7.14.2 Estimation error 205 7.14.3 Effective SNR 207 7.15 Achievable rates in Rayleigh channels with partial CSI 208 7.15.1 No CSI at the transmitter 208 7.15.2 Partial CSI at the transmitter 209 7.15.3 Optimization of the frame length 211 7.16 Examples 211 7.16.1 P(0, 0) Estimation 211 7.16.2 Effect of non-uniform scattering 213 7.17 Conclusions 214 7.18 Appendix A: Szeg¨o summation formula 215 7.19 Appendix B: matrix inversion lemma 216 8 Coding, modulation, and signaling over multiple channels 219 8.1 Signal constellations and their characteristics 219 8.2 Performance of OSTBC in generalized Gaussian channels and hardening effect 224 8.2.1 Introduction 224 8.2.2 Channel representation 225 8.2.3 Probability of error 227 8.2.4 Hardening effect 229 8.3 Differential time-space modulation (DTSM) and an effective solution for the non-coherent MIMO channel 233 8.3.1 Introduction to DTSM 233 8.3.2 Performance of autocorrelation receiver of DSTM in generalized Gaussian channels 234 8.3.3 Comments on MIMO channel model 235 8.3.4 Differential space-time modulation 235 8.3.5 Performance of DTSM 237 8.3.6 Numerical results and discussions 243 8.3.7 Some comments 243 Bibliography 245 Index 257

Read more less

Book SynopsisIndustrial energy systems channel fuels and power into a variety of energy types such as steam, direct heat, hot fluids and gases, and shaft power for compressors, fans, pumps, and other machine-driven equipment. All of these processes impact the environment and are impacted by external energy and environmental policies and regulations.Table of ContentsAbout the Authors. Preface. Introductory Chapter: Framework for Energy and Environmental Management in Industry. 1. Introduction. 2. Energy Use by Industrial Operations. 3. Environmental Impacts of Industrial Operations. 4. End Use Energy Efficiency. 5. Efficiency of Using Raw Materials. 6. Global Energy Policy Framework. 7. Energy and Environmental Policies. 7.1 Integrated Pollution Prevention and Control (IPPC). 7.2 Energy Markets Deregulation and Liberalization. 7.3 Consumers’ Choice in the Liberalized Energy Market. 7.4 Emissions Trading. 7.5 Compulsory Energy Efficiency Programs. 7.6 Voluntary Programs. 8. Industries’ Self-Motivation for Effective Energy and Environmental Performance. 9. Environmentally Responsible Investing. 10. Where to Look for Energy and Environmental Performance Improvements. 11. Bibliography. Part I: Energy and Environmental Management System in Industry (EEMS). 1. Introducing the Energy and Environmental Management System. 1.1 Introduction. 1.2 Definition of terms. 1.3 Energy and Environmental Management System. 1.4 Objectives of Energy and Environmental Management. 1.5 Dynamics of Energy and Environmental Management. 1.6 Human Aspects of Energy and Environmental Management. 1.7 Initiating Training, Awareness and Motivation Programs. 1.8 Bibliography. 2. The Energy and Environmental Management Concept. 2.1 Introduction. 2.2 Interactions between Energy and Production. 2.3 Energy Cost Centers. 2.4 Assigning Responsibilities for Energy and Environmental Performance. 2.6 Effective Use of Energy and Environmental Performance Indicators. 2.7 Concept of Energy and Environmental Management System. 2.8 Context of Energy and Environmental Management. 2.9 Bibliography. 3. Relationship between Energy Use and Production Volume. 3.1 Introduction. 3.2 Energy/Production Relationship by Design. 3.3 Energy/Production Relationship by Standard Operational Procedure. 3.4 Presenting the Dynamics of the Energy/Production Relationship by Scatter Diagram. 3.5 Interpretation of Energy/Production Data Pattern on the Scatter Diagram. 3.6 Statistical Methods for Energy/Production Variability Analysis. 3.7 Meaning and Use of the Regression Line in Energy Performance Evaluation. 3.8 Summary of Presenting and Analyzing the Energy/Production Relationship. 3.9 Bibliography. 4. Evaluating the Performance of Energy and Environmental Management Practice. 4.1 Evaluation of Past Performance. 4.2 Energy and Environmental Auditing. 4.3 Evaluating Organizational Aspects. 4.4 Evaluating Operational Aspects. 4.5 Setting a Baseline for Monitoring Performance Improvements. 4.6 Setting Initial Targets for Performance Improvement. 4.7 Monitoring Energy and Environmental Performance. 4.8 Verifying Performance Improvements – CUSUM Technique. 4.9 Moving Toward Targets – Process of Change. 4.10 Bibliography. 5. Implementation of the Energy and Environmental Management System. 5.1 Introduction. 5.2 Phases of EEMS Implementation Process. 5.3 Preparation and Planning. 5.4 Implementation Plan. 5.5 EEMS Operation. 5.6 Learning Through EEMS Operation. 5.7 Continuity and Communication. 5.8 Integration of EEMS with Business Management System. 6. Energy and Environmental Management as a Driver for Integrated Performance Management. 6.1 Introduction. 6.2 Integrated Performance Management in Operations. 6.3 Strategic Aspects of Performance Management. 6.4 Integrated Performance Measurement System. 6.5 Integrated Performance Management. 6.6 Conclusion. 6.7 Bibliography. Part II: Engineering Aspects of Industrial Energy Management. 1. Introduction to Industrial Energy Systems. 1.1 Introduction. 1.2 Industrial Energy Systems Analysis. 2 Industrial Steam System. 2.1 System Description. 2.1.1 Boilers. 2.3 Principles of Performance Analysis. 2.4 Analysis of Boiler Performance. 2.5 Factors Influencing Boiler Performance. 2.6 Opportunities for Boiler Performance Improvement. 2.7 Software for Boiler Performance Analysis. 2.8 Boiler Performance Monitoring. 2.9 Steam Distribution and Condensate Return System. 2.10 Condensate Return System. 2.11 Environmental Impacts. 2.12 Bibliography. 3. Industrial Electric Power System. 3.1 Introduction. 3.2 Description of Industrial Electric Power Systems. 3.3 Basic Terms. 3.4 Tariff System. 3.5 Main Components of Industrial Electric Power Systems. 3.6 Performance Assessment of Industrial Electric Power Systems. 3.7 Performance Improvement Opportunities. 3.8 Maintenance Considerations. 3.9 Performance Monitoring. 3.10 Environmental Impacts. 3.11 Bibliography. 4. Compressed Air System. 4.1 System Description. 4.2 Performance Analysis. 4.3 Performance Improvement Opportunities. 4.4 Performance Monitoring. 4.5 Example: Detailed Energy Audit of Compressed Air System. 4.6 Example: Comparison of Load/Unload and Pump-up Tests. 4.7 Bibliography. 5. Refrigeration System. 5.1 Description of System. 5.2 Performance Definitions. 5.3 Performance Analysis. 5.4 Performance Improvement Opportunities. 5.5 Performance Monitoring. 5.6 Example: Improvement of ChilledWater System Operation. 5.7 Bibliography. 6. Industrial Cogeneration. 6.1 System Description. 6.2 Principles of Operation. 6.3 Types of Industrial Cogeneration Plants. 6.4 Operational Modes of Cogeneration Systems. 6.5 Performance Definition. 6.6 Factors Influencing Performance. 6.7 Economic Aspects of Cogeneration as a Performance Improvement Measure. 6.8 Performance Assessment. 6.9 Performance Monitoring and Improvement. 6.10 Environmental Impacts 415. 6.11 Case Study: Drying Kiln (Gas Turbine Operation Philosophy Improvement). 6.12 Bibliography. Part III: Toolbox – Fundamentals for Analysis and Calculation of Energy and Environmental Performance. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents a comprehensive examination of LCD backlights including up-to-date developments in both academia and industry. Covers the design considerations and technical requirements for the multiple applications of LCD backlights.Trade Review"LCD Backlights is an invaluable resource for researchers and general readers alike. . . includes an impressive spectrum of topics. Having specialized for nearly 10 years in this field, I can attest to the fact that it would be hard to find anywhere else the range of backlighting technology and information covered in this book." (SID ID Magazine, 2010) "LCD Backlights is an invaluable resource for researchers and general readers alike.... [It] would be hard to find any where else the ‘fullness’ of backlighting technology and information covered in this book." (Information Display, May 2009)Table of ContentsSeries Editor’s Foreword. About the Editors. List of Contributors. Preface. PART ONE BACKLIGHTS BY USE. 1 Technical Trends and Requirements/Specifications for LCD TV Backlights (S. Y. Lee, SAMSUNG Electronics). 1.1 Introduction. 1.2 Structure of LCD TV Backlights. 1.3 Trends in LCD TV Backlights. 1.4 Requirements/Specifications for LCD TV Backlights. 1.5 Conclusions. References. 2 Improvement of Moving Picture Quality by Means of Backlight Control (T. Yamamoto, Hitachi, Ltd). 2.1 Introduction. 2.2 Blur of Moving Images on LC Displays. 2.3 Methods of Reducing Motion Blur. 2.4 Backlight Blinking. 2.5 Conclusions. References. 3 Multiple Primary Color Backlights (H. Sugiura, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation). 3.1 Present Status. 3.2 Technological Impacts. 3.3 Operation of Prototype, Six-primary-color Monitor. 3.4 Details of a Six-primary-color Backlight Unit. 3.5 Signal Processing of Transforming from Three Primaries to Six Primaries. 3.6 Color Gamut of the Prototype Monitor. 3.7 Other Techniques for Multiple Primary Color LC-TVs. 3.8 Remaining Issues. References. 4 Reduction of Backlight Power Consumption of LCD-TVs (T. Shiga, The University of Electro-Communications). 4.1 Introduction. 4.2 Display Method of LCD and Power Reduction. 4.3 Principle of the Adaptive Dimming Technique. 4.4 Adaptive Dimming Control and Power Consumption. 4.5 Other Features of the Adaptive Dimming Technique. References. 5 Notebook PC/Monitor Backlights (B. H. Hong, Kwangwoon University). 5.1 Introduction. 5.2 Characteristics Required for Backlights. 5.3 Optical Systems for Backlights. 5.4 Light Sources for Backlights. 5.5 Optical Components of Backlights. References. 6 Backlights for Handheld Data Terminals (S. Aoyama, Omron Corporation). 6.1 Introduction. 6.2 Basic Structure and Principles of LED Backlights. 6.3 Constituents of LED BLUs. 6.4 Various LED Backlight Configurations. 6.5 Conclusions. References. PART TWO LIGHT SOURCE DEVICES. 7 CCFL Backlights (K. Yamaguchi, Panasonic Photo & Lighting). 7.1 Introduction. 7.2 Structure and Operating Principle of CCFLs. 7.3 Basic Characteristics of CCFLs. 7.4 Future Trends in CCFLs. 7.5 Conclusions. 8 CCFL Inverters (T. Uematsu, TDK). 8.1 Introduction. 8.2 Various Drive Schemes of CCFL Inverters. 8.3 Equivalent Circuit of CCFLs. 8.4 Inverter Circuits. 8.5 Driving of CCFLs with Inverters. 8.6 Lamp Current Balancers for Driving Multiple Lamps. 8.7 Conclusions. References. 9 HCFL Backlights (A. A. S. Sluyterman, Philips Lighting). 9.1 HCFL Light Source as a Member of the Fluorescent Lamp Family. 9.2 Introduction of the Hot Cathode in Fluorescent Lamps. 9.3 Driving the HCFL. 9.4 Cathode Life Properties of HCFL. 9.5 Lumen Maintenance and Color Point Shift during Life. 9.6 Designing a Backlight with HCFL. 9.7 The Scanning Feature, Cost-effectively Enabled by HCFL. 9.8 The Dimming Feature. 9.9 Conclusions. References. 10 EEFL Backlights (J.-H. Ko, Hallym University). 10.1 Introduction. 10.2 Basic Characteristics of EEFLs. 10.3 Advantages and Disadvantages of EEFL Backlights. 10.4 Technological Trends of EEFL Backlights. 10.5 Development Targets. 10.6 Conclusions. References. 11 FFL Backlights (G. Kim, GLD Co., Ltd. and Mirae Corporation, and S. Lim, Dankook University). 11.1 Introduction. 11.2 The History of FFL Development. 11.3 Characteristics of FFLs. 11.4 Features of the FFL. References. 12 Magnetically Coupled Electrodeless Lamps (F. Okamoto, Matsushita Electric Works). 12.1 Introduction. 12.2 The Operating Principle of Electrodeless Lamps. 12.3 Environmental Protection. 12.4 Features of Electrodeless Lamps. 12.5 Commercial Products with Electrodeless Lamps. 12.6 Trends in Research and Development. 12.7 Application to LCD Backlights. 12.8 Conclusions. References. 13 Mercury-free Fluorescent Lamp Backlights (T. Shiga, The University of Electro-Communications). 13.1 Introduction. 13.2 Basic Characteristics of Mercury Discharge. 13.3 Basic Characteristics of Xenon Discharge. 13.4 Mercury-free Xe Discharge Fluorescent Lamps. 13.5 Mercury-free Xe Flat Discharge Lamp. 13.6 Conclusions. References. 14 LED Backlights (M. Zeiler and J. Hüttner, OSRAM Opto Semiconductors GmbH). 14.1 Introduction. 14.2 LED Device Principle. 14.3 LED Backlight Solutions for Different LCD Sizes. 14.4 Conclusions. References. 15 Technological Trends of LED Backlight Units (Y. Kondo, NEC LCD Technologies). 15.1 Introduction. 15.2 Structure of LED Backlight Units. 15.3 Design of LED Backlight Units. 15.4 Requirements for Backlight Units. 15.5 Technical Trends of LED Backlights. 15.6 Applications of LED Backlights. 15.7 Conclusions. 16 White OLED Backlights (J. Jang, Kyung Hee University). 16.1 Introduction. 16.2 White OLED with a Single-layer Emission. 16.3 White OLED with Multi-layer Emission. 16.4 WOLED with Color Conversion. 16.5 Stacked WOLED Devices. 16.6 Applications of WOLEDs. 16.7 Research and Development Status. References. 17 Inorganic EL Backlights (S. Okamoto, NHK Science & Technical Research Laboratories). 17.1 Introduction. 17.2 Classification of Inorganic EL Devices. 17.3 Device Structures and Characteristics. 17.4 High-luminance Inorganic EL Devices. 17.5 Practical Examples of Backlight Use. References. 18 Field Emission Backlights (M. Ushirozawa, NHK Science & Technical Research Laboratories). 18.1 Introduction. 18.2 Field Electron Emitter. 18.3 Lamp Container and Vacuum Seal. 18.4 Cathodoluminescent Phosphor. 18.5 Issues Relating to Practical Field Emission Backlights. References. PART THREE OPTICAL COMPONENTS. 19 Light-guide Plates (Y. Ishiwatari, Asahi Kasei Chemicals). 19.1 Introduction. 19.2 Market Demands for PMMA. 19.3 Characteristics of PMMA. 19.4 Manufacturing Method for PMMA Plates. 19.5 Applications to LCD Backlight Units. 19.6 Characteristics Required for Materials of Light-guide Plates. 19.7 Materials for Extrusion Molding and Injection Molding. 19.8 Conclusions. References. 20 Optical Diffuser Plates (Y. Ishiwatari, Asahi Kasei Chemicals). 20.1 Introduction. 20.2 PMMA Light Diffuser Plates. 20.3 MS and PS Light Diffuser Plates. 20.4 Trends in Light Diffuser Plates. 20.5 LED Light Sources and Diffusing Plates. 21 Lens Films and Reflective Polarization Films (F. Hanzawa, Sumitomo 3M). 21.1 Introduction. 21.2 Fundamentals of Reflection and Refraction. 21.3 Lens Films (Upward Direction). 21.4 Lens Films (Downward Direction). 21.5 Reflective Polarization Films. 21.6 Resin-type Specular Reflection Films. 21.7 Applications of Films. 21.8 Standards. References. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe human element is the principle cause of incidents and accidents in all technology industries; hence it is evident that an understanding of the interaction between humans and technology is crucial to the effective management of risk. Despite this, no tested model that explicitly and quantitatively includes the human element in risk prediction is currently available. Managing Risk: the Human Element combines descriptive and explanatory text with theoretical and mathematical analysis, offering important new concepts that can be used to improve the management of risk, trend analysis and prediction, and hence affect the accident rate in technological industries. It uses examples of major accidents to identify common causal factors, or echoes, and argues that the use of specific experience parameters for each particular industry is vital to achieving a minimum error rate as defined by mathematical prediction. New ideas for the perception, calculation and prediction of risk areTrade Review"An excellently produced book with over 500 pages of detailed information on the management of risk and the avoidance of accidents." (AMEC, November 2008)Table of ContentsContents About the Authors Preface Acknowledgements Defi nitions of Risk and Risk Management Introduction: The Art of Prediction and the Creation of Order Risk and Risk Management Defi ning Risk Managing Risk: Our Purpose, Plan and Goals Recent Tragic Outcomes Power Blackouts, Space Shuttle Losses, Concorde Crashes, Chernobyl, Three Mile Island and More . . . How Events and Disasters Evolve in a Phased Development: The Human Element Our Values at Risk: The Probable Improvement Probably or Improbably Not How this Book is Organised References Technical Summary Defi ning the Past Probability Predicting Future Risk: Sampling from the Jar of Life A Possible Future: Defi ning the Posterior Probability The Engineers Have an Answer: Reliability Drawing from the Jar of Life: The Hazard Function and Species Extinction Experiencing Failure: Engineering and Human Risk and Reliability Experience Space Managing Safely: Creating Order out of Disorder Using Safety Management Systems Describing the Indescribable: Top-Down and Bottom-Up What an Observer will Observe and the Depth of our Experience References 1 The Universal Learning Curve Predicting Tragedies, Accidents and Failures: Using the Learning Hypothesis The Learning Hypothesis: The Market Place of Life Learning in HTSs: The Way a Human Learns Evidence of Risk Reduction by Learning Evidence of Learning from Experience: Case Studies Evidence of Learning in Economics Evidence of Learning in Engineering and Architecture: The Costs of Mistakes Learning in Technology: the Economics of Reducing Costs Evidence of Learning Skill and Risk Reduction in the Medical Profession: Practice Makes Almost Perfect Learning in HTSs: The Recent Data Still Agrees The Equations That Describe the Learning Curve Zero Defects and Reality Predicting Failures: The Human Bathtub Experience Space: The Statistics of Managing Safety and of Observing Accidents Predicting the Future Based on Past Experience: The Prior Ignorance Future Events: the Way Forward Using Learning Probabilities The Wisdom of Experience and Inevitability The Last, First or Rare Event Conclusions and Observations: Predicting Accidents References 2 The Four Echoes Power Blackouts, Space Shuttle Losses, Concorde Crashes, and the Chernobyl and Three Mile Island Accidents The Combination of Events The Problem Is the Human Element The Four Echoes Share the Same Four Phases The First Echo: Blackout of the Power Grid Management’s Role The First Echo: Findings Error State Elimination The Second Echo: Columbia/Challenger The Results of the Inquiry: Prior Knowledge The Second Echo: The Four Phases Management’s Responsibility Error State Elimination The Third Echo: Concorde Tires and SUVs Tire Failures: the Prior Knowledge The Third Echo: The Four Phases Management’s Responsibility Error State Elimination The Fourth Echo: Chernobyl The Chernobyl Accident: An Echo of Three Mile Island The Consequences Echoes of Three Mile Island The Causes Error State Elimination The Fourth Echo: The Four Phases Regulatory Environment and Practices Case study: Regulation in Commercial Aviation a) Regulations Development b) Compliance Standards c) Accident Investigation Addressing Human Error Management Responsibilities Designing to Reduce Risk and the Role of Standards Conclusion and Echoes: Predicting the Unpredictable References 3 Predicting Rocket Risks and Refi nery Explosions: Near Misses, Shuttles, Safety and Anti-Missile Defence Systems Effectiveness Learning from Near Misses and Prior Knowledge Problems in Quantifying Risk: Predicting the Risk for the Next Shuttle Mission Estimating a Possible Range of Likelihoods Learning from Experience: Maturity Models for Future Space Mission Risk Technology versus Technology Missiles Risks over London: The German Doodlebug Launching Missile Risk The Number of Tests Required Estimating the Risk of a Successful Attack and How Many Missiles We Must Fire Uncertainty in the Risk of Failing to Intercept What Risk Is There of a Missile Getting Through: Missing the Missile Predicting the Risk of Industrial Accidents: The Texas City Refinery Explosion From Lagging to Leading: Safety Analysis and Safety Culture Missing Near Misses What these Risk Estimates Tell Us: The Common Sense Echo References 4 The Probability of Human Error: Learning in Technological Systems What We Must Predict The Probability Linked to the Rate of Errors The Defi nition of Risk Exposure and the Level of Attainable Perfection Comparison to Conventional Social Science and Engineering Failure and Outcome Rate Formulations The Learning Probabilities and the PDFs The Initial Failure Rate and its Variation with Experience The ‘Best’ MERE Risk Values Maximum and Minimum Likely Outcome Rates Standard Engineering Reliability Models Compared to the MERE Result Future Event Estimates: The Past Predicts the Future Statistical Bayesian-Type Estimates: The Impact of Learning Maximum and Minimum Likelihood Comparison to Data: The Probability of Failure and Human Error Comparison of the MERE Result to Human Reliability Analysis Implications for Generalised Risk Prediction Conclusions: The Probable Human Risk References 5 Eliminating Mistakes: The Concept of Error States A General Accident Theory: Error States and Safety Management The Physics of Errors The Learning Hypothesis and the General Accident Theory Observing Outcomes A Homage to Boltzmann: Information from the Grave The Concept of Depth of Experience and the Theory of Error States The Fundamental Postulates of Error State Theory The Information in Error States: Establishing the Risk Distribution The Exponential Distribution of Outcomes, Risk and Error States The Total Number of Outcomes The Observed Rate and the Minimum Number of Outcomes Accumulated Experience Measures and Learning Rates The Average Rate Analogy and Predictions: Statistical Error Theory and Learning Model Equivalence The Infl uence of Safety Management and Regulations: Imposing Order on Disorder The Risk of Losing a Ship Distribution Functions The Most Probable and Minimum Error Rate Learning Rates and Experience Intervals: The Universal Learning Curve Reducing the Risk of a Fatal Aircraft Accident: the Infl uence of Skill and Experience Conclusions: A New Approach References 6 Risk Assessment: Dynamic Events and Financial Risks Future Loss Rate Prediction: Ships and Tsunamis Predicted Insurance Rates for Shipping Losses: Historical Losses The Premium Equations Financial Risk: Dynamic Loss and Premium Investments Numerical Example Overall Estimates of Shipping Loss Fraction and Insurance Inspections The Loss Ratio: Deriving the Industrial Damage Curves Making Investment Decisions: Information Drawing from the Jar of Life Information Entropy and Minimum Risk Progress and Learning in Manufacturing Innovation in Technology for the Least Product Price and Cost: Reductions During Technological Learning Cost Reduction in Manufacturing and Production: Empirical Elasticity ‘Power Laws’ and Learning Rates A New General Formulation for Unit Cost Reduction in Competitive Markets: the Minimum Cost According to a Black-Scholes Formulation Universal Learning Curve: Comparison to the Usual Economic Power Laws The Learning Rate b-Value ‘Elasticity’ Exponent Evaluated Equivalent Average Total Cost b-Value Elasticity Profi t Optimisation to Exceed Development Cost The Data Validate the Learning Theory a) Aircraft Manufacturing Costs Estimate Case b) Photovoltaic Case c) Air Conditioners Case d) Ethanol Prices Case e) Windpower Case f) Gas Turbine Power Case g) The Progress Curve for Manufacturing Non-Dimensional UPC and Market Share Conclusions: Learning to Improve and Turning Risks into Profits References 7 Safety and Risk Management Systems: the Fifth Echoes Safety Management Systems: Creating Order Out of Disorder Workplace Safety: The Four Rights, Four Wrongs and Four Musts Acceptable Risk: Designing for Failure and Managing for Success Managing and Risk Matrices Organisational Factors and Learning A Practical ‘Safety Culture’ Example: The Fifth Echo Safety Culture and Safety Surveys: The Learning Paradox Never Happening Again: Perfect Learning Half a World Apart: Copying the Same Factors Using a Bucket: Errors in Mixing at the JCO Plant Using a Bucket: Errors in Mixing at the Kean Canyon Explosives Plant The Prediction and Management of Major Hazards: Learning from SMS Failures Learning Environments and Safety Cultures: The Desiderata of Desires Safety Performance Measures: Indicators and Balanced Scorecards Safety and Performance Indicators: Measuring the Good Human Error Rates Passing Red Lights, Runway Incursions and Near Misses Risk Informed Regulation and Degrees of Goodness: How Green is Green? Modelling and Predicting Event Rates and Learning Curves Using Accumulated Experience Using the Past to Predict the Future: How Good is Good? Reportable Events Scrams and Unplanned Shutdowns Common Cause Events and Latent Errors Performance Improvement: Case-by-Case Lack of Risk Reduction: Medical Adverse Events and Deaths New Data: Sentinel Events, Deaths and Blood Work Medication Errors in Health Care Organisational Learning and Safety Culture: the ‘H-Factor’ Risk Indicator Data Analysis: A Case Study Meeting the Need to Measure Safety Culture: the Hard and the Soft Elements Creating Order from Disorder References 8 Risk Perception: Searching for the Truth Among all the Numbers Perceptions and Predicting the Future: Risk Acceptance and Risk Avoidance Fear of the Unknown: The Success Journey into What We Do or Do Not Accept A Possible Explanation of Risk Perception: Comparisons of Road and Rail Transport How Do We Judge the Risk? Linking Complexity, Order, Information Entropy and Human Actions Response Times, Learning Data and the Universal Laws of Practice The Number and Distribution of Outcomes: Comparison to Data Risk Perception: Railways Risk Perception: Coal Mining Risk Perception: Nuclear Power in Japan Risk Perception: Rare Events and Risk Rankings Predicting the Future Number of Outcomes A Worked Example: Searching out and Analysing Data for Oil Spills Typical Worksheet Plotting the Data Fitting a Learning Curve Challenging Zero Defects Comparison of Oil Spills to other Industries Predicting the Future: the Probability and Number of Spills Observations on this Oil Spill Case Knowing What We Do Not Know: Fear and Managing the Risk of the Unknown White and Black Paradoxes: Known Knowns and Unknown Unknowns The Probability of the Unknowns: Learning from What We Know The Existence of the Unknown: Failures in High Reliability Systems The Power of Experience: Facing Down the Fear of the Unknown Terrorism, Disasters and Pandemics: Real, Acceptable and Imaginary Risks Estimating Personal Risk of Death: Pandemics and Infectious Diseases Sabotage: Vulnerabilities, Critical Systems and the Reliability of Security Systems What Is the Risk? The Four Quadrants: Implications of Risk for Safety Management Systems References 9 I Must Be Learning Where We Have Come From What We Have Learned What We Have Shown Legal, Professional and Corporate Implications for the Individual Just Give Me the Facts Where We Are Going Reference Nomenclature Appendices: Appendix A: The ‘Human Bathtub’: Predicting the Future Risk The Differential Formulation for the Number of Outcomes The Future Probability Insuffi cient Learning Appendix B: The Most Risk, or Maximum Likelihood, for the Outcome (Failure or Error) Rate while Learning The Most or Least Likely Outcome Rate The Maximum and Minimum Risk: The Two Solutions Low Rates and Rare Events The Limits of Maximum and Minimum Risk: The Two Solutions Common Sense: The Most Risk at the Least Experience and the Least Risk as the First Outcome Decreases with Experience Typical Trends in Our Most Likely Risk The Distribution with Depth of Experience References Appendix C: Transcripts of the Four Echoes Power Blackout, Columbia Space Shuttle loss, Concorde Crash and Chernobyl Accident The Combination of Events The Four Echoes Share the Same Four Phases Appendix. Blackout Chronology and the Dialog from Midday 14 August 2003 The Second Echo: Columbia/Challenger Appendix: Shuttle Dialog and Transcripts The Third Echo: Concorde Tires and SUVs Appendix: Dialog for the Concorde Crash The Fourth Echo: TMI/Chernobyl Appendix: Chronology and Transcripts of the Chernobyl Reactor Unit 4 Accident Conclusion and Echoes: Predicting the Unpredictable Appendix D: The Four Phases: Fuel Leak Leading to Gliding a Jet in to Land without any Engine Power The Bare Facts and the Sequence The Four Phases Flight Crew Actions Initial Recognition of the Fuel Loss Crew Reaction to the Fuel Imbalance Advisory (05:33–05:45) Crew Reaction to the Continued Fuel Loss (05:45–06:10) Crew Reaction to the (Two) Engine Failures References Appendix E: The Four Phases of a Midair Collision The Bare Facts The Four Phases References Appendix F: Risk From the Number of Outcomes We Observe: How Many Are There? The Number of Outcomes: The Hypergeometric Distribution Few Outcomes and many Non-Outcomes: The Binomial and Poisson Distributions The Number of Outcomes: In the Limit The Perfect Learning Limit: Learning from Non-Outcomes The Relative Change in Risk When Operating Multiple Sites References Appendix G: Mixing in a Tank: The D.D. Williamson Vessel Explosion Errors in Mixing in a Tank at the Caramel Factory: The Facts The Prior Knowledge Another Echo References Appendix H: Never Happening Again The Risk of an Echo, or of a Repeat Event The Matching Probability for an Echo The Impact of Learning and Experience on Managing the Risk of Repeat Events The Theory of Evidence: Belief and Risk Equivalence References Appendix I: A Heuristic Organisational Risk Stability Criterion Order and Disorder in Physical and Management Systems Stability Criterion References Appendix J: New Laws of Practice for Learning and Error Correction Individual Learning and Practice Comparison to Error Reduction Data Comparison to Response Time Data and the Consistent Law of Practice Reconciling the Laws Conclusions References Appendix K: Predicting Rocket Launch Reliability – Case Study Summary Theory of Rocket Reliability a) Unknown Total Number of Launches and Failures b) Known Total Number of Launches and Failures Results Measures of Experience Comparsion to World Data Predicting the Probability of Failure Statistical Estimates of the Failure Probability for the Very ‘next’ launch Independent Validation of the MERE Launch Failure Curve Observations References Illustrations Pipeline Spill and Fire Train Crash Due to SPAD Space Shuttle Columbia Chemical Explosion Bayes, Laplace and Bernouli Kean Canyon Explosion Boltzmann’s Grave Quebec Overpass Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisPower Electronics and Energy Conversion Systems is a definitive five-volume reference spanning classical theory through practical applications and consolidating the latest advancements in energy conversion technology. Comprehensive yet highly accessible, each volume is organised in a basic-to-sophisticated crescendo, providing a single-source reference for undergraduate and graduate students, researchers and designers. Volume 1 Fundamentals and Hard-switching Converters introduces the key challenges in power electronics from basic components to operation principles and presents classical hard- and soft-switching DC to DC converters, rectifiers and inverters. At a more advanced level, it provides comprehensive analysis of DC and AC models comparing the available approaches for their derivation and results. A full treatment of DC to DC hard-switching converters is given, from fundamentals to modern industrial solutions and practical engineering insight. The author Table of ContentsPreface xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Why Energy Conversion Electronics Circuits? 1 1.1.1 Applications in the Information and Telecommunication Industry 2 1.1.2 Applications in Renewable Energy Conversion 4 1.1.3 Future Energy Conversion – Fuel Cells 6 1.1.4 Electric Vehicles 6 1.1.5 Applications in Electronic Display Devices 8 1.1.6 Audio Amplifiers 9 1.1.7 Applications in Portable Electronic Devices 9 1.1.8 Applications in High Voltage Physics Experiments and Atomic Accelerators 10 1.1.9 Lighting Technology 11 1.1.10 Aerospace Applications 11 1.1.11 Power System Conditioning 12 1.1.12 Energy Recycling in Manufacturing Industry 12 1.1.13 Applications in Space Exploration 12 1.1.14 Defense Applications 14 1.1.15 Drives and High-Power Industrial Applications 15 1.1.16 Classification of Power Electronic Circuits 15 1.2 Basic Principles of Operation of a Power Electronics Circuit 17 1.3 Basic Components of the Power Circuit: Power Semiconductor Switches and Passive Reactive Elements 28 1.3.1 Uncontrollable Switches – Power Diodes 28 1.3.2 Semicontrollable Switches (Thyristors) 32 1.3.3 Controllable Switches 35 1.3.4 Gallium Nitride (GaN) Switch Technology 51 1.3.5 Energy Losses Associated with Power Switches 52 1.3.6 Passive Reactive Elements 65 1.3.7 Ultracapacitors 80 1.4 Basic Steady-State Analysis of Duty Cycle Controlled Converters with Constant Switching Frequency 81 1.4.1 Input-to-Output Voltage Ratio for Basic DC-DC Converters 81 1.4.2 Continuous and Discontinuous Conduction Operation Modes 85 1.4.3 Design of the Elements of the Basic Converters 85 1.4.4 Controller for Duty Cycle Control (PWM) 88 1.4.5 Conversion Efficiency, Hard-switching and Soft-switching 92 1.5 Introduction to Switched-Capacitor (SC) Converters 96 1.6 Frequency-Controlled Converters 101 1.6.1 Resonant Converters 101 1.6.2 Quasi-Resonant Converters (QRC) 110 1.7 Overview on AC-DC Rectifiers and DC-AC Inverters 119 1.7.1 Rectifiers 119 1.7.2 Inverters 132 1.8 Case Studies 140 1.8.1 Case Study 1 140 1.8.2 Case Study 2 146 1.8.3 Case Study 3 150 1.9 Highlights of the Chapter 154 Problems 155 Bibliography 157 2 Modeling DC-DC Converters 161 2.1 What is the Purpose of Modeling the Power Stage? 162 2.2 Average State-Space Equations, Small-Ripple Approximation (Time-Linearization) 164 2.3 DC Voltage Gain and AC Small-Signal Open-Loop Transfer Functions Based on Average State-Space Equations for Converters Operating in Continuous Conduction Mode 169 2.3.1 DC Voltage Gain and AC Open-Loop Line-to-Load Voltage Transfer Function 169 2.3.2 Duty Cycle-to-Output Voltage AC Transfer Function. Small-Signal Approximation 171 2.3.3 DC Gain and AC Small-Signal Open-Loop Transfer Functions of the Boost, Buck and Buck-Boost Converters Operating in CCM 173 2.3.4* Graphical Averaged Models of the Boost, Buck and Buck-Boost Converters Operating in CCM 191 2.3.5* Canonical Graphical Averaged Models of DC-DC Converters Operating in CCM 211 2.4 DC Voltage Gain and AC Small-Signal Open-Loop Transfer Functions Based on Average State-Space Equations for Converters Operating in Discontinuous Conduction Mode 217 2.4.1 Reduced-Order Averaged Models 217 2.4.2* Full-Order Averaged Models 237 2.5* Average PWM Switch Model 253 2.5.1 Average PWM Switch Model for Converters Operating in Continuous Conduction Mode 253 2.5.2 Average PWM Switch Model for Converters Operating in Discontinuous Conduction Mode 263 2.6 Average Model of the Switches Resistances and Diode Forward Voltage. Average Model of the PWM 288 2.6.1 Average Model of the Switches DC Resistances and Diode Forward Voltage 288 2.6.2 Average Model of the PWM 291 2.7* Average Resonant Switch Model for the DC and Small-Signal Analysis of QRC Converters 292 2.7.1 Average Model of the Zero-Current (ZC) Resonant Switch 293 2.7.2 Average Model of the Zero-Voltage (ZV) Resonant Switch 300 2.7.3 DC Analysis and Open-Loop Small-Signal Transfer Functions of ZCS Quasi-Resonant Converters 305 2.7.4 DC Analysis and Open-Loop Small-Signal Transfer Functions of ZVS Quasi-Resonant Converters 325 2.8 Simulation and Computer-Aided Design of Power Electronics Circuits 339 2.9 Case Study 355 2.10 Highlights of the Chapter 362 Problems 365 Bibliography 368 3 Classical DC-DC PWM Hard-switching Converters 369 3.1 Buck DC-DC PWM Hard-switching Converter 369 3.1.1 Influence of the DC Resistance of the Inductor 369 3.1.2 Boundary Control 375 3.1.3 Calculation of Losses in a Buck Converter Operating in CCM by Considering the Inductor Current Ripple and the ESR of the Capacitor 377 3.1.4 Design of a Buck Converter in CCM Operation 382 3.1.5 Buck Converter with Input Filter 386 3.1.6 Review of the Steady-State Analysis of the Buck Converter in DCM Operation 390 3.1.7 Design of a Buck Converter in DCM Operation 395 3.1.8* Aspects of Dynamic Response of Buck Converter 399 3.2 Boost DC-DC PWM Hard-switching Converter 402 3.2.1 Boost Converter in Steady-State CCM Operation 402 3.2.2 Boost Converter in Steady-State DCM Operation 410 3.2.3* Aspects of Dynamic Response of Boost Converter 417 3.3 Buck-Boost DC-DC PWM Hard-switching Converter 420 3.3.1 Buck-Boost Converter in Steady-State CCM Operation 421 3.3.2 Buck-Boost Converter in Steady-State DCM Operation 429 3.3.3* Aspects of Dynamic Response of Buck-Boost Converter 437 3.4 Cuk (Boost-Buck) PWM Hard-switching Converter 437 3.4.1 Derivation and Switching Operation of the Cuk Converter 438 3.4.2 Steady-State Analysis of Cuk Converter in CCM Operation and its Design 438 3.4.3* DC Voltage Gain and AC Small-Signal Characteristics of theCuk Converter in the Presence of Parasitic Resistances 447 3.4.4 Design Example and Commercially Available Cuk Converters 455 3.4.5* Discontinuous Conduction Mode for the Cuk Converter 456 3.4.6* Cuk Converter with Coupled Inductor 468 3.5 SEPIC PWM Hard-switching Converter 470 3.5.1 SEPIC Converter in CCM Operation 471 3.5.2 Steady-State Analysis of SEPIC Converter in CCM Operation 473 3.5.3* Small-Signal Analysis of the SEPIC Converter in CCM Operation 479 3.5.4 Commercially Available SEPIC Converters: Case Studies 483 3.5.5* SEPIC Converter in DCM Operation 489 3.5.6* AC Analysis of SEPIC Converter in DICM 500 3.5.7* Isolated SEPIC Converter 503 3.6 Zeta (Inverse SEPIC) PWM Hard-switching Converter 503 3.6.1 Zeta Converter in CCM Operation 504 3.6.2 Steady-State Analysis of a Zeta Converter in CCM Operation 505 3.6.3* Small-Signal Analysis of the Zeta Converter in CCM Operation 514 3.6.4 Design Example and Case Study 515 3.6.5* Zeta Converter in DCM Operation 520 3.6.6* Isolated Zeta Converter 529 3.7 Forward Converter 530 3.7.1 The Role of a High-Frequency Transformer in the Structure of DC-DC Converters 530 3.7.2 Derivation of Forward Converter 531 3.7.3 Operation of Forward Converter in CCM 534 3.7.4 Operation of a Forward Converter in DCM and Design Considerations for CCM and DCM 545 3.7.5* Multiple-Output Forward Converter 551 3.7.6* Other Core Reset Strategies 551 3.7.7 Examples of Practical Designs: Case Studies 564 3.8* Isolated Cuk Converter 568 3.9 Flyback Converter 574 3.9.1 Derivation of the Flyback Converter 574 3.9.2 Operation of Flyback Converter in CCM and DCM 577 3.9.3 Effects of the Coupled Inductor Leakage Inductance 587 3.9.4* Small-Signal Model of the Flyback Converter 598 3.9.5 Designs of the Flyback Converter: Case Studies – Practical Considerations 600 3.10 Push–Pull Converter 607 3.10.1 Push–Pull Converter of Buck Type (Voltage Driven) 607 3.10.2 CCM Operation of the Push–Pull Converter 608 3.10.3 Non-Idealities in the Push–Pull Converter 616 3.10.4 DCM Operation 619 3.10.5* Push–Pull Converter of the Boost Type (Current Driven) 625 3.10.6 Design Example 631 3.11 Half-Bridge Converter 634 3.11.1 The Buck-Type Half-Bridge Topology 634 3.11.2 CCM Operation 636 3.11.3 Input-to-Output Voltage Conversion Ratio and Design of a Half-Bridge Converter in CCM Operation 645 3.11.4 Practical Aspects 647 3.11.5 DCM Operation 648 3.11.6* Current-Driven Half-Bridge Converter 652 3.12 Full-Bridge Converter 657 3.12.1 Full-Bridge Topology 657 3.12.2 CCM Operation of the Buck-Type Full-Bridge Converter 660 3.12.3 Input-to-Output Voltage Conversion Ratio and Design of a Buck-Type Full-Bridge Converter in CCM Operation 672 3.12.4 Practical Aspects 676 3.12.5* Other Transistor Control Schemes: Phase-Shift Control 676 3.12.6* Current-Driven Full-Bridge Converter 680 3.13 Highlights of the Chapter 687 Problems 696 Bibliography 702 4 Derived Structures of DC-DC Converters 705 4.1 Current Doubler Rectifier (CDR) for Push–Pull, Half-Bridge and Full-Bridge Converters 705 4.1.1 Cyclical Operation of Current Doubler Rectifier 706 4.1.2 Voltage Conversion Ratio of Converters with CDR 711 4.1.3 Ripple Cancellation in the Output Current 711 4.1.4* Other Structures of CDR 713 4.1.5 Penalties of CDR 719 4.1.6* Current Tripler and Current Multiplier 719 4.2 Voltage Doubler and Voltage Multiplier Rectifier 721 4.2.1 Full-Wave Bridge Voltage Doubler 721 4.2.2 Greinacher Multiplier 723 4.2.3 Voltage Tripler and General Cockcroft–Walton Multiplier 727 4.2.4* Voltage Doubler with One Capacitor 729 4.2.5 Fibonacci Voltage Multiplier 730 4.2.6 Voltage Dividers 735 4.2.7* “Economy” Power Supply and the 48 Power Supply 736 4.3 Quadratic Converters 742 4.3.1 Quadratic Buck Converters 743 4.3.2* Buck-Boost Quadratic Converters (D<0.5) 746 4.4* Two-Switch Buck-Boost Converter 748 4.4.1 Buck-Boost Converters Obtained by Interleaving a Boost and a Buck Switching Cell 749 4.4.2 Z-Source Buck-Boost Converter with Positive Output Voltage 753 4.5* Switched-Capacitor/Switched-Inductor Integrated Basic Converters 757 4.5.1 Family of Converters Based on Switched-Capacitor/Switched-Inductor Structures 757 4.5.2 KY Converter 776 4.5.3 Watkins–Johnson Converter 782 4.6* The Sheppard–Taylor Converter 783 4.6.1 CCM Operation 783 4.6.2 Discontinuous Conduction Mode Operation 785 4.6.3 Isolated Sheppard–Taylor Converter 791 4.7* Converters with Low Voltage Stress on the Active Switches 793 4.7.1 Four-Switch Full-Bridge-Type Converter with Vin/2 Primary-Side Switches Voltage Stress 794 4.7.2 Converter with Vin/3 Voltage Stress on the Primary-Side Switches 797 4.7.3 Three-Level Boost Converter 797 4.8* Tapped Inductor-Based Converters 805 4.8.1 Tapped Inductor Buck Converter and VRMs (Voltage Regulator Module) 805 4.8.2 Tapped Inductor Boost Converter 812 4.9* Current-Driven Dual-Bridge Converter with Center-Tapped Inductor 812 4.10 Highlights of the Chapter 824 Problems 829 Bibliography 830 Index 833

Read more less

Book SynopsisADVANCED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTERNET THIRD EDITION ADVANCED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTERNET Future Evolving Technologies The new edition of Advanced Wireless Communications: 4G Cognitive and Cooperative Broadband Technology, 2nd Edition, including the latest developments In the evolution of wireless communications, the dominant challenges are in the areas of networking and their integration with the Future Internet. Even the classical concept of cellular networks is changing and new technologies are evolving to replace it. To reflect these new trends, Advanced Wireless Communications & INTERNET builds upon the previous volumes, enhancing the existing chapters, and including a number of new topics. Systematically guiding readers from the fundamentals through to advanced areas, each chapter begins with an introductory explanation of the basic problems and solutions followed with an analytical treatment in greateTable of ContentsPreface to the Third Edition xix 1 Fundamentals 1 1.1 4G and the Book Layout 1 1.2 General Structure of 4G Signals 5 1.3 Next Generation Internet 16 1.4 Cloud Computing and Network Virtualization 18 1.5 Economics of Utility Computing 20 1.6 Drawbacks of Cloud Computing 22 1.7 Wireless Grids and Clouds 24 References 30 2 Adaptive Coding 35 2.1 Adaptive and Reconfigurable Block Coding 35 2.2 Adaptive and Reconfigurable Convolutional Codes 40 2.3 Concatenated Codes with Interleavers 51 2.4 Adaptive Coding, Practice and Prospects 57 2.5 Distributed Source Coding 59 Appendix 2.1 Maximum a Posteriori Detection 69 References 71 3 Adaptive and Reconfigurable Modulation 77 3.1 Coded Modulation 77 3.2 Adaptive Coded Modulation for Fading Channels 86 References 89 4 Space–Time Coding 93 4.1 Diversity Gain 93 4.2 Space–Time Coding 98 4.3 Space–Time Block Codes from Orthogonal Designs 112 4.4 Channel Estimation Imperfections 122 4.5 Quasi-Orthogonal Space–Time Block Codes 123 4.6 Space–Time Convolutional Codes 127 4.7 Algebraic Space–Time Codes 128 4.8 Differential Space–Time Modulation 133 4.9 Multiple Transmit Antenna Differential Detection from Generalized Orthogonal Designs 142 4.10 Layered Space–Time Coding 148 4.11 Concatenated Space–Time Block Coding 157 4.12 Estimation of MIMO Channel 165 4.13 Space–Time Codes for Frequency Selective Channels 168 4.14 Optimization of a MIMO System 174 4.15 MIMO Systems with Constellation Rotation 182 4.16 Diagonal Algebraic Space–Time Block Codes 187 Appendix 4.1 QR Factorization 192 Appendix 4.2 Lattice Code Decoder for Space–Time Codes 194 Appendix 4.3 MIMO Channel Capacity 195 References 200 5 Multiuser Communication 209 5.1 Pseudorandom Sequences 209 5.2 Multiuser CDMA Receivers 220 5.3 Minimum Mean Square Error (MMSE) Linear Multiuser Detection 237 5.4 Single User LMMSE Receivers for Frequency Selective Fading Channels 246 5.5 Signal Subspace-Based Channel Estimation for CDMA Systems 253 5.6 Iterative Receivers for Layered Space–Time Coding 259 Appendix 5.1 Linear and Matrix Algebra 277 References 283 6 Channel Estimation and Equalization 291 6.1 Equalization in the Digital Data Transmission System 291 6.2 LMS Equalizer 297 6.3 Detection for a Statistically Known, Time Varying Channel 301 6.4 LMS-Adaptive MLSE Equalization on Multipath Fading Channels 306 6.5 Adaptive Channel Identification and Data Demodulation 311 6.6 Turbo Equalization 324 6.7 Kalman Filter Based Joint Channel Estimation and Data Detection Over Fading Channels 330 6.8 Equalization Using Higher Order Signal Statistics 335 References 345 7 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing – OFDM and Multicarrier CDMA 351 7.1 Timing and Frequency Offset in OFDM 351 7.2 Fading Channel Estimation for OFDM Systems 357 7.3 64 DAPSK and 64 QAM Modulated OFDM Signals 363 7.4 Space–Time Coding with OFDM Signals 367 7.5 Layered Space–Time Coding for MIMO OFDM 375 7.6 Space–Time Coded TDMA/OFDM Reconfiguration Efficiency 379 7.7 Multicarrier CDMA System 392 7.8 Multicarrier DS-CDMA Broadcast Systems 396 7.9 Frame By Frame Adaptive Rate Coded Multicarrier DS-CDMA System 399 7.10 Intermodulation Interference Suppression in Multicarrier CDMA Systems 405 7.11 Successive Interference Cancellation in Multicarrier DS-CDMA Systems 409 7.12 MMSE Detection of Multicarrier CDMA 413 7.13 Approximation of Optimum Multiuser Receiver for Space–Time Coded Multicarrier CDMA Systems 419 7.14 Parallel Interference Cancellation in OFDM Systems in Time-Varying Multipath Fading Channels 430 7.15 Zero Forcing OFDM Equalizer in Time-Varying Multipath Fading Channels 437 7.16 Channel Estimation for OFDM Systems Using Multiple Receive Antennas 442 7.17 Turbo Processing for an OFDM-Based MIMO System 445 7.18 PAPR Reduction of OFDM Signals 447 Appendix 7.1 451 References 452 8 UltraWide Band Radio 459 8.1 UWB Multiple Access in a Gaussian Channel 459 8.2 The UWB Channel 462 8.3 UWB System with M-ary Modulation 468 8.4 M-ary PPM UWB Multiple Access 476 8.5 Coded UWB Schemes 483 8.6 Multiuser Detection in UWB Radio 486 8.7 UWB with Space–Time Processing 487 8.8 Beamforming for UWB Radio 492 References 519 9 Linear Precoding for MIMO Channels 523 9.1 Space–Time Precoders and Equalizers for MIMO Channels 523 9.2 Linear Precoding Based on Convex Optimization Theory 530 9.3 Convex Optimization-Theory-Based Beamforming 540 References 561 10 Cognitive Networks 565 10.1 Optimal Channel Sensing in Cognitive Wireless Networks 565 10.2 Optimal Sequential Channel Sensing 568 10.3 Optimal Parallel Multiband Channel Sensing 569 10.4 Collaborative Spectrum Sensing 573 10.5 Multichannel Cognitive MAC 578 References 583 11 Relay-AssistedWireless Networks 585A. Agustin, J. Vidal,O.Muñoz, and S. Glisic 11.1 Introduction 585 11.2 Background and Related Work 586 11.3 Cooperative Communications 593 11.4 Relay-Assisted Communications 616 11.5 Two-Way Relay-Assisted Communications 646 11.6 Relay-Assisted Communications With Reuse of Resources 651 Appendices 668 12 Biologically Inspired Paradigms inWireless Networks 683 12.1 Biologically Inspired Model for Securing Hybrid Mobile Ad Hoc Networks 683 12.2 Biologically Inspired Routing in Ad Hoc Networks 687 12.3 Analytical Modeling of AntNet as Adaptive Mobile Agent Based Routing 691 12.4 Biologically Inspired Algorithm for Optimum Multicasting 697 12.5 Biologically Inspired (BI) Distributed Topology Control 703 12.6 Optimization of Mobile Agent Routing in Sensor Networks 708 12.7 Epidemic Routing 710 12.8 Nano-Networks 715 12.9 Genetic Algorithm Based Dynamic Topology Reconfiguration in Cellular Multihop Wireless Networks 718 References 739 13 Positioning in Wireless Networks 743 13.1 Mobile Station Location in Cellular Networks 743 13.2 Relative Positioning in Wireless Sensor Networks 753 13.3 Average Performance of Circular and Hyperbolic Geolocation 762 References 771 14 Wireless Networks Connectivity 773 14.1 Survivable Wireless Networks Design 773 14.2 Survivability of Wireless Ad Hoc Networks 776 14.3 Network Dimensioning 777 14.4 Survivable Network Under General Traffic 785 14.5 Stochastic Geometry and Random Graphs Theory 791 References 798 15 Advanced Routing and Network Coding 801 15.1 Conventional Routing Versus Network Coding 801 15.2 A Max-Flow Min-Cut Theorem 803 15.3 Algebraic Formulation of Network Coding 807 15.4 Random Network Coding 811 15.5 Gossip Based Protocol and Network Coding 813 15.6 Network Coding With Reduced Complexity 816 15.7 Multisource Multicast Network Switching 820 15.8 Optimization of Wireless Multicast Ad-Hoc Networks 831 15.9 Optimization of Multicast Wireless Ad-Hoc Network Using Soft Graph Coloring and Non-Linear Cubic Games 843 15.10 Joint Optimization of Routing and Medium Contention in Multihop Multicast Wireless Network 855 15.11 Routing and Network Stability 861 15.12 Lagrangian Decomposition of the Multicomodity Flow Optimization Problem 867 15.13 Flow Optimization in Heterogeneous Networks 868 15.14 Dynamic Resource Allocation in Computing Clouds 879 16 Network Formation Games 887 16.1 General Model of Network Formation Games 887 16.2 Knowledge Based Network Formation Games 893 16.3 Coalition Games in Wireless Ad Hoc Networks 897 16.4 HD Game Based TCP Selection 912 16.4.1 Evolutionary Stable Strategy 914 16.4.2 TCP Protocol Competition in Wireless Networks 918 References 919 Index 923

Read more less

Book SynopsisBased on deep theoretical as well as practical experience in Reliability and Quality Sciences, Robust Design Methodology for Reliability constructively addresses practical reliability problems. It offers a comprehensive design theory for reliability, utilizing robust design methodology and six sigma frameworks. In particular, the relation between un-reliability and variation and uncertainty is explored and reliability improvement measures in early product development stages are suggested. Many companies today utilise design for Six Sigma (DfSS) for strategic improvement of the design process, but often without explicitly describing the reliability perspective; this book explains how reliability design can relate to and work with DfSS and illustrates this with realworld problems. The contributors advocate designing for robustness, i.e. insensitivity to variation in the early stages of product design development. Methods for rational treatment of uncertainties in model assumptTable of ContentsPreface Acknowledgements About the Editors Contributors PART One METHODOLOGY 1 Introduction Bo Bergman and Martin Arvidsson 1.1 Background 1.2 Failure Mode Avoidance 1.3 Robust Design 1.4 Comments and Suggestions for Further Reading References 2 Evolution of Reliability Thinking – Countermeasures for Some Technical Issues Åke Lönnqvist 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Method 2.3 An Overview of the Initial Development of Reliability Engineering 2.4 Examples of Technical Issues and Reliability Countermeasures 2.5 Discussion and Future Research 2.6 Summary and Conclusions References 3 Principles of Robust Design Methodology Martin Arvidsson and Ida Gremyr 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Method 3.3 Results and Analysis 3.4 Discussion 3.5 Conclusions References PART Two METHODS 4 Including Noise Factors in Design Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (D-FMEA) – A Case Study at Volvo Car Corporation Åke Lönnqvist 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Background 4.3 Method 4.4 Result 4.5 Discussion and Further Research 4.6 Summary References 5 Robust Product Development Using Variation Mode and Effect Analysis Alexander Chakhunashvili, Stefano Barone, Per Johansson and Bo Bergman 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Overview of the VMEA Method 5.3 The Basic VMEA 5.4 The Enhanced VMEA 5.5 The Probabilistic VMEA 5.6 An Illustrative Example 5.7 Discussion and Concluding Remarks Appendix: Formal Justification of the VMEA Method References 6 Variation Mode and Effect Analysis: An Application to Fatigue Life Prediction Pär Johannesson, Thomas Svensson, Leif Samuelsson, Bo Bergman and Jacques de Maré 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Scatter and Uncertainty 6.3 A Simple Approach to Probabilistic VMEA 6.4 Estimation of Prediction Uncertainty 6.5 Reliability Assessment 6.6 Updating the Reliability Calculation 6.7 Conclusions and Discussion References 7 Predictive Safety Index for Variable Amplitude Fatigue Life Thomas Svensson, Jacques de Maré and Pär Johannesson 7.1 Introduction 7.2 The Load–Strength Reliability Method 7.3 The Equivalent Load and Strength Variables 7.4 Reliability Indices 7.5 The Gauss Approximation Formula 7.6 The Uncertainty Due to the Estimated Exponent β 7.7 The Uncertainty Measure of Strength 7.8 The Uncertainty Measure of Load 7.9 The Predictive Safety Index 7.10 Discussion Appendix References 8 Monte Carlo Simulation versus Sensitivity Analysis Sara Lorén, Pär Johannesson and Jacques de Mar´e 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Transfer Function 8.3 Example from an Industrial Context 8.4 Highly Nonlinear Transfer Function 8.5 Total Variation for Logarithmic Life 8.6 Conclusions References PART Three MODELLING 9 Model Complexity Versus Scatter in Fatigue Thomas Svensson 9.1 Introduction 9.2 A Statistical Model 9.3 Design Concepts 9.4 A Crack Growth Model 9.5 Partly Measurable Variables 9.6 Conclusions References 10 Choice of Complexity in Constitutive Modelling of Fatigue Mechanisms Erland Johnson and Thomas Svensson 10.1 Background 10.2 Questions 10.3 Method 10.4 Empirical Modelling 10.5 A Polynomial Example 10.6 A General Linear Formulation 10.7 A Fatigue Example References 11 Interpretation of Dispersion Effects in a Robust Design Context Martin Arvidsson, Ida Gremyr and Bo Bergman 11.1 Introduction 11.2 Dispersion Effects 11.3 Discussion References 12 Fatigue Damage Uncertainty Anders Bengtsson, Klas Bogsjöand Igor Rychlik 12.1 Introduction 12.2 Fatigue Review 12.3 Probability for Fatigue Failure – Safety Index 12.4 Computation of E [D(T )|k] and V [D(T )|k] 12.5 Non Gaussian Loads – Examples References 13 Widening the Perspectives Bo Bergman and Jacques de Maré 13.1 Background 13.2 Additional Engineering Perspectives on Reliability 13.3 Organizational Perspectives on Reliability 13.4 Industrialization of Robust Design Methodology 13.5 Adoptions of Fatigue Reliability Methodology 13.6 Learning for the Future References List of Abbreviations Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive review of analytical signal processing techniques applied to power systems and power quality applications. This reference book is unique in addressing time-varying waveform and harmonic distortions. It details many different approaches, pooling cutting edge material from university lecturers and practising power engineers to provide a wide spectrum of expertise. Divided into clear sections, the book discusses a range of topics including current and voltage variations; standards and measurement issues; advanced techniques such as spectral, time-frequency, probabilistic; and further methods, such as independent component analysis, and fuzzy logic. Case studies, real world data and examples (including basic application examples and sample waves from industrial sites) supplement the theory and demonstrate the methods shown. With extensive appendices in addition, this book is of great value to power syTable of ContentsContributors xi Preface xiii Website Information xvii Acknowledgments xix Part I General Concepts and Definitions 1 1 Probabilistic aspects of time-varying harmonics 3 R. E. Morrison, Y. Baghzouz, P. F. Ribeiro and C. A. Duque 2 Probability distribution and spectral analysis of nonstationary random processes 19 P. F. Ribeiro and C. A. Duque 3 Transients and harmonics 25 T. H. Ortmeyer 4 Electric power definitions under random conditions 29 A. E. Emanuel 5 Visualizing Joseph Fourier's imaginative discovery via FEA 39 P. J. Masson, P. M. Silveira, C. A. Duque and P. F. Ribeiro Part II Current Variations 51 6 Summation of random harmonic currents 53 R. Langella and A. Testa 7 Probabilistic modeling of single high-power loads 73 R. Langella and A. Testa Part III Voltage Variations 93 8 Probabilistic modeling for network analysis 95 P. Caramia, P. Verde, P. Varilone and G. Carpinelli 9 Probabilistic modeling of harmonic impedances 115 R. Langella and A. Testa Part IV Standards and Measurement Issues 129 10 Time-varying and probabilistic considerations: setting limits 131 T. H. Ortmeyer, W. Xu and Y. Baghzouz 11 Probabilistic harmonic indices 137 P. Caramia, G. Carpinelli, A. Russo, P. Verde and P. Varilone 12 Measurement techniques and benchmarking 149 J. Driesen and J. Van den Keybus Part V Applications and Case Studies 159 13 Harmonic summation for multiple arc furnaces 161 J. Wikston 14 Treatment of measured harmonic currents in filters of an HVDC system 167 S. Carneiro Jr and A. C. de Freitas Marotti Part VI Advanced Techniques 173 15 Visualization of time-varying waveform distortions with wavelets 175 P. M. Silveira and P. F. Ribeiro 16 Wavelets for the measurement of electrical power signals 187 J. Driesen 17 Fuzzy logic application for time-varying harmonics 197 B. R. Klingenberg and P. F. Ribeiro 18 Real-time simulation of time-varying harmonics 211 Y. Liu, M. Steurer and P. F. Ribeiro 19 Independent component analysis for harmonic studies 217 E. Gursoy and D. Niebur 20 Enhanced empirical mode decomposition applied to waveform distortions 233 N. Senroy, S. Suryanarayanan and P. F. Ribeiro 21 Harmonic and interharmonic on adjustable speed drives 253 R. Langella and A. Testa 22 Tracking time-varying power harmonic distortions 277 C. A. Duque, P. M. Silveira, T. Baldwin and P. F. Ribeiro 23 Enhanced DFT for time-varying harmonic decomposition 289 P. M. Silveira, C. A. Duque, T. Baldwin and P. F. Ribeiro 24 Enhanced PLL based filter for time-varying harmonic decomposition 303 J. R. Carvalho, C. A. Duque, M. V. Ribeiro, A. S. Cerqueira and P. F. Ribeiro 25 Prony analysis for time-varying harmonics 317 L. Qi, S. Woodruff, L. Qian and D. Cartes Appendix A: Time-varying harmonic currents from large penetration electronic equipment 331 A. Capasso, R. Lamedica and A. Prudenzi Appendix B: Sample of waveforms and decompositions 357 C. A. Duque, M. V. Ribeiro and P. F. Ribeiro Index 367

Read more less

Book SynopsisWIND ENERGY GENERATION WIND ENERGY GENERATIONMODELLING AND CONTROL With increasing concern over climate change and the security of energy supplies, wind power is emerging as an important source of electrical energy throughout the world. Modern wind turbines use advanced power electronics to provide efficient generator control and to ensure compatible operation with the power system. Wind Energy Generation describes the fundamental principles and modelling of the electrical generator and power electronic systems used in large wind turbines. It also discusses how they interact with the power system and the influence of wind turbines on power system operation and stability. Key features: Includes a comprehensive account of power electronic equipment used in wind turbines and for their grid connection. Describes enabling technologies which facilitate the connection of large-scale onshore and offshore wind farms. Provides detaiTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xi Preface xiii Acronyms and Symbols xv 1 Electricity Generation from Wind Energy 1 1.1 Wind Farms 2 1.2 Wind Energy-generating Systems 3 1.2.1 Wind Turbines 3 1.2.2 Wind Turbine Architectures 7 1.3 Wind Generators Compared with Conventional Power Plant 10 1.3.1 Local Impacts 11 1.3.2 System-wide Impacts 13 1.4 Grid Code Regulations for the Integration of Wind Generation 14 References 17 2 Power Electronics for Wind Turbines 19 2.1 Soft-starter for FSIG Wind Turbines 21 2.2 Voltage Source Converters (VSCs) 21 2.2.1 The Two-level VSC 21 2.2.2 Square-wave Operation 24 2.2.3 Carrier-based PWM (CB-PWM) 25 2.2.4 Switching Frequency Optimal PWM (SFO-PWM) 27 2.2.5 Regular and Non-regular Sampled PWM (RS-PWM and NRS-PWM) 28 2.2.6 Selective Harmonic Elimination PWM (SHEM) 29 2.2.7 Voltage Space Vector Switching (SV-PWM) 30 2.2.8 Hysteresis Switching 33 2.3 Application of VSCs for Variable-speed Systems 33 2.3.1 VSC with a Diode Bridge 34 2.3.2 Back-to-Back VSCs 34 References 36 3 Modelling of Synchronous Generators 39 3.1 Synchronous Generator Construction 39 3.2 The Air-gap Magnetic Field of the Synchronous Generator 39 3.3 Coil Representation of the Synchronous Generator 42 3.4 Generator Equations in the dq Frame 44 3.4.1 Generator Electromagnetic Torque 47 3.5 Steady-state Operation 47 3.6 Synchronous Generator with Damper Windings 49 3.7 Non-reduced Order Model 51 3.8 Reduced-order Model 52 3.9 Control of Large Synchronous Generators 53 3.9.1 Excitation Control 53 3.9.2 Prime Mover Control 55 References 56 4 Fixed-speed Induction Generator (FSIG)-based Wind Turbines 57 4.1 Induction Machine Construction 57 4.1.1 Squirrel-cage Rotor 58 4.1.2 Wound Rotor 58 4.2 Steady-state Characteristics 58 4.2.1 Variations in Generator Terminal Voltage 61 4.3 FSIG Configurations for Wind Generation 61 4.3.1 Two-speed Operation 62 4.3.2 Variable-slip Operation 63 4.3.3 Reactive Power Compensation Equipment 64 4.4 Induction Machine Modelling 64 4.4.1 FSIG Model as a Voltage Behind a Transient Reactance 65 4.5 Dynamic Performance of FSIG Wind Turbines 70 4.5.1 Small Disturbances 70 4.5.2 Performance During Network Faults 73 References 76 5 Doubly Fed Induction Generator (DFIG)-based Wind Turbines 77 5.1 Typical DFIG Configuration 77 5.2 Steady-state Characteristics 77 5.2.1 Active Power Relationships in the Steady State 80 5.2.2 Vector Diagram of Operating Conditions 81 5.3 Control for Optimum Wind Power Extraction 83 5.4 Control Strategies for a DFIG 84 5.4.1 Current-mode Control (PVdq) 84 5.4.2 Rotor Flux Magnitude and Angle Control 89 5.5 Dynamic Performance Assessment 90 5.5.1 Small Disturbances 91 5.5.2 Performance During Network Faults 94 References 96 6 Fully Rated Converter-based (FRC) Wind Turbines 99 6.1 FRC Synchronous Generator-based (FRC-SG) Wind Turbine 100 6.1.1 Direct-driven Wind Turbine Generators 100 6.1.2 Permanent Magnets Versus Electrically Excited Synchronous Generators 101 6.1.3 Permanent Magnet Synchronous Generator 101 6.1.4 Wind Turbine Control and Dynamic Performance Assessment 103 6.2 FRC Induction Generator-based (FRC-IG) Wind Turbine 113 6.2.1 Steady-state Performance 113 6.2.2 Control of the FRC-IG Wind Turbine 114 6.2.3 Performance Characteristics of the FRC-IG Wind Turbine 119 References 119 7 Influence of Rotor Dynamics on Wind Turbine Operation 121 7.1 Blade Bending Dynamics 122 7.2 Derivation of Three-mass Model 123 7.2.1 Example: 300 kW FSIG Wind Turbine 124 7.3 Effective Two-mass Model 126 7.4 Assessment of FSIG and DFIG Wind Turbine Performance 128 Acknowledgement 132 References 132 8 Influence of Wind Farms on Network Dynamic Performance 135 8.1 Dynamic Stability and its Assessment 135 8.2 Dynamic Characteristics of Synchronous Generation 136 8.3 A Synchronizing Power and Damping Power Model of a Synchronous Generator 137 8.4 Influence of Automatic Voltage Regulator on Damping 139 8.5 Influence on Damping of Generator Operating Conditions 141 8.6 Influence of Turbine Governor on Generator Operation 143 8.7 Transient Stability 145 8.8 Voltage Stability 147 8.9 Generic Test Network 149 8.10 Influence of Generation Type on Network Dynamic Stability 150 8.10.1 Generator 2 – Synchronous Generator 151 8.10.2 Generator 2 – FSIG-based Wind Farm 152 8.10.3 Generator 2 – DFIG-based Wind Farm (PVdq Control) 152 8.10.4 Generator 2 – DFIG-based Wind Farm (FMAC Control) 152 8.10.5 Generator 2 – FRC-based Wind Farm 152 8.11 Dynamic Interaction of Wind Farms with the Network 153 8.11.1 FSIG Influence on Network Damping 153 8.11.2 DFIG Influence on Network Damping 158 8.12 Influence of Wind Generation on Network Transient Performance 161 8.12.1 Generator 2 – Synchronous Generator 161 8.12.2 Generator 2 – FSIG Wind Farm 162 8.12.3 Generator 2 – DFIG Wind Farm 163 8.12.4 Generator 2 – FRC Wind Farm 165 References 165 9 Power Systems Stabilizers and Network Damping Capability of Wind Farms 167 9.1 A Power System Stabilizer for a Synchronous Generator 167 9.1.1 Requirements and Function 167 9.1.2 Synchronous Generator PSS and its Performance Contributions 169 9.2 A Power System Stabilizer for a DFIG 172 9.2.1 Requirements and Function 172 9.2.2 DFIG-PSS and its Performance Contributions 178 9.3 A Power System Stabilizer for an FRC Wind Farm 182 9.3.1 Requirements and Functions 182 9.3.2 FRC–PSS and its Performance Contributions 186 References 191 10 The Integration of Wind Farms into the Power System 193 10.1 Reactive Power Compensation 193 10.1.1 Static Var Compensator (SVC) 194 10.1.2 Static Synchronous Compensator (STATCOM) 195 10.1.3 STATCOM and FSIG Stability 197 10.2 HVAC Connections 198 10.3 HVDC Connections 198 10.3.1 LCC–HVDC 200 10.3.2 VSC–HVDC 201 10.3.3 Multi-terminal HVDC 203 10.3.4 HVDC Transmission – Opportunities and Challenges 204 10.4 Example of the Design of a Submarine Network 207 10.4.1 Beatrice Offshore Wind Farm 207 10.4.2 Onshore Grid Connection Points 208 10.4.3 Technical Analysis 210 10.4.4 Cost Analysis 212 10.4.5 Recommended Point of Connection 213 Acknowledgement 214 References 214 11 Wind Turbine Control for System Contingencies 217 11.1 Contribution of Wind Generation to Frequency Regulation 217 11.1.1 Frequency Control 217 11.1.2 Wind Turbine Inertia 218 11.1.3 Fast Primary Response 219 11.1.4 Slow Primary Response 222 11.2 Fault Ride-through (FRT) 228 11.2.1 FSIGs 228 11.2.2 DFIGs 229 11.2.3 FRCs 231 11.2.4 VSC–HVDC with FSIG Wind Farm 233 11.2.5 FRC Wind Turbines Connected Via a VSC–HVDC 234 References 237 Appendix A: State–Space Concepts and Models 241 Appendix B: Introduction to Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors 249 Appendix C: Linearization of State Equations 255 Appendix D: Generic Network Model Parameters 259 Index 265

Read more less

Book SynopsisNew edition of highly successful text Includes a number of new chapters while remaining chapters are fully revised and updated New companion website to include Protocols Places special emphasis on services, featuring more detailed descriptions of presence, messaging, group management and push-to-talk over cellular (conferencing).Table of ContentsForeword. Preface. Acknowledgements. List of Figures. List of Tables. PART I IMS ARCHITECTURE AND CONCEPTS. 1 Introduction. 1.1 What is the Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)? 1.2 Fixed and Mobile Convergence. 1.3 Example of IMS Services. 1.4 Where did it come from? 1.5 Why a SIP Solution Based on 3GPP Standards? 2 IP Multimedia Subsystem Architecture. 2.1 Architectural Requirements. 2.2 Description of IMS-related Entities and Functionalities. 2.3 IMS Reference Points. 3 IMS Concepts. 3.1 Overview. 3.2 Registration. 3.3 Mechanism to Register Multiple User Identities at a Go. 3.4 Session Initiation. 3.5 Identification. 3.6 IP Multimedia Services Identity Module (ISIM). 3.7 Sharing a Single User Identity between Multiple Devices. 3.8 Discovering the IMS Entry Point. 3.9 S-CSCF Assignment. 3.10 Mechanism for Controlling Bearer Traffic. 3.11 Charging. 3.12 User Profile. 3.13 Service Provision. 3.14 Connectivity between Traditional CS Users and IMS Users. 3.15 IMS Transit. 3.16 Support for Local Dialling Plans. 3.17 IMS Emergency Sessions. 3.18 SIP Compression. 3.19 Combination of CS and IMS Services – Combinational Services. 3.20 Voice Call Continuity. 3.21 Security Services in the IMS. 3.22 Interworking between IPv4 and IPv6 in the IMS. PART II IMS SERVICES. 4 Presence. 4.1 Who will use the Presence Service? 4.2 Presence-Enhanced Services. 4.3 Presence Contributing to Business. 4.4 What is Presence? 4.5 Presence Service in IMS. 4.6 Publishing Presence. 4.7 Subscribing Presence. 4.8 Watcher Information. 4.9 Setting Presence Authorization. 5 Group Management. 5.1 Group Management’s Contribution to Business. 5.2 What is Group Management? 5.3 What is XML Configuration Access Protocol? 5.4 What is Common Policy? 5.5 Resource List. 5.6 XCAP Usage for Resource Lists. 5.7 Open Mobile Alliance Solution for Group Management. 5.8 Multimedia Telephony and Service Management. 6 Push to Talk Over Cellular. 6.1 PoC Architecture. 6.2 PoC Features. 6.3 User Plane. 6.4 PoC Service Settings. 7 Messaging. 7.1 Overview of IMS Messaging. 7.2 Immediate Messaging. 7.3 Session-Based Messaging. 7.4 Messaging Interworking. 7.5 Instant Messaging by Open Mobile Alliance. 8 Conferencing. 8.1 IMS Conferencing Architecture and Principles. 8.2 IMS Conferencing Procedures. 9 Multimedia Telephony. 9.1 Introduction. 9.2 Multimedia Telephony Communication. 9.3 Supplementary Services. PART III DETAILED PROCEDURES. 10 Introduction to Detailed Procedures. 10.1 The Example Scenario. 10.2 Base Standards. 11 An Example of IMS Registration. 11.1 Overview. 11.2 Initial Parameters and IMS Management Object. 11.3 Signalling PDP Context Establishment. 11.4 P-CSCF Discovery. 11.5 SIP Registration and Registration Routing Aspects. 11.6 Authentication. 11.7 Access Security – IPsec SAs. 11.8 SIP Security Mechanism Agreement. 11.9 IMS Communication Service Identification and other Callee Capabilities. 11.10 Compression Negotiation. 11.11 Access and Location Information. 11.12 Charging-Related Information During Registration. 11.13 User Identities. 11.14 Re-Registration and Re-Authentication. 11.15 De-Registration. 11.16 GPRS-IMS-Bundled Authentication (GIBA). 12 An Example IMS Multimedia Telephony Session. 12.1 Overview. 12.2 Caller and Callee Identities. 12.3 Routing. 12.4 Compression Negotiation. 12.5 Media Negotiation. 12.6 Resource Reservation. 12.7 Charging-Related Procedures During Session Establishment for Sessions. 12.8 Release of a Session. 12.9 Alternative IMS Session Establishment Procedures. 12.10 Routing of GRUUs. 12.11 Routing of PSIs. 12.12 A Short Introduction to GPRS. 13 An example IMS Voice Call Continuity Procedures. 13.1 Overview. 13.2 Configuring the Clients with Communication Continuity Configuration Parameters. 13.3 Setting up the Initial Call and Call Anchoring. 13.4 Domain Transfer: CS to IMS. 13.5 Theresa adds Video to the Call. 13.6 Domain Transfer: IMS to CS. 13.7 Related Standards. References. List of Abbreviations. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisGraphical models are of increasing importance in applied statistics, and in particular in data mining. Providing a self-contained introduction and overview to learning relational, probabilistic, and possibilistic networks from data, this second edition of Graphical Models is thoroughly updated to include the latest research in this burgeoning field, including a new chapter on visualization. The text provides graduate students, and researchers with all the necessary background material, including modelling under uncertainty, decomposition of distributions, graphical representation of distributions, and applications relating to graphical models and problems for further research.Trade Review“The text provides graduate students, and researchers with all the necessary background material, including modelling under uncertainty, decomposition of distributions, graphical representation of distributions, and applications relating to graphical models and problems for further research.” (Zentralblatt Math, 1 August 2013) "All of the necessary background is provided, with material on modeling under uncertainty and imprecision modeling, decomposition of distributions, graphical representation of distributions, applications relating to graphical models, and problems for further research." (Book News, December 2009)Table of ContentsPreface. 1 Introduction. 1.1 Data and Knowledge. 1.2 Knowledge Discovery and Data Mining. 1.3 Graphical Models. 1.4 Outline of this Book. 2 Imprecision and Uncertainty. 2.1 Modeling Inferences. 2.2 Imprecision and Relational Algebra. 2.3 Uncertainty and Probability Theory. 2.4 Possibility Theory and the Context Model. 3 Decomposition. 3.1 Decomposition and Reasoning. 3.2 Relational Decomposition. 3.3 Probabilistic Decomposition. 3.4 Possibilistic Decomposition. 3.5 Possibility versus Probability. 4 Graphical Representation. 4.1 Conditional Independence Graphs. 4.2 Evidence Propagation in Graphs. 5 Computing Projections. 5.1 Databases of Sample Cases. 5.2 Relational and Sum Projections. 5.3 Expectation Maximization. 5.4 Maximum Projections. 6 Naive Classifiers. 6.1 Naive Bayes Classifiers. 6.2 A Naive Possibilistic Classifier. 6.3 Classifier Simplification. 6.4 Experimental Evaluation. 7 Learning Global Structure. 7.1 Principles of Learning Global Structure. 7.2 Evaluation Measures. 7.3 Search Methods. 7.4 Experimental Evaluation. 8 Learning Local Structure. 8.1 Local Network Structure. 8.2 Learning Local Structure. 8.3 Experimental Evaluation. 9 Inductive Causation. 9.1 Correlation and Causation. 9.2 Causal and Probabilistic Structure. 9.3 Faithfulness and Latent Variables. 9.4 The Inductive Causation Algorithm. 9.5 Critique of the Underlying Assumptions. 9.6 Evaluation. 10 Visualization. 10.1 Potentials. 10.2 Association Rules. 11 Applications. 11.1 Diagnosis of Electrical Circuits. 11.2 Application in Telecommunications. 11.3 Application at Volkswagen. 11.4 Application at DaimlerChrysler. A Proofs of Theorems. A.1 Proof of Theorem 4.1.2. A.2 Proof of Theorem 4.1.18. A.3 Proof of Theorem 4.1.20. A.4 Proof of Theorem 4.1.26. A.5 Proof of Theorem 4.1.28. A.6 Proof of Theorem 4.1.30. A.7 Proof of Theorem 4.1.31. A.8 Proof of Theorem 5.4.8. A.9 Proof of Lemma .2.2. A.10 Proof of Lemma .2.4. A.11 Proof of Lemma .2.6. A.12 Proof of Theorem 7.3.1. A.13 Proof of Theorem 7.3.2. A.14 Proof of Theorem 7.3.3. A.15 Proof of Theorem 7.3.5. A.16 Proof of Theorem 7.3.7. B Software Tools. Bibliography. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisElectromagnetic Foundations of Electrical Engineering begins with an explanation of Maxwell's equations, from which the fundamental laws and principles governing the static and time-varying electric and magnetic fields are derived. Results for both slowly- and rapidly-varying electromagnetic field problems are discussed in detail.Trade Review“Electromagnetic Foundations of Electrical Engineering certainly lives up to its name by providing a very useful treatment of Maxwell’s equations which should help students understand why they need to learn field theory and how it impacts their jobs and daily life.” (IEEE Microwave Magazine, June 2009)Table of ContentsPREFACE. To the Electrical Engineer Practitioner. To the Student. To the Instructor. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS. PROJECT PORTFOLIO. Analysis of a power delivery system. Cylindrical type transmission lines. DC current transducer. Determination of the conductivity of a circular conducting disk. Directional coupler analysis. Ill-defined grounding problems. Induction machine analysis. Line matching technique using an exponential transmission-line section. Linear variable differential transformer. Magnetic actuator and sensor device. Overhead-line protection by ground-wires. Power line carrier communication. Pseudo-balanced three-phase lines. Screened high-voltage three-phase installation. Shielded three-phase cable analysis. Three-route microwave splitter. Transmission-line system with balun transformer for even to odd-mode conversion. Transmission-line system with transformer-stage matching. Two-way loudspeaker analysis. Variable reluctance transformer. PART I: A BRIEF OVERVIEW. INTRODUCTION. CHAPTER 1: BASIC FIELD VECTORS. 1.1: The Electric and Magnetic Field Vectors. 1.2: Constitutive Relations. 1.3: Units and Notation. 1.4: Fundamental Concepts of Voltage and Current Intensity. PART II: STATIONARY FIELD PHENOMENA. INTRODUCTION. CHAPTER 2: ELECTROSTATICS. 2.1 Fundamental Equations. 2.2 Gradient Electric Field, Electric Potential, Voltage, Kirchhoff’s Voltage Law. 2.3 Electric Charge, Electric Displacement Vector. 2.4 Dielectric Media, Permittivity, Polarization, Dielectric Strength. 2.5 Conductors in Electrostatic Equilibrium. 2.6 Application Example (Filament of charge). 2.7 Capacitor, Capacitance, Electric Energy. 2.8 Application Example (Two-wire transmission line). 2.9 Multiple Conductor Systems. 2.10 Application Example (Electric coupling in printed circuit boards). 2.11 Electric Forces and Torques. 2.12 Homework Proposed Problems. CHAPTER 3: STATIONARY CURRENTS. 3.1 Fundamental Equations. 3.2 Conductivity, Current Density, Electric Circuits. 3.3 Current Intensity, Kirchhoff’s Current Law. 3.4 Resistor, Conductance, Resistance, Ohm's Law. 3.5 Application Example (The potentiometer). 3.6 Application Example (The Wheatstone bridge). 3.7 Joule Losses, Generator Applied Field. 3.8 Generator Electromotive Force, Power Balance. 3.9 Homework Proposed Problems. CHAPTER 4: MAGNETIC FIELD OF STATIONARY CURRENTS. 4.1 Fundamental Equations. 4.2 Ampère’s Law, Magnetomotive Force, Magnetic Voltage. 4.3 Magnetic Induction Field, Magnetic Induction Flux. 4.4 Application Example (Power line magnetic fields). 4.5 Magnetic Materials, Ferromagnetic Media, Saturation and Hysteresis. 4.6 Magnetic Circuits. 4.7 Application Example (Three-legged transformer). 4.8 Magnetic Reluctance. 4.9 Inductor, Inductance, Magnetic Flux Linkage, Magnetic Energy. 4.10 Application Example (Coaxial cable). 4.11 Hysteresis Losses. 4.12 Multiple Circuit Systems. 4.13 Magnetic Forces and Torques. 4.14 Application Example (U-shaped electromagnet). 4.15 Homework Proposed Problems. PART III: SLOW TIME-VARYING FIELDS. INTRODUCTION. CHAPTER 5: MAGNETIC INDUCTION PHENOMENA. 5.1 Fundamental Equations. 5.2 Gradient and Induction Electric Fields, Potential Vector. 5.3 Revisiting the Voltage Concept. 5.4 Induction Law. 5.5 Application Example (Magnetic noise effects). 5.6 Voltages and Currents in Magnetically Multicoupled Systems. 5.7 Application Example (Magnetic coupling in printed circuit boards). 5.8 Eddy Currents. 5.9 Generalization of the Induction Law to Moving Circuit Systems. 5.10 Application Example (Electromechanical energy conversion). 5.11 DC Voltage Generation. 5.12 AC Voltage Generation. 5.13 Homework Proposed Problems. CHAPTER 6: ELECTRIC INDUCTION PHENOMENA. 6.1 Fundamental Equations. 6.2 Displacement Current, Generalized Ampère’s Law. 6.3 Charge Continuity Equation. 6.4 Revisiting the Current Intensity Concept. 6.5 Application Example (Capacitor self-discharge). 6.6 Voltages and Currents in Electrically Multicoupled Systems. 6.7 Homework Proposed Problems. CHAPTER 7: LUMPED PARAMETERS CIRCUIT ANALYSIS. 7.1 Introduction. 7.2 Steady-State Harmonic Regimes. 7.3 Transformer Analysis. 7.4 Transient Regimes. 7.5 Homework Proposed Problems. PART IV: RAPID TIME-VARYING FIELDS. INTRODUCTION. CHAPTER 8: ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD PHENOMENA. 8.1 Electromagnetic Waves. 8.2 Poynting’s Theorem, Poynting’s Vector, Power Flow. 8.3 Time-Harmonic Fields, Field Polarization, RMS Field Values. 8.4 Phasor-Domain Maxwell Equations, Material Media Constitutive Relations. 8.5 Application Example (Uniform plane waves). 8.6 Complex Poynting’s Vector. 8.7 Application Example (Skin effect). 8.8 Homework Proposed Problems. CHAPTER 9: TRANSMISSION LINE ANALYSIS. 9.1 Introduction. 9.2 Time-Domain Transmission-Line Equations for Lossless Lines. 9.3 Application Example (Parallel-plate transmission line). 9.4 Frequency-Domain Transmission-Line Equations for Lossy Lines. 9.5 Frequency-Domain Transmission-Line Equations for Lossless Lines. 9.6 Application Example (Line matching techniques). 9.7 Multiconductor Transmission Lines. 9.8 Application Example (Even and odd modes). 9.9 Homework Proposed Problems. APPENDICES. Appendix 1: Formulas from Vector Analysis. Appendix 2: Lorentz Transformation. Appendix 3: Elements of Complex Algebra. Appendix 4: Elements of Fourier Analysis. BIBLIOGRAPHY. INDEX.

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical tool for propagation channel modeling with MATLAB simulations. Many books on wireless propagation channel provide a highly theoretical coverage, which for some interested readers, may be difficult to follow. This book takes a very practical approach by introducing the theory in each chapter first, and then carrying out simulations showing how exactly put the theory into practice. The resulting plots are analyzed and commented for clarity, and conclusions are drawn and explained from the obtained results. Key features include: A unique approach to propagation channel modeling with accompanying MATLAB simulations to demonstrate the theory in practice Contains step by step commentary and analysis of the obtained simulation results in order to provide a comprehensive and structured learning tool Covers a wide range of topics including shadowing effects, coverage and interference, Multipath Narrowband channel, Multipath Wideband cTable of ContentsContents About the Series Editors Preface Acknowledgments 1 Introduction to Wireless Propagation 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Wireless Propagation Basics 1.3 Link Budgets 1.4 Projects 1.5 Summary References Software Supplied 2 Shadowing Effects 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Projects 2.3 Summary References Software Supplied 3 Coverage and Interference 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Hata Model 3.3 Projects 3.4 Summary References Software Supplied 4 Introduction to Multipath 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Projects 4.3 Summary References Software Supplied 5 Multipath: Narrowband Channel 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Projects 5.3 Summary References Software Supplied 6 Shadowing and Multipath 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Projects 6.3 Summary References Software Supplied 7 Multipath: Wideband Channel 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Deterministic Multiple Point-Scatterer Model 7.3 Channel System Functions 7.4 Stochastic Description of the Wireless Channel 7.5 Projects 7.6 Summary References Software Supplied 8 Propagation in Microcells and Picocells 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Review of Some Propagation Basics 8.3 Microcell and Picocell Empirical Models 8.4 Projects 8.5 Summary References Software Supplied 9 The Land Mobile Satellite Channel 9.1 Introduction 9.2 Projects 9.3 Summary References Software Supplied 10 The Directional Wireless Channel 10.1 Introduction 10.2 MIMO Systems 10.3 Projects 10.4 Summary References Software Supplied Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisProviding an holistic approach to IMS technologies, IMS: A Development and Deployment Perspective explores service architecture for development and delivery of IMS services. Approaching IMS from the perspective of the user and the service provider it examines both the current state of deployment and future trends. The book offers a realistic view of IMS deployment to operators and service providers, giving practical examples, application cases and business models. It also presents IMS deployment strategies based on real-life deployment statistics from a live IMS test bed connected to an operator network and proof-of-concept applications including inter-operability trials and results. Focusing on IMS potential in terms of service creation, service composition and service provision the book discusses the ability of IMS to act not only as a service delivery framework, but also as a service integration framework. It presents the possible future of IMS in terms of convergence witTable of ContentsPreface. Author Biographies. Part I Introduction. 1 IMS Context. 1.1 Drivers of Convergence. 1.2 IMS Misconceptions. 1.3 IMS Standards Status. 1.4 IMS Deployment Status. 1.5 Future. 2 IMS Technology. 2.1 Evolution of Mobile Network Architecture. 2.2 IMS - A Standardized All-IP Infrastructure. 2.3 Evolution of Fixed Mobile Convergence. Part II Convergence - Services and Deployment Perspective. 3 IMS - A Service Perspective. 3.1 The IMS Potential. 3.2 IMS-Enhanced Service Delivery Framework. 3.3 IMS Services - Possibilities. 4 IMS Deployment. 4.1 Deployment Concerns. 4.2 Interoperability. 4.3 IMS Deployment Strategies. 4.4 IMS Test Networks. Part III Convergence - The Road Ahead. 5 WIMS 2.0: Convergence of Telcos with web 2.0 Facilitated by IMS. 5.1 Impact of Web 2.0 Disruption on the IMS and Telecom Evolution. 5.2 WIMS 2.0: The Service Focus. 5.3 WIMS 2.0: The Technology Focus. 6 The Way Forward - Paths to Follow. 6.1 Operators and Service Platforms. 6.2 Developers and Service Creation. 6.3 Users and Service Creation. 6.4 Devices and Service Creation. 6.5 Research and Development. 6.6 Concluding Remarks. References. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides a common framework for mobility management that considers the theoretical and practical aspects of systems optimization for mobile networks. In this book, the authors show how an optimized system of mobility management can improve the quality of service in existing forms of mobile communication. Furthermore, they provide a theoretical approach to mobility management, as well as developing the model for systems optimization, including practical case studies using network layer and mobility layer protocols in different deployment scenarios. The authors also address the different ways in which the specific mobility protocol can be developed, taking into account numerous factors including security, configuration, authentication, quality of service, and movement patterns of the mobiles. Key Features: Defines and discusses a common set of optimization methodologies and their application to all mobility protocols for both ITrade Review“It is a recommended resource for graduate students, researchers, and IT professionals interested in the study of handoff management.” (IEEE Communications Magazine, 1 April 2015) Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xv Foreword xvii Preface xix Acknowledgements xxiii List of Abbreviations xxv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Types of Mobility 2 1.1.1 Terminal Mobility 2 1.1.2 Personal Mobility 5 1.1.3 Session Mobility 6 1.1.4 Service Mobility 7 1.2 Performance Requirements 7 1.3 Motivation 8 1.4 Summary of Key Contributions 9 2 Analysis of Mobility Protocols for Multimedia 13 2.1 Summary of Key Contributions and Indicative Results 13 2.2 Introduction 14 2.3 Cellular 1G 15 2.3.1 System Architecture 15 2.3.2 Handoff Procedure 17 2.4 Cellular 2G Mobility 17 2.4.1 GSM 17 2.4.2 IS-95 19 2.5 Cellular 3G Mobility 23 2.5.1 WCDMA 24 2.5.2 CDMA2000 26 2.6 4G Networks 27 2.6.1 Evolved Packet System 28 2.6.2 WiMAX Mobility 31 2.7 IP-Based Mobility 34 2.7.1 Network Layer Macromobility 34 2.7.2 Network Layer Micromobility 40 2.7.3 NETMOB: Network Mobility 46 2.7.4 Transport Layer Mobility 49 2.7.5 Application Layer Mobility 49 2.7.6 Host Identity Protocol 50 2.7.7 MOBIKE 52 2.7.8 IAPP 53 2.8 Heterogeneous Handover 55 2.8.1 UMTS–WLAN Handover 55 2.8.2 LTE–WLAN Handover 58 2.9 Multicast Mobility 61 2.10 Concluding Remarks 71 3 Systems Analysis of Mobility Events 73 3.1 Summary of Key Contributions and Indicative Results 75 3.2 Introduction 75 3.2.1 Comparative Analysis of Mobility Protocols 77 3.3 Analysis of Handoff Components 78 3.3.1 Network Discovery and Selection 80 3.3.2 Network Attachment 80 3.3.3 Configuration 81 3.3.4 Security Association 81 3.3.5 Binding Update 82 3.3.6 Media Rerouting 83 3.4 Effect of Handoff across Layers 83 3.4.1 Layer 2 Delay 84 3.4.2 Layer 3 Delay 84 3.4.3 Application Layer Delay 85 3.4.4 Handoff Operations across Layers 85 3.5 Concluding Remarks 90 4 Modeling Mobility 91 4.1 Summary of Key Contributions and Indicative Results 91 4.2 Introduction 92 4.3 Related Work 92 4.4 Modeling Mobility as a Discrete-Event Dynamic System 93 4.5 Petri Net Primitives 94 4.6 Petri-Net-Based Modeling Methodologies 96 4.7 Resource Utilization during Handoff 97 4.8 Data Dependency Analysis of the Handoff Process 99 4.8.1 Petri-Net-Based Data Dependency 99 4.8.2 Analysis of Data Dependency during Handoff Process 100 4.9 Petri Net Model for Handoff 105 4.10 Petri-Net-Based Analysis of Handoff Event 113 4.10.1 Analysis of Deadlocks in Handoff 114 4.10.2 Reachability Analysis 120 4.10.3 Matrix Equations 122 4.11 Evaluation of Systems Performance Using Petri Nets 123 4.11.1 Cycle-Time-Based Approach 123 4.11.2 Floyd-Algorithm-Based Approach 124 4.11.3 Resource–Time Product Approach 125 4.12 Opportunities for Optimization 128 4.12.1 Analysis of Parallelism in Handoff Operations 129 4.12.2 Opportunities for Proactive Operation 129 4.13 Concluding Remarks 130 5 Layer 2 Optimization 131 5.1 Introduction 131 5.2 Related Work 131 5.3 IEEE 802.11 Standards 132 5.3.1 The IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN Architecture 133 5.3.2 IEEE 802.11 Management Frames 134 5.4 Handoff Procedure with Active Scanning 135 5.4.1 Steps during Handoff 135 5.5 Fast-Handoff Algorithm 137 5.5.1 Selective Scanning 137 5.5.2 Caching 138 5.6 Implementation 142 5.6.1 The HostAP Driver 142 5.7 Measurements 142 5.7.1 Experimental Setup 142 5.7.2 The Environment 142 5.7.3 Experiments 143 5.8 Measurement Results 143 5.8.1 Handoff Time 143 5.8.2 Packet Loss 143 5.9 Conclusions and Future Work 146 6 Mobility Optimization Techniques 149 6.1 Summary of Key Contributions and Indicative Results 149 6.1.1 Discovery 149 6.1.2 Authentication 150 6.1.3 Layer 3 Configuration 151 6.1.4 Layer 3 Security Association 152 6.1.5 Binding Update 152 6.1.6 Media Rerouting 153 6.1.7 Route Optimization 154 6.1.8 Media-Independent Cross-Layer Triggers 155 6.2 Introduction 156 6.3 Discovery 156 6.3.1 Key Principles 156 6.3.2 Related Work 157 6.3.3 Application Layer Discovery 158 6.3.4 Experimental Results and Analysis 161 6.4 Authentication 164 6.4.1 Key Principles 166 6.4.2 Related Work 166 6.4.3 Network-Layer-Assisted Preauthentication 169 6.4.4 Experimental Results and Analysis 173 6.5 Layer 3 Configuration 177 6.5.1 Key Principles 179 6.5.2 Related Work 180 6.5.3 Router-Assisted Duplicate Address Detection 180 6.5.4 Proactive IP Address Configuration 180 6.5.5 Experimental Results and Analysis 183 6.6 Layer 3 Security Association 183 6.6.1 Key Principles 184 6.6.2 Related Work 184 6.6.3 Anchor-Assisted Security Association 184 6.6.4 Experimental Results and Analysis 187 6.7 Binding Update 190 6.7.1 Key Principles 191 6.7.2 Related Work 191 6.7.3 Hierarchical Binding Update 192 6.7.4 Experimental Results and Analysis 195 6.7.5 Proactive Binding Update 199 6.8 Media Rerouting 199 6.8.1 Key Principles 200 6.8.2 Related Work 200 6.8.3 Data Redirection Using Forwarding Agent 201 6.8.4 Mobility-Proxy-Assisted Time-Bound Data Redirection 202 6.8.5 Time-Bound Localized Multicasting 205 6.9 Media Buffering 210 6.9.1 Key Principles 211 6.9.2 Related Work 211 6.9.3 Protocol for Edge Buffering 212 6.9.4 Experimental Results and Analysis 215 6.9.5 Analysis of the Trade-off between Buffering Delay and Packet Loss 219 6.10 Route Optimization 220 6.10.1 Key Principles 221 6.10.2 Related Work 221 6.10.3 Maintaining a Direct Path by Application Layer Mobility 221 6.10.4 Interceptor-Assisted Packet Modifier at the End Point 222 6.10.5 Intercepting Proxy-Assisted Route Optimization 224 6.10.6 Cost Analysis and Experimental Analysis 226 6.10.7 Binding-Cache-Based Route Optimization 229 6.11 Media-Independent Cross-Layer Triggers 232 6.11.1 Key Principles 232 6.11.2 Related Work 232 6.11.3 Media Independent Handover Function 233 6.11.4 Faster Link-Down Detection Scheme 238 6.12 Concluding Remarks 241 7 Optimization with Multilayer Mobility Protocols 243 7.1 Summary of Key Contributions and Indicative Results 243 7.2 Introduction 244 7.3 Key Principles 245 7.4 Related Work 245 7.5 Multilayer Mobility Approach 246 7.5.1 Policy-Based Mobility Protocols: SIP and MIP-LR 247 7.5.2 Integration of SIP and MIP-LR with MMP 248 7.5.3 Integration of Global Mobility Protocol with Micromobility Protocol 250 7.5.4 Implementation of Multilayer Mobility Protocols 250 7.5.5 Implementation and Performance Issues 252 7.6 Concluding Remarks 255 8 Optimizations for Simultaneous Mobility 257 8.1 Summary of Key Contributions and Indicative Results 257 8.2 Introduction 258 8.2.1 Analysis of Simultaneous Mobility 258 8.3 Illustration of the Simultaneous Mobility Problem 260 8.4 Related Work 262 8.5 Key Optimization Techniques 262 8.6 Analytical Framework 262 8.6.1 Fundamental Concepts 262 8.6.2 Handoff Sequences 263 8.6.3 Binding Updates 264 8.6.4 Location Proxies and Binding Update Proxies 265 8.7 Analyzing the Simultaneous Mobility Problem 267 8.8 Probability of Simultaneous Mobility 270 8.9 Solutions 272 8.9.1 Soft Handoff 273 8.9.2 Receiver-Side Mechanisms 273 8.9.3 Sender-Side Mechanisms 275 8.10 Application of Solution Mechanisms 276 8.10.1 Mobile IPv6 277 8.10.2 MIP-LR 279 8.10.3 SIP-Based Mobility 280 8.11 Concluding Remarks 282 9 Handoff Optimization for Multicast Streaming 285 9.1 Summary of Key Contributions and Indicative Results 285 9.2 Introduction 286 9.3 Key Principles 289 9.4 Related Work 290 9.5 Mobility in a Hierarchical Multicast Architecture 291 9.5.1 Channel Announcement 293 9.5.2 Channel Management 293 9.5.3 Channel Tuning 293 9.5.4 Local Advertisement Insertion 294 9.5.5 Channel Monitor 294 9.5.6 Security 295 9.6 Optimization Techniques for Multicast Media Delivery 296 9.6.1 Reactive Triggering 296 9.6.2 Proactive Triggering 297 9.6.3 Triggering during Configuration of a Mobile 298 9.7 Experimental Results and Performance Analysis 299 9.7.1 Experimental Results 299 9.7.2 Performance Analysis 302 9.8 Concluding Remarks 305 10 Cooperative Roaming 307 10.1 Introduction 307 10.2 Related Work 309 10.3 IP Multicast Addressing 310 10.4 Cooperative Roaming 311 10.4.1 Overview 311 10.4.2 L2 Cooperation Protocol 312 10.4.3 L3 Cooperation Protocol 313 10.5 Cooperative Authentication 314 10.5.1 Overview of IEEE 802.1x 314 10.5.2 Cooperation in the Authentication Process 315 10.5.3 Relay Process 316 10.6 Security 318 10.6.1 Security Issues in Roaming 318 10.6.2 Cooperative Authentication and Security 319 10.7 Streaming Media Support 320 10.8 Bandwidth and Energy Usage 320 10.9 Experiments 321 10.9.1 Environment 321 10.9.2 Implementation Details 322 10.9.3 Experimental Setup 322 10.9.4 Results 323 10.10 Application Layer Mobility 328 10.11 Load Balancing 329 10.12 Multicast and Scalability 330 10.13 An Alternative to Multicast 330 10.14 Conclusions and Future Work 331 11 System Evaluation 333 11.1 Summary of Key Contributions and Indicative Results 333 11.2 Introduction 334 11.3 Experimental Validation 334 11.3.1 The Media Independent Preauthentication Framework 334 11.3.2 Intratechnology Handoff 338 11.3.3 Intertechnology Handoff 340 11.3.4 Cross-Layer-Trigger-Assisted Preauthentication 342 11.3.5 Mobile-Initiated Handover with 802.21 Triggers 344 11.3.6 Network-Initiated Handover with 802.21 Triggers 345 11.3.7 Handover Preparation Time 346 11.4 Handoff Optimization in IP Multimedia Subsystem 350 11.4.1 Nonoptimized Handoff Mode 350 11.4.2 Optimization with Reactive Context Transfer 351 11.4.3 Optimization with Proactive Security Context Transfer 352 11.4.4 Performance Results 353 11.5 Systems Validation Using Petri-Net-Based Models 355 11.5.1 MATLAB®-Based Modeling of Handoff Functions 356 11.5.2 Petri-Net-Based Model for Optimized Security Association 360 11.5.3 Petri-Net-Based Model for Hierarchical Binding Update 361 11.5.4 Petri-Net-Based Model for Media Redirection of In-Flight Data 362 11.5.5 Petri-Net-Based Model of Optimized Configuration 364 11.5.6 Petri-Net-Based Model for Multicast Mobility 364 11.6 Scheduling Handoff Operations 365 11.6.1 Sequential Scheduling 366 11.6.2 Concurrent Scheduling 368 11.6.3 Proactive Scheduling 368 11.7 Verification of Systems Performance 369 11.7.1 Cycle-Time-Based Approach 369 11.7.2 Using the Floyd Algorithm 370 11.8 Petri-Net-Based Modeling for Multi-Interface Mobility 371 11.8.1 Multihoming Scenario 371 11.8.2 Break-Before-Make Scenario 372 11.8.3 Make-Before-Break Scenario 372 11.8.4 MATLAB®-Based Petri Net Modeling for Multi-Interface Mobility 372 11.9 Deadlocks in Handoff Scheduling 374 11.9.1 Handoff Schedules with Deadlocks 375 11.9.2 Deadlock Prevention and Avoidance in Handoff Schedules 377 11.10 Analysis of Level of Concurrency and Resources 380 11.11 Trade-off Analysis for Proactive Handoff 385 11.12 Concluding Remarks 389 12 Conclusions 391 12.1 General Principles of Mobility Optimization 391 12.2 Summary of Contributions 393 12.3 Future Work 394 A RDF Schema for Application Layer Discovery 395 A.1 Schema Primitives 395 B Definitions of Mobility-Related Terms 399 References 409 Index 425

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book offers a unified treatment of mobile middleware technology Mobile Middleware: Architecture, Patterns and Practiceprovides a comprehensive overview of mobile middleware technology. The focus is on understanding the key design and architectural patterns, middleware layering, data presentation, specific technological solutions, and standardization. The author addresses current state of the art systems including Symbian, Java 2 Micro Edition, W3C technologies and many others, and features a chapter on widely deployed middleware systems. Additionally, the book includes a summary of relevant mobile middleware technologies, giving the reader an insight into middleware architecture design and well-known, useful design patterns. Several case studies are included in order to demonstrate how the presented patterns, solutions, and architectures are applied in practice. The case studies pertain to mobile service platforms, mobile XML processing, thin clients, rich clientTable of ContentsAbout the Authors. List of Contributors. Preface. 1. Introduction. 1.1 Mobile Middleware. 1.2 Mobile Applications and Services. 1.3 Middleware Services. 1.4 Transparencies. 1.5 Mobile Environment. 1.6 Context-Awareness. 1.7 Mobility. 1.8 Example Use Case. 1.9 Requirements for Mobile Computing. 1.10 Mobile Platforms. 1.11 Organization of the Book. Bibliography. 2. Architectures and Platforms. 2.1 Overview. 2.2 Networking. 2.3 Naming and Addressing. 2.4 Middleware and Platforms. 2.5 Overview of Platforms. 2.6 Mobile Platforms. Bibliography. 3. Support Technologies. 3.1 Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). 3.2 IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). 3.3 Web Services. 3.4 Other Technologies. 3.5 Service Discovery. 3.6 Mobility Solutions. 3.7 Advanced Topics. 3.8 Fuego: Example Middleware Platform. Bibliography. 4. Principles and Patterns. 4.1 Definitions. 4.2 Principles. 4.3 Cross-layer design. 4.4 Model Driven Architecture. 4.5 Architectural Patterns. 4.6 General Patterns. 4.7 Patterns for Mobile Computing. 4.8 Summary. Bibliography. 5. Interoperability and Standards. 5.1 Interoperability. 5.2 Standardization. 5.3 Wireless Communications Standards. 5.4 W3C Standards. 5.5 IETF Standards. 5.6 Emerging Internet Standards. Bibliography. 6. Mobile Messaging. 6.1 Messaging Fundamentals. 6.2 Messaging Architectures. 6.3 Mobile and Wireless Communication. 6.4 Security. 6.5 Reliability. 6.6 Java Message Service. 6.7 CORBA and CORBA Messaging. 6.8 XMPP. 6.9 Web Services. 6.10 The Web and REST. Bibliography. 7. Publish/Subscribe. 7.1 Overview. 7.2 Router Topologies. 7.3 Interest Propagation. 7.4 Routing Decision. 7.5 Standards. 7.6 Research Systems. 7.7 Advanced Topics. Bibliography. 8. Data Synchronization. 8.1 Synchronization Models. 8.2 File Systems and Version Control. 8.3 Synchronization in Middleware. 8.4 Case Studies. Bibliography. 9. Security. 9.1 Basic Principles. 9.2 Cryptography. 9.3 Public Key Infrastructure. 9.4 Network Security. 9.5 802.11X. 9.6 AAA, RADIUS, Diameter. 9.7 Transport-layer Security. 9.8 Web Services Security. 9.9 Security Tokens. 9.10 SAML. 9.11 XACML. 9.12 Single Sign-On (SSO). 9.13 Generic Bootstrapping Architecture (GBA). 9.14 Trusted Platform Module. 9.15 OpenID, OAuth, MicroID. 9.16 Spam. 9.17 Downloaded Code. Bibliography. 10. Application and Service Case Studies. 10.1 Mobile Services. 10.2 Mobile Server. 10.3 Mobile Advertisement. 10.4 Mobile Push Email. 10.5 Mobile Video. 10.6 Mobile Widgets and WidSets. 10.7 Airline Services. 10.8 Revisiting Mobile Patterns. 10.9 Summary. Bibliography. 11. Conclusions. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides an in-depth reference for design engineers, system planners, and post-graduate students interested in the vastly popular field of indoor wireless communications. It contains wireless applications and services for in-building scenarios and the design and implementation of these systems.Table of ContentsPreface xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Motivation 1 1.2 Evolution of Macro to Heterogeneous Networks 2 1.3 Challenges 3 1.4 Structure of the Book 4 References 5 2 Indoor Wireless Technologies 7 2.1 Cellular 7 2.1.1 The Cellular Concept 8 2.1.2 GSM 9 2.1.3 UMTS 11 2.1.4 HSPA 12 2.1.5 LTE 13 2.2 Wi-Fi 14 2.2.1 History 14 2.2.2 Medium Access Control (MAC) Sublayer 16 2.2.3 Physical Layer 17 2.2.4 Industry Bodies 17 2.2.4.1 Wi-Fi Alliance 17 2.2.4.2 IEEE 802.11 17 2.2.4.3 The Wireless Broadband Alliance 17 2.2.5 Wi-Fi Standards 18 2.2.5.1 IEEE 802.11-1997 18 2.2.5.2 IEEE 802.11a 18 2.2.5.3 IEEE 802.11b 18 2.2.5.4 IEEE 802.11g 18 2.2.5.5 IEEE 802.11-2007 18 2.2.5.6 IEEE 802.11n 18 2.2.6 Spectrum 19 2.2.6.1 2.4 GHz Band 19 2.2.6.2 5 GHz Band 20 2.2.7 Modulation Schemes Used in Wi-Fi 21 2.2.8 Multiple Access (MA) Techniques 21 2.2.8.1 Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS) 21 2.2.8.2 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) 22 2.2.8.3 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) 23 2.2.9 Power Levels 24 2.2.10 Performance Indicators 25 2.2.11 Target Signal Levels and Link Budgets 25 2.2.12 Interference Challenges 29 2.2.13 Channel Planning 29 2.2.13.1 Single-Floor and Vertical Channel Planning 30 2.2.13.2 Multichannel Access Points 31 2.2.13.3 Automated Planning 31 2.2.14 Mobility Issues 31 2.2.14.1 Layer 2 Roam 32 2.2.14.2 Layer 3 Roam 32 2.3 Bluetooth 33 2.4 ZigBee 36 2.5 Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) 37 2.6 Private Mobile Radio (PMR) 39 2.6.1 PMR Elements 40 2.6.2 Attributes 40 2.6.3 TETRA 41 2.7 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications (DECT) 42 References 44 3 System Requirements 45 3.1 Environments 45 3.1.1 Corporate Buildings 46 3.1.2 Airports 47 3.1.3 Trains and Railway Stations 50 3.1.4 Shopping Centres 52 3.1.5 Hospitals 53 3.1.6 Arenas and Stadiums 54 3.1.6.1 What Makes a Stadium so Special? 56 3.1.6.2 Mix of Communities with Different Needs 56 3.1.7 University Campuses 57 3.1.8 Underground Stations 59 3.1.9 Cinemas and Theatres 60 3.1.10 Hotels 60 3.1.11 Cruise Ships 62 3.2 Coverage 62 3.2.1 Cellular 62 3.2.2 Wi-Fi 64 3.2.3 Wireless Personal Area Networks (WPAN) 65 3.3 Isolation 66 3.4 Leakage 67 3.5 Capacity 67 3.6 Interference 70 3.7 Signal Quality 71 3.8 Technology 72 3.9 Cost 72 3.10 Upgradeability 73 3.11 System Expansion 74 3.12 Conclusion 74 References 74 4 Radio Propagation 77 4.1 Maxwell’s Equations 77 4.1.1 Gauss’s Law for Electricity 79 4.1.2 Gauss’s Law for Magnetism 79 4.1.3 Faraday’s Law of Induction 81 4.1.4 Ampère’s Circuital Law 81 4.1.5 Consequence of Maxwell’s Equations 82 4.2 Plane Waves 82 4.2.1 Wave Equation 83 4.2.2 Plane Wave Properties 84 4.2.3 Wave Polarization 85 4.2.4 Wave Propagation in Lossy Media 87 4.3 Propagation Mechanisms 87 4.3.1 Is Electromagnetic Theory Wrong Inside Buildings? 87 4.3.2 Loss and Skin Effect 88 4.3.3 Reflection 89 4.3.4 Refraction (Transmission) 90 4.3.5 Diffraction 91 4.3.6 Scattering 92 4.3.7 Waveguiding 94 4.4 Effects of Materials 95 4.5 Path Loss 97 4.5.1 Median Path Loss 97 4.5.2 Link Budgets 98 4.5.3 Receiver Sensitivity 99 4.5.4 Maximum Acceptable Path Loss (MAPL) 99 4.5.5 Free-Space Loss 100 4.5.6 Excess Loss 100 4.6 Fast Fading 101 4.7 Shadowing (Slow Fading) 103 4.8 Building Penetration Loss 104 4.8.1 Radio Wave Propagation into Buildings 106 4.8.2 Variations with Frequency 106 4.8.3 Variations with Depth and Clutter 109 4.8.4 Comparison of Assumptions Made by Ofcom 109 4.9 Conclusion 109 References 110 5 Channel Modelling 113 5.1 The Importance of Channel Modelling 113 5.2 Propagation Modelling Challenges 114 5.3 Model Classification 114 5.3.1 Channel Bandwidth 114 5.3.2 Propagation Environment 115 5.3.3 Model Construction Approach 115 5.4 Model Accuracy 116 5.5 Empirical Models 117 5.5.1 Power Law Model 118 5.5.2 Keenan–Motley Model 119 5.5.3 ITU-R Indoor Model 121 5.5.4 Siwiak–Bertoni–Yano (SBY) Multipath-Based Model 122 5.5.5 Ericsson Multiple Breakpoint Model 122 5.5.6 Tuan Empirical Indoor Model: 900 MHz to 5.7 GHz 123 5.5.7 Attenuation Factor Model 123 5.5.8 Indoor Dominant Path Model (DPM) 124 5.5.9 COST-231 Multiwall Model 126 5.6 Physical Models 128 5.6.1 Introduction to Ray Tracing 129 5.6.2 Honcharenko–Bertoni Model 130 5.6.3 Ray-Tracing Site-Specific Model 131 5.6.4 Lee Ray-Tracing Model 132 5.6.5 Multichannel Coupling (MCC) Prediction 133 5.6.6 Angular Z-Buffer Algorithm for Efficient Ray Tracing 136 5.6.7 Intelligent Ray-Tracing (IRT) Model 138 5.6.8 Hybrid Parabolic Equation–Integral Equation Indoor Model 139 5.7 Hybrid Models 140 5.7.1 Reduced-Complexity UTD Model 140 5.7.2 Measurement-Based Prediction 142 5.8 Outdoor-to-Indoor Models 143 5.8.1 COST-231 Line-of-Sight Model 144 5.8.2 COST-231 Non-Line-of-Sight Model 146 5.8.3 Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) Penetration Model 147 5.8.4 Ichitsubo–Okamoto Outdoor-to-Indoor Model (800 MHz–8 GHz) 148 5.8.5 Taga–Miura Model Using Identification of Path Passing Through Wall Openings 149 5.9 Models for Propagation in Radiating Cables 150 5.9.1 Zhang Model 150 5.9.2 Carter Model 151 5.9.3 Seseña–Aragón–Castañón Model 152 5.10 Wideband Channel Characteristics 153 5.11 Noise Considerations 156 5.11.1 Noise Sources 157 5.11.2 Noise Parameters 157 5.11.3 Considerations for Indoor Wireless Systems 158 5.12 In-Building Planning Tools 159 5.12.1 iBwave Design 159 5.12.2 WiMap-4G 160 5.12.3 Mentum CellPanner 160 5.12.4 Atrium 160 5.12.5 WinProp 160 5.12.6 CellTrace 161 5.12.7 EDX Signal Pro 161 5.12.8 iBuildNet DAS 162 5.12.9 Wireless InSite 162 5.13 Conclusion 162 References 163 6 Antennas 167 6.1 The Basics of Antenna Theory 167 6.1.1 Conditions for Radiation 168 6.1.2 Antenna Regions 169 6.2 Antenna Parameters 170 6.2.1 Radiation Pattern 171 6.2.2 Directivity 174 6.2.3 Radiation Resistance and Efficiency 176 6.2.4 Power Gain 177 6.2.5 Bandwidth 178 6.2.6 Reciprocity 179 6.2.7 Receiving Antenna Aperture 180 6.2.8 Beamwidth 181 6.2.9 Cross-Polar Discrimination 181 6.2.10 Polarization Matching 182 6.3 Antenna Types 183 6.3.1 Linear Wire 183 6.3.2 Loop 184 6.3.3 Antenna Arrays 186 6.3.4 Travelling Wave and Broadband 186 6.3.5 Microstrip 187 6.3.6 Yagi-Uda 188 6.3.7 Aperture Antennas 189 6.3.8 Horn 189 6.3.9 Monopole 190 6.3.10 Parabolic Reflector (Dish) 190 6.3.11 Smart Antennas 192 6.4 Antenna Performance Issues 193 6.4.1 Mean Effective Gain (MEG) 193 6.4.2 Radiation Pattern Extrapolation 195 6.4.3 Reliability of Radiation Patterns 198 6.5 Antenna Measurements 199 6.6 MIMO (Multiple-Input Multiple-Output) 200 6.7 Examples Of In-Building Antennas 203 6.7.1 In-Building Cellular Antenna Requirements 203 Contents xi 6.7.2 Omnidirectional 203 6.7.3 Directional 206 6.7.4 Macrocell 207 6.7.5 Multiband 207 6.7.6 Deployment Considerations 208 6.8 Radiating Cables 208 6.8.1 Structure 209 6.8.2 Applications 210 6.8.3 Propagation Modes 210 6.8.3.1 Coupled Mode 210 6.8.3.2 Radiating Mode 211 6.8.4 Parameters 211 6.8.4.1 Coupling Loss 211 6.8.4.2 Insertion Loss 211 6.8.4.3 Bandwidth 211 6.8.5 Practical Considerations 212 6.9 Conclusion 212 References 212 7 Radio Measurements 215 7.1 The Value of Measurements 215 7.1.1 Tuning Empirical Path Loss Models 216 7.1.2 Creating Synthetic Channel Models 218 7.1.3 Validating Indoor Radio Designs 218 7.2 Methodology for Indoor Measurements 218 7.2.1 Measurement Campaign Plan 218 7.2.2 Preliminary Site Visit 219 7.2.3 Site Acquisition and Permissions 219 7.2.4 Equipment Checklist 219 7.2.5 Measurement Campaign 219 7.2.6 Data Postprocessing 219 7.2.7 Postvisit to Site 219 7.3 Types of Measurement Systems 220 7.3.1 Narrowband Measurements 220 7.3.1.1 CW Measurements 221 7.3.1.2 Code Scanning 223 7.3.1.3 Engineering Test Mobiles 224 7.3.1.4 Comparative Analysis 224 7.3.2 Wideband Measurements 226 7.4 Measurement Equipment 228 7.4.1 Transmit Equipment 228 7.4.2 Receive Rquipment 229 7.4.3 Miscellaneous Testing Components 230 7.4.4 Buyer’s Guide 232 7.5 Types of Indoor Measurement Surveys 233 7.5.1 Design Survey 233 7.5.2 Existing Coverage 234 7.6 Guidelines for Effective Radio Measurements 235 7.6.1 Planning Your Measurements: The MCP 235 7.6.1.1 Introduction 236 7.6.1.2 Objectives 236 7.6.1.3 Requirements 236 7.6.1.4 Antenna Locations 237 7.6.1.5 Walk Test Routes 238 7.6.1.6 Workplan 238 7.6.1.7 Implications of Not Having an MCP 238 7.6.2 Choose a Suitable Navigation System 238 7.6.3 Signal Sampling and Averaging Considerations 241 7.6.4 Documentation 245 7.6.5 Walk Test Best Practice 246 7.6.6 Equipment Calibration and Validation 247 7.7 Model Tuning and Validation 250 7.7.1 Measurements for Model Tuning 251 7.7.2 Factors Affecting Model Tuning 252 7.7.3 Impact of Having Insufficient Measurements for Tuning 252 7.8 Conclusion 254 References 255 8 Capacity Planning and Dimensioning 257 8.1 Introduction 257 8.2 An Overview On Teletraffic 258 8.2.1 Trunking 259 8.2.2 Loss and Queue Networks 260 8.2.3 Busy-Hour 260 8.3 Capacity Parameters – Circuit-Switched 260 8.3.1 Blocking 260 8.3.2 Grade of Service 261 8.3.3 Traffic per User 261 8.3.4 Offered and Carried Traffic 262 8.3.5 Traffic Categories 263 8.4 Data Transmission Parameters 264 8.4.1 Delay 264 8.4.2 Throughput 264 8.4.3 Latency 264 8.5 Capacity Limits 265 8.6 Radio Resource Management 265 8.7 Load Sharing: Base Station Hotels 266 8.8 Traffic Mapping 267 8.9 Capacity Calculations 267 8.9.1 Service Categories 268 8.9.1.1 Service Types 268 8.9.1.2 Traffic Classes 268 8.9.1.3 Service Category Parameters 269 8.9.2 Service Environment 270 8.9.3 Radio Environment 271 8.9.4 Radio Access Technology Groups (RATGs) 272 8.9.5 Methodology Flowchart 272 8.9.6 Market Data Analysis 273 8.9.7 Traffic Demand Calculation by SE and SC 274 8.9.8 Traffic Distribution Amongst RATGs 275 8.9.8.1 Distribution Ratios 276 8.9.8.2 Distribution of Session Arrival Rates 278 8.9.8.3 Offered Traffic 279 8.9.9 Carried Traffic Capacity Determination 279 8.9.9.1 Circuit-Switched Traffic 279 8.9.9.2 Packet-Switched Traffic 280 8.10 Wi-Fi Capacity 280 8.10.1 The Challenge 280 8.10.2 Facts and Figures 280 8.10.3 Coverage Design 282 8.10.4 Capacity Design 283 8.10.5 Additional Challenges 283 8.11 Data Offloading Considerations 284 8.11.1 Data Offload Using Femtocells 287 8.11.2 Data Offload Using Wi-Fi 287 8.11.3 Femtocell versus Wi-Fi 287 8.11.3.1 Wi-Fi 287 8.11.3.2 Femtocells 288 8.11.4 Carrier Wi-Fi 288 8.11.5 UMA/GAN 288 8.11.6 Seamless Authentication 289 8.11.7 Turning Wi-Fi into an Operator Network 289 8.11.7.1 WBA Next Generation Hotspot 290 8.11.7.2 WBA Roaming 290 8.11.7.3 WFA Hotspot 290 8.11.7.4 ANDSF 290 8.11.7.5 I-WLAN 290 8.11.8 Discussion 290 8.12 Conclusion 291 References 292 9 RF Equipment and Distribution Systems 293 9.1 Base Stations 293 9.2 Distributed Antenna Systems 295 9.2.1 Passive DAS 296 9.2.2 Active DAS 297 9.2.3 Hybrid DAS 299 9.2.4 Installation 300 9.3 RF Miscellaneous – Passive 300 9.3.1 Cables 301 9.3.2 Splitters/Combiners 302 9.3.3 Antennas 302 9.3.4 Directional Couplers 303 9.3.5 Tappers 304 9.3.6 Attenuators 305 9.3.7 Circulators 306 9.3.8 Terminations/Dummy Loads 307 9.3.9 Duplexers 308 9.3.10 Diplexers/Triplexers 308 9.4 RF Miscellaneous – Active 308 9.4.1 Amplifiers 308 9.4.2 Active DAS Components 309 9.4.2.1 Main Unit 309 9.4.2.2 Expansion Unit 309 9.4.2.3 Remote Unit 309 9.5 Repeaters 310 9.5.1 Repeater Deployments 310 9.5.1.1 Operator-Deployed Repeaters 310 9.5.1.2 Traditional Consumer Repeaters 311 9.5.1.3 Intelligent Repeaters 312 9.5.2 Disadvantages 312 9.5.3 Installation Issues 312 9.5.4 Benefits 314 9.6 Conclusion 314 References 314 10 Small Cells 315Simon R. Saunders 10.1 What is a Small Cell? 315 10.2 Small Cell Species 316 10.2.1 Femtocells for Residential Environments 316 10.2.2 Picocells 316 10.2.3 Metrocells 317 10.2.4 Rural and Remote Small Cells 317 10.3 The Case for Small Cells 318 10.3.1 Capacity 318 10.3.2 Coverage 318 10.3.3 User Experience 318 10.3.4 Cost Effectiveness 318 10.4 History and Standards 318 10.5 Architecture and Management 320 10.6 Coverage, Capacity and Interference 321 10.7 Business Case 323 10.8 Regulation 324 10.9 Small Cells ComparedWith Other IndoorWireless Technologies 324 10.9.1 Distributed Antenna Systems (DASs) 324 10.9.2 Wi-Fi 325 10.9.3 Repeaters and Relay Nodes 326 10.10 Market 326 10.11 Future: New Architectures and Towards 5G 327 References 327 11 In-Building Case Studies 331Vladan Jevremovic 11.1 Public Venue 331 11.1.1 Scenario 332 11.1.2 Solution 332 11.1.3 Common Design Requirements 332 11.1.3.1 Multicarrier (Neutral Host) 332 11.1.3.2 Multiband 333 11.1.3.3 Multitechnology 334 11.1.4 Common Best Practices 335 11.1.4.1 Passive Intermodulation (PIM) 335 11.1.4.2 Downlink Design 335 11.1.4.3 Uplink Design 336 11.1.5 Summary 341 11.2 Stadium 341 11.2.1 Scenario 342 11.2.2 Solution 344 11.2.3 Design Requirements 344 11.2.3.1 RF Coverage 344 11.2.3.2 Capacity 344 11.2.3.3 Handoff Management 344 11.2.3.4 Interference Management 345 11.2.4 Site Survey 345 11.2.5 Detailed 3-D Modelling 346 11.2.6 Sectorization 348 11.2.7 Macro Coverage Management 349 11.2.8 Passive Intermodulation Management 350 11.2.9 Design for Stadium Capacity 350 11.2.9.1 Data Capacity Sizing 352 11.2.9.2 Voice Capacity Sizing 358 11.2.10 RF Coverage Design 360 11.2.11 Summary 361 11.3 Shopping Centre 362 11.3.1 Scenario 362 11.3.2 Design Requirements 363 11.3.2.1 RF Coverage 363 11.3.2.2 Antenna Placement Restrictions 364 11.3.3 Solution 364 11.3.4 Antenna Choice and Placement 364 11.3.5 RF Coverage Design 365 11.3.6 Capacity Dimensioning 367 11.3.7 Sectorization 372 11.3.8 Data Rate Coverage 372 11.3.9 Summary 373 11.4 Business Campus 374 11.4.1 Scenario 374 11.4.2 Design Requirements 375 11.4.2.1 RF Coverage 375 11.4.2.2 Handoff Management 376 11.4.2.3 Interference Management 377 11.4.3 Solution 378 11.4.4 Interference Control 378 11.4.5 Lift Coverage 380 11.4.6 Detailed RF Coverage Design 383 11.4.7 Summary 385 11.5 Underground (Subway) 386 11.5.1 Scenario 386 11.5.2 Design Requirements 387 11.5.2.1 RF Coverage 387 11.5.2.2 Capacity 389 11.5.2.3 Handoff Management 390 11.5.3 Solution 390 11.5.4 RF Coverage Design 391 11.5.5 Capacity 393 11.5.5.1 Data 393 11.5.5.2 Voice 400 11.5.6 Environmental Challenges 402 11.5.7 Radio Coverage Maps 403 11.5.8 Summary 406 References 406 Index 409

Read more less

Book SynopsisWritten by experts in the field, this book provides an overview of all forms of broadband subscriber access networks and technology, including fiber optics, DSL for phone lines, DOCSIS for coax, power line carrier, and wireless. Each technology is described in depth, with a discussion of key concepts, historical development, and industry standards. The book contains comprehensive coverage of all broadband access technologies, with a section each devoted to fiber-based technologies, non-fiber wired technologies, and wireless technologies. The four co-authors' breadth of knowledge is featured in the chapters comparing the relative strengths, weaknesses, and prognosis for the competing technologies. Key Features: Covers the physical and medium access layers (OSI Layer 1 and 2), with emphasis on access transmission technology Compares and contrasts all recent and emerging wired and wireless standards for broadband access in a single reference IllustTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xv Acknowledgments xvii List of Abbreviations and Acronyms xix 1 Introduction to Broadband Access Networks and Technologies 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 A Brief History of the Access Network 2 1.3 Digital Subscriber Lines (DSL) 3 1.3.1 DSL Technologies and Their Evolution 3 1.3.2 DSL System Technologies 5 1.4 Hybrid Fiber-Coaxial Cable (HFC) 5 1.5 Power Line Communications (PLC) 6 1.6 Fiber in the Loop (FITL) 7 1.7 Wireless Broadband Access 10 1.8 Direct Point-to-Point Connections 12 Appendix 1.A: Voiceband Modems 12 2 Introduction to Fiber Optic Broadband Access Networks and Technologies 15 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 A Brief History of Fiber in the Loop (FITL) 16 2.3 Introduction to PON Systems 18 2.3.1 PON System Overview 18 2.3.2 PON Protocol Evolution 19 2.4 FITL Technology Considerations 21 2.4.1 Optical Components 21 2.4.2 Powering the Loop 22 2.4.3 System Power Savings 23 2.4.4 PON Reach Extension 25 2.5 Introduction to PON Network Protection 30 2.5.1 Background on Network Protection 31 2.5.2 PON Facility Protection 31 2.5.3 OLT Function Protection 35 2.5.4 ONU Protection 40 2.5.5 Conclusions Regarding Protection 42 2.6 Conclusions 42 Appendix 2.A: Subscriber Power Considerations 43 References 43 Further Reading 43 3 IEEE Passive Optical Networks 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 IEEE 802.3ah Ethernet-based PON (EPON) 45 3.2.1 EPON Physical Layer 46 3.2.2 Signal Formats 46 3.2.3 MAC Protocol 48 3.2.4 Encryption and Security 49 3.2.5 Forward Error Correction (FEC) 50 3.2.6 ONU Discovery and Activation 51 3.2.7 ONU Ranging Mechanism 52 3.2.8 EPON OAM 52 3.2.9 Dynamic Bandwidth Assignment (DBA) 53 3.3 IEEE 802.3av 10Gbit/s Ethernet-based PON (10G EPON) 54 3.3.1 10G EPON Physical Layer 54 3.3.2 Signal Format 58 3.3.3 MAC Protocol 59 3.3.4 Forward Error Correction 59 3.3.5 ONU Discovery and Activation 61 3.3.6 ONU Ranging Mechanism 61 3.3.7 10G EPON OAM 61 3.3.8 Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation 61 3.4 Summary Comparison of EPON and 10G EPON 61 3.5 Transport of Timing and Synchronization over EPON and 10G EPON 61 3.6 Overview of the IEEE 1904.1 Service Interoperability in Ethernet Passive Optical Networks (SIEPON) 63 3.6.1 SIEPON MAC Functional Blocks 65 3.6.2 VLAN Support 67 3.6.3 Multicast Service 67 3.6.4 SIEPON Service Management 67 3.6.5 Performance Monitoring and Verification 69 3.6.6 SIEPON Service Availability 70 3.6.7 SIEPON Optical Link Protection 70 3.6.8 SIEPON Power Savings 70 3.6.9 SIEPON Security Mechanisms 71 3.6.10 SIEPON Management 71 3.7 ITU-T G.9801 Ethernet Passive Optical Networks using OMCI 71 3.8 Conclusions 71 Appendix 3.A: 64B/66B Line Code 72 References 75 Further Readings 75 4 ITU-T/FSAN PON Protocols 77 4.1 Introduction 77 4.2 ITU-T G.983 Series B-PON (Broadband PON) 78 4.3 ITU-T G.984 Series G-PON (Gigabit-capable PON) 79 4.3.1 G-PON Physical Layer 79 4.3.2 G-PON Frame Formats 81 4.3.3 G-PON Encapsulation Method (GEM) 87 4.3.4 G-PON Multiplexing 91 4.3.5 Encryption and Security 92 4.3.6 Forward Error Correction 92 4.3.7 Protection Switching 94 4.3.8 ONU Activation 94 4.3.9 Ranging Mechanism 95 4.3.10 Dynamic Bandwidth Assignment (DBA) 96 4.3.11 OAM Communication 97 4.3.12 Time of Day Distribution 97 4.3.13 G-PON Enhancements 101 4.4 Next Generation PON (NG-PON) 101 4.4.1 Introduction to G.987 series XG-PON (NG-PON1 – 10Gbit-capable PON) 102 4.4.2 XG-PON Physical Layer 102 4.4.3 XG-PON Transmission Convergence Layer and Frame Structures 105 4.4.4 Forward Error Correction 108 4.4.5 XG-PON Encapsulation Method (XGEM) 109 4.4.6 XG-PON Management 110 4.4.7 XG-PON Security 110 4.4.8 NG-PON2 40 Gbit/s Capable PON 110 Appendix 4.A: Summary Comparison of EPON and G-PON 112 References 113 Further Readings 114 5 Optical Domain PON Technologies 115 5.1 Introduction 115 5.2 WDMA (Wavelength Division Multiple Access) PON 115 5.2.1 Overview 115 5.2.2 Technologies 116 5.2.3 Applications 120 5.3 CDMA PON 120 5.4 Point-to-Point Ethernet 122 5.5 Subcarrier Multiplexing and OFDM 123 5.5.1 Introduction 123 5.5.2 OFDMA PON 123 5.6 Conclusions 125 References 126 Further Readings 126 6 Hybrid Fiber Access Technologies 127 6.1 Introduction and Background 127 6.2 Evolution of DOCSIS (Data-Over-Cable Service Interface Specification) to Passive Optical Networks 127 6.2.1 Introduction and Background 127 6.2.2 DOCSIS Provisioning of EPON (DPoE) 128 6.2.3 Conclusions for DPoE 135 6.3 Radio and Radio Frequency Signals over Fiber 135 6.3.1 Radio over Fiber (RoF) 136 6.3.2 Baseband Digital Radio Fiber Interfaces 136 6.3.3 Radio Frequency over Glass (RFoG) 138 6.4 IEEE 802.3bn Ethernet Protocol over Coaxial Cable (EPoC) 140 6.5 Conclusions 140 References 141 Further Readings 141 7 DSL Technology – Broadband via Telephone Lines 143 7.1 Introduction to DSL 143 7.2 DSL Compared to Other Access Technologies 144 7.2.1 Security and Reliability 144 7.2.2 Point-to-Point Versus Shared Access 145 7.2.3 Common Facilities for Voice and DSL 146 7.2.4 Bit-rate Capacity 146 7.2.5 Hybrid Access 146 7.2.6 Future Trends for DSL Access 146 7.3 DSL Overview 147 7.3.1 Voice-band Modems 147 7.3.2 The DSL Concept 147 7.3.3 DSL Terminology 149 7.3.4 Introduction to DSL Types 151 7.3.5 DSL Performance Improvement, Repeaters, and Bonding 152 7.3.6 Splitters and Filters for Voice and Data 153 7.3.7 Other Ways to Convey Voice and Data 155 7.4 Transmission Channel and Impairments 156 7.4.1 Signal Attenuation 158 7.4.2 Bridged Taps 159 7.4.3 Loading Coils 162 7.4.4 Return Loss and Insertion Loss 163 7.4.5 Balance 163 7.4.6 Intersymbol Interference (ISI) 163 7.4.7 Noise 164 7.4.8 Transmission Channel Models 170 7.5 DSL Transmission Techniques 170 7.5.1 Duplexing 170 7.5.2 Channel Equalization and Related Techniques 171 7.5.3 Coding 172 References 174 Further Readings 174 8 The Family of DSL Technologies 175 8.1 ADSL 175 8.1.1 G.lite 176 8.1.2 ADSL2 and ADSL2plus 177 8.1.3 ADSL1 and ADSL2plus Performance 178 8.2 VDSL 179 8.2.1 VDSL2 181 8.2.2 VDSL2 Performance 182 8.3 Basic Rate Interface ISDN 184 8.4 HDSL, HDSL2, and HDLS4 185 8.5 SHDSL 185 8.6 G.fast (FTTC DSL) 187 Reference 188 9 Advanced DSL Techniques and Home Networking 189 9.1 Repeaters and Bonding 189 9.2 Dynamic Spectrum Management (DSM) 190 9.3 Vectored Transmission 190 9.4 Home Networking 195 References 195 Further Readings 195 10 DSL Standards 197 10.1 Spectrum Management – ANSI T1.417 197 10.2 G.hs – ITU-T Rec. G.994.1 199 10.3 PLOAM – ITU-T Rec. G.997.1 200 10.4 G.bond – ITU-T Recs. G.998.1, G.998.2, and G.998.3 201 10.5 G.test – ITU-T Rec. G.996.1 202 10.6 G.lt – ITU-T Rec. G.996.2 202 10.7 Broadband Forum DSL Testing Specifications 203 10.8 Broadband Forum TR-069 – Remote Management of CPE 204 References 205 11 The DOCSIS (Data-Over-Cable Service Interface Specification) Protocol 207 11.1 General Introduction 207 11.2 Introduction to MSO Networks 207 11.3 Background on Hybrid Fiber Coax (HFC) Networks 208 11.4 Introduction to DOCSIS 210 11.5 DOCSIS Network Elements 210 11.5.1 CMTS (Cable Modem Terminating System) 211 11.5.2 CM (Cable Modem) 212 11.5.3 FN (Fiber Node) 213 11.5.4 RF Combiner Shelf 213 11.6 Brief History of the DOCSIS Protocol Evolution 213 11.6.1 DOCSIS 1.0 214 11.6.2 DOCSIS 1.1 214 11.6.3 DOCSIS 2.0 214 11.6.4 DOCSIS 3.0 215 11.6.5 Regional History and Considerations 215 11.7 DOCSIS Physical Layer 216 11.7.1 DOCSIS Downstream Transmission 216 11.7.2 DOCSIS Upstream Transmission 218 11.8 Synchronization and Ranging 222 11.8.1 Synchronization 223 11.8.2 Ranging 224 11.9 DOCSIS MAC Sub-Layer 226 11.9.1 Downstream MAC 227 11.9.2 Upstream MAC 228 11.9.3 MAC Management Messages 232 11.9.4 MAC Parameters 233 11.10 CM Provisioning 239 11.11 Security 240 11.12 Introduction to Companion Protocols 242 11.12.1 The PacketCableTM Protocol 242 11.12.2 The OpenCableTM Protocol 242 11.12.3 PacketCable Multimedia (PCMM) 242 11.13 Conclusions 243 References 243 Further Readings 243 12 Broadband in Gas Line (BIG) 245 12.1 Introduction to BIG 245 12.2 Proposed Technology 245 12.3 Potential Drawbacks for BIG 245 12.4 Broadband Sewage Line 247 Reference 247 13 Power Line Communications 249 13.1 Introduction 249 13.2 The Early Years 250 13.3 Narrowband PLC 251 13.3.1 Overview of NB-PLC Standards 252 13.4 Broadband PLC 253 13.4.1 Overview of BB-PLC Standards 254 13.5 Power Grid Topologies 257 13.5.1 Outdoor Topologies: HV, MV, and LV 257 13.5.2 Indoor Topologies 258 13.6 Outdoor and In-Home Channel Characterization 261 13.6.1 Characteristics of the HV Power Line Channel 262 13.6.2 Characteristics of MV Power Line Channel 262 13.6.3 Characteristics of LV Power Line Channel 263 13.6.4 Power Line Noise Characteristics 263 13.7 Power Line Channel Modeling 269 13.7.1 Recent Results on the Modeling of Wireline Channels: Towards a Unified Framework 271 13.8 The IEEE 1901 Broadband over Power Line Standard 273 13.8.1 Overview of Technical Features 273 13.8.2 The MAC and the Two PLCPs 274 13.8.3 Access-Specific Features 275 13.9 PLC and the Smart Grid 277 13.9.1 PLC for MV 279 13.9.2 PLC for LV 279 13.10 Conclusions 283 References 284 Further Reading 285 14 Wireless Broadband Access: Air Interface Fundamentals 287 14.1 Introduction 287 14.2 Duplexing Techniques 287 14.2.1 Frequency-Division Duplex 288 14.2.2 Time-Division Duplex 288 14.3 Physical Layer Concepts 289 14.3.1 The Wireless Channel 289 14.3.2 Diversity 290 14.3.3 Channel Coding 291 14.3.4 Interleaving 291 14.3.5 Multi-Antenna Techniques and Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) 291 14.4 Access Technology Concepts 295 14.4.1 Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) 295 14.4.2 Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) 295 14.4.3 Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) 295 14.4.4 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) 297 14.4.5 MAC Protocols 299 14.5 Cross-Layer Algorithms 300 14.5.1 Link Adaptation 300 14.5.2 Channel-Dependent Scheduling 300 14.5.3 Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ) and Hybrid ARQ (HARQ) 302 14.6 Example Application: Satellite Broadband Access 303 14.7 Summary 303 Further Reading 304 15 WiFi: IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN 305 15.1 Introduction 305 15.2 Technology Basics 306 15.2.1 System Overview 306 15.2.2 MAC Layer 308 15.2.3 Physical Layer 311 15.3 Technology Evolution 312 15.3.1 802.11 b 312 15.3.2 802.11 a/g 313 15.3.3 802.11 n 314 15.3.4 802.11 ac 316 15.4 WLAN Network Architecture 318 15.5 TV White Space and 802.11 af 320 15.6 Summary 320 Further Readings 321 16 UMTS: W-CDMA and HSPA 323 16.1 Introduction 323 16.2 Technology Basics 324 16.2.1 Network Architecture 324 16.2.2 Protocol Architecture 325 16.2.3 Physical Layer (L1) 327 16.2.4 Layer-2 334 16.2.5 Radio Resource Control (RRC) 336 16.3 UMTS Technology Evolution 338 16.3.1 Release 99 338 16.3.2 Release 5: High-Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) 339 16.3.3 Release 6: Enhanced Uplink 343 16.3.4 Release 7 347 16.3.5 Release 8 and Beyond 348 16.4 CDMA2000 350 16.5 Summary 351 Further Readings 352 17 Fourth Generation Systems: LTE and LTE-Advanced 353 17.1 Introduction 353 17.1.1 LTE Standardization 353 17.1.2 LTE Requirements 354 17.2 Release 8: The Basics of LTE 355 17.2.1 Network Architecture 355 17.2.2 PDN Connectivity, Bearers, and QoS Architecture 358 17.2.3 Protocol Architecture 360 17.2.4 Layer-1: The Physical Layer 361 17.2.5 Layer-2 and Cross-Layer Algorithms 370 17.2.6 Layer-3: Radio Resource Control (RRC) 380 17.3 Release 9: eMBMS and SON 383 17.3.1 Evolved Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (eMBMS) 384 17.3.2 Self-Organizing Networks (SON) 386 17.4 Release 10: LTE-Advanced 386 17.4.1 Carrier Aggregation 388 17.4.2 Heterogeneous Networks with Small Cells 391 17.5 Future of LTE-Advanced: Release 11 and Beyond 395 17.5.1 Cooperative Multi-Point (CoMP) 396 17.5.2 Release 12 and the Future of LTE 398 17.6 IEEE 802.16 and WiMAX Systems 399 17.7 Summary 400 Further Readings 402 18 Conclusions Regarding Broadband Access Networks and Technologies 403 Index 407

Read more less

Book SynopsisDigital Design of Signal Processing Systems discusses a spectrum of architectures and methods for effective implementation of algorithms in hardware (HW). Encompassing all facets of the subject this book includes conversion of algorithms from floating-point to fixed-point format, parallel architectures for basic computational blocks, Verilog Hardware Description Language (HDL), SystemVerilog and coding guidelines for synthesis. The book also covers system level design of Multi Processor System on Chip (MPSoC); a consideration of different design methodologies including Network on Chip (NoC) and Kahn Process Network (KPN) based connectivity among processing elements. A special emphasis is placed on implementing streaming applications like a digital communication system in HW. Several novel architectures for implementing commonly used algorithms in signal processing are also revealed. With a comprehensive coverage of topics the book provides an appropriate mix of examples to iTrade Review"It can be used in a course on advanced digital design and VLSI signal processing at the senior undergraduate or graduate level." (Booknews, 1 April 2011)Table of ContentsPreface. Acknowledgement. 1 Overview. 1.1 Introduction. 1.2 Fueling the Innovation: Moore’s Law. 1.3 Digital Systems. 1.4 Examples of Digital Systems. 1.5 Components of the Digital Design Process. 1.6 Competing Objectives in Digital Process. 1.7 Synchronous Digital Hardware Systems. 1.8 Design Strategies. References. 2. Using a Hardware Description Language. 2.1 Overview. 2.2 About Verilog. 2.3 System Design Flow. 2.4 Logic Synthesis. 2.5 Using the Verilog HDL. 2.6 Four Levels of Abstraction. 2.7 Verification in Hardware Design. 2.8 Example of a Verification Setup. 2.9 SystemVerilog. Exercises. References. 3. System Design Flow and Fixed-Point Arithmetic. 3.1 Overview. 3.2 System Design Flow. 3.3 Representations and Numbers. 3.4 Floating-point Format. 3.5 Qn.m Format for Fixed-point Arithmetic. 3.6 Floating-Point to Fixed-Point Conversion. 3.7 Block Floating-Point Format. 3.8 Forms of Digital Filter. Exercises. References. 4. Mapping on Fully Dedicated Architecture. 4.1 Introduction. 4.2 Discrete Real-Time Systems. 4.3 Synchronous Digital Hardware Systems. 4.4 Kahn Process Network. 4.5 Methods of Representing DSP Systems. 4.6 Performance Measures. 4.7 Fully Dedicated Architecture. 4.8 DFG to HW Synthesis. Exercises. References. 5. Design Options for Basic Building Blocks. 5.1 Introduction. 5.2 Embedded Processors and Arithmetic Units in FPGAs. 5.3 Instantiation of Embedded Blocks. 5.4 Basic Building Blocks: Introduction. 5.5 Adders. 5.6 Barrel Shifter. 5.7 Cary Save Adder and Compressors. 5.8 Parallel Multipliers. 5.9 Two’s Complement Signed Multiplier. 5.10 Compression Trees for Multi-operand Addition. 5.11 Algorithm Transformations for CSA. Exercises. References. 6. Multiplier-less Multiplication by Constants. 6.1 Introduction. 6.2 Canonic Sign Digit Representation. 6.3 Minimum Signed Digit Representation. 6.4 Multiplication by Constant in Signal Processing Algorithm. 6.5 Optimized DFG Transformation. 6.6 Fully Dedicated Architecture for Direct-form FIR Filter. 6.7 Complexity Reduction. 6.8 Distributed Arithmetic. 6.9 FFT Architecture using FIR Filter Structure. Exercises. References. 7. Pipelining, Retiming, Look-ahead Transformation and Polyphase Decomposition. 7.1 Introduction. 7.2 Pipelining and Retiming. 7.3 Digital Design of Feedback Systems. 7.4 C-slow Retiming. 7.5 Look-ahead Transformation for IIR filters. 7.6 Look-ahead Transformation for Generalized IIR Filters. 7.7 Polyphase Structure for Decimation and Interpolation Applications. 7.8 IIR Filter for Decimation and Interpolation. Exercises. References. 8. Unfolding and Folding Architectures. 8.1 Introduction. 8.2 Unfolding. 8.3 Sampling Rate Considerations. 8.4 Unfolding Techniques. 8.5 Folding Techniques. 8.6 Mathematical Transformation for Folding. 8.7 Algorithmic Transformation. Exercises. References. 9.Designs based on Finite State Machines. 9.1 Introduction. 9.2 Examples of Time-shared Architecture Design. 9.3 Sequencing and Control. 9.4 Algorithmic State Machine Representation. 9.5 FSM Optimization for Low Power and Area. 9.6 Designing for Testability. 9.7 Methods for Reducing Power Dissipation. Exercises. References. 10. Micro-programmed State Machines. 10.1 Introduction. 10.2 Micro-programmed Controller. 10.3 Counter-based State Machine. 10.4 Subroutine Support. 10.5 Nested Subroutine Support. 10.6 Nested Loop Support. 10.7 Examples. Exercises. References. 11. Micro-programmed Adaptive Filtering Applications. 11.1 Introduction. 11.2 Adaptive Filters Configurations. 11.3 Adaptive Algorithms. 11.4 Channel Equalizer using NLMS. 11.5 Echo Canceller. 11.6 Adaptive Algorithms with Micro-programmed State Machines. Exercises. References. 12 CORDIC-based DDFS Architectures. 12.1 Introduction. 12.2 Direct Digital Frequency Synthesizer. 12.3 Design of a Basic DDFS. 12.4 The CORDIC Algorithm. 12.5 Hardware Mapping of Modified CORDIC Algorithm. Exercises. References. 13. Digital Design of Communication Systems. 13.1 Introduction. 13.2 Top-level Design Options. 13.3 Typical Digital Communication System. Exercises. References. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe most comprehensive book on state-of-the-art smart card technology available Updated with new international standards and specifications, this essential fourth edition now covers all aspects of smart card in a completely revised structure. Its enlarged coverage now includes smart cards for passports and ID cards, health care cards, smart cards for public transport, and Java Card 3.0. New sub-chapters cover near field communication (NFC), single wire protocol (SWP), and multi megabyte smart cards (microcontroller with NAND-Flash). There are also extensive revisions to chapters on smart card production, the security of smart cards (including coverage of new attacks and protection methods), and contactless card data transmission (ISO/IEC 10536, ISO/IEC 14443, ISO/IEC 15693). This edition also features: additional views to the future development of smart cards, such as USB, MMU, SWP, HCI, Flash memory and their usage; new inteTable of ContentsPreface to the Fourth Edition. Symbols and Notation. Abbreviations. 1 Introduction. 1.1 The history of smart cards. 1.2 Card types and applications. 1.3 Standardization. 2 Card Types. 2.1 Embossed cards. 2.2 Magnetic-stripe cards. 2.3 Smart cards. 2.4 Optical memory cards. 3 Physical Properties. 3.1 Card formats. 3.2 Contact field. 3.3 Card body. 3.4 Card materials. 3.5 Card components and security features. 3.6 Chip modules. 4 Electrical Properties. 4.1 Electrical connections. 4.2 Supply voltage. 4.3 Supply current. 4.4 Clock supply. 4.5 Data transmission with T = 0 or T =1. 4.6 Activation and deactivation sequences. 5 Smart Card Microcontrollers. 5.1 Semiconductor technology. 5.2 Processor types. 5.3 Memory types. 5.4 Supplementary hardware. 5.5 Extended temperature range. 6 Information Technology Foundations. 6.1 Data structures. 6.2 Encoding alphanumeric data. 6.3 SDL notation. 6.4 State machines. 6.5 Error detection and correction codes. 6.6 Data compression. 7 Security Foundations. 7.1 Cryptology. 7.2 Hash functions. 7.3 Random numbers. 7.4 Authentication. 7.5 Digital signatures. 7.6 Certificates. 7.7 Key management. 7.8 Identification of persons. 8 Communication with Smart Cards. 8.1 Answer to reset (ATR). 8.2 Protocol Parameter Selection (PPS). 8.3 Message structure: APDUS. 8.4 Secure Data Transmission. 8.5 Logical channels. 8.6 Logical protocols. 8.7 Connecting terminals to higher-level systems. 9 Data Transmission with Contact Cards. 9.1 Physical transmission layer. 9.2 Memory card protocols. 9.3 ISO transmission protocols. 9.4 USB transmission protocol. 9.5 MMC transmission protocol. 9.6 Single-wire protocol (SWP). 10 Contactless Data Transmission. 10.1 Inductive coupling. 10.2 Power transmission. 10.3 Data transmission. 10.4 Capacitive coupling. 10.5 Collision avoidance. 10.6 State of standardization. 10.7 Close-coupling cards (ISO/IEC 10536). 10.8 Remote coupling cards. 10.9 Proximity cards (ISO/IEC 14443). 10.10 Vicinity integrated circuit cards (ISO/IEC 15693). 10.11 Near field communication (NFC). 10.12 FeliCa. 10.13 Mifare. 11 Smart Card Commands. 11.1 File selection commands. 11.2 Read and write commands. 11.3 Search commands. 11.4 File operation commands. 11.5 Commands for authenticating persons. 11.6 Commands for authenticating devices. 11.7 Commands for cryptographic algorithms. 11.8 File management commands. 11.9 Application management commands. 11.10 Completion commands. 11.11 Commands for hardware testing. 11.12 Commands for data transmission. 11.13 Database commands (SCQL). 11.14 Commands for electronic purses. 11.15 Commands for credit and debit cards. 11.16 Application-specific commands. 11.17 Command processing times. 12 Smart Card File Management. 12.1 File structure. 12.2 The life cycle of files. 12.3 File types. 12.4 Application files. 12.5 File names. 12.6 File selection. 12.7 EF file structures. 12.8 File access conditions. 12.9 File attributes. 13 Smart Card Operating Systems. 13.1 Evolution of smart card operating systems. 13.2 Fundamental aspects and tasks. 13.3 Command processing. 13.4 Design and implementation principles. 13.5 Operating system completion. 13.6 Memory organization and memory management. 13.7 File management. 13.8 Sequence control. 13.9 ISO/IEC 7816-9 resource access. 13.10 Atomic operations. 13.11 Multitasking. 13.12 Performance. 13.13 Application management with global platform. 13.14 Downloadable program code. 13.15 Executable native code. 13.16 Open platforms. 13.17 The small-OS smart card operating system. 14 Smart Card Production. 14.1 Tasks and roles in the production process. 14.2 The smart card life cycle. 14.3 Chip and module production. 14.4 Card Body production. 14.5 Combining the card body and the chip. 14.6 Electrical testing of modules. 14.7 Loading static data. 14.8 Loading individual data. 14.9 Envelope stuffing and dispatching. 14.10 Special types of production. 14.11 Termination of card usage. 15 Quality Assurance. 15.1 Card body tests. 15.2 Microcontroller hardware tests. 15.3 Test methods for contactless smart cards. 15.5 Evaluation of hardware and software. 16 Smart Card Security. 16.1 Classification of attacks and attackers. 16.2 A history of attacks. 16.3 Attacks and defense measures during development. 16.4 Attacks and defense measures during production. 16.5 Attacks and defense measures during card usage. 17 Smart Card Terminals. 17.1 Mechanical properties. 17.2 Electrical properties. 17.3 User interface. 17.4 Application interface. 17.5 Security. 18 Smart Cards in Payment Systems. 18.1 Payment transactions with cards. 18.2 Prepaid memory cards. 18.3 Electronic purses. 18.4 EMV Application. 18.5 PayPass and payWave. 18.6 The Eurocheque System in Germany. 19 Smart Cards in Telecommunication Systems. 19.1 Public card phones in Germany. 19.2 Telecommunication. 19.3 Overview of mobile telecommunication systems. 19.4 The GSM system. 19.5 The UMTS system. 19.6 The wireless identification module (WIM). 19.7 Microbrowsers. 20 Smart Cards in Health Care Systems. 20.1 Health insurance cards in Germany. 20.2 Electronic health care cards in Germany. 21 Smart Cards in Transportation Systems. 21.1 Electronic tickets. 21.2 Ski Passes. 21.3 Tachosmart. 21.4 Electronic toll systems. 22 Smart Cards for Identification and Passports. 22.1 FINEID personal ID card. 22.2 ICAO-compliant passports. 23 Smart Cards for IT Security. 23.1 Digital signatures. 23.2 Signature applications compliant with PKCS #15. 23.3 Smart Card Web Server (SCWS). 24 Application Design. 24.1 General information and characteristic data. 24.2 Application generation tools. 24.3 Analyzing an unknown smart card. 25 Appendix. 25.1 Glossary. 25.2 Related reading. 25.3 Bibliography. 25.4 Directory of standards and specifications. 25.5 Web addresses. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe main purpose of this book is to provide a comprehensive treatment of the materials aspects of group-IV, III-V and II-VI semiconductor alloys used in various electronic and optoelectronic devices. The topics covered in this book include the structural, thermal, mechanical, lattice vibronic, electronic, optical and carrier transport properties of such semiconductor alloys. The book reviews not only commonly known alloys (SiGe, AlGaAs, GaInPAs, and ZnCdTe) but also new alloys, such as dilute-carbon alloys (CSiGe, CSiSn, etc.), III-N alloys, dilute-nitride alloys (GaNAs and GaInNAs) and Mg- or Be-based II-VI semiconductor alloys. Finally there is an extensive bibliography included for those who wish to find additional information as well as tabulated values and graphical information on the properties of semiconductor alloys.Table of ContentsSeries Preface. Preface. Abbreviations and Acronyms. Introductory Remarks. A.1 An Alloy and a Compound. A.2 Grimm–Sommerfeld Rule. A.3 An Interpolation Scheme. References. 1 Structural Properties. 1.1 Ionicity. 1.2 Elemental Isotopic Abundance and Molecular Weight. 1.3 Crystal Structure. 1.4 Lattice Constant and Related Parameters. 1.5 Coherent Epitaxy and Strain Problem. 1.6 Structural Phase Transition. 1.7 Cleavage Plane. References. 2 Thermal Properties. 2.1 Melting Point and Related Parameters. 2.2 Specific Heat. 2.3 Debye Temperature. 2.4 Thermal Expansion Coefficient. 2.5 Thermal Conductivity and Diffusivity. References. 3 Elastic Properties. 3.1 Elastic Constant. 3.2 Third-order Elastic Constant. 3.3 Young’s Modulus, Poisson’s Ratio and Similar Properties. 3.4 Microhardness. 3.5 Sound Velocity. References. 4 Lattice Dynamic Properties. 4.1 Phonon Dispersion Relationships. 4.2 Phonon Frequency. 4.3 Mode Grüneisen Parameter. 5 Collective Effects and Some Response Characteristics. 5.1 Piezoelectric Constant. 5.2 Fröhlich Coupling Constant. References. 6 Energy-band Structure: Energy-band Gaps. 6.1 Introductory Remarks. 6.2 Group-IV Semiconductor Alloy. 6.3 III–V Semiconductor Ternary Alloy. 6.4 III–V Semiconductor Quaternary Alloy. 6.5 II–VI Semiconductor Alloy. References. 7 Energy-band Structure: Effective Masses. 7.1 Introductory Remarks. 7.2 Group-IV Semiconductor Alloy. 7.3 III–V Semiconductor Ternary Alloy. 7.4 III–V Semiconductor Quaternary Alloy. 7.5 II–VI Semiconductor Alloy. 7.6 Concluding Remarks. References. 8 Deformation Potentials. 8.1 Intravalley Deformation Potential: I Point. 8.2 Intravalley Deformation Potential: High-symmetry Points. 8.3 Intervalley Deformation Potential. References. 9 Heterojunction Band Offsets and Schottky Barrier Height. 9.1 Heterojunction Band Offsets. 9.2 Schottky Barrier Height. References. 10 Optical Properties. 10.1 Introductory Remarks. 10.2 Group-IV Semiconductor Alloy. 10.3 III–V Semiconductor Ternary Alloy. 10.4 III–V Semiconductor Quaternary Alloy. 10.5 II–VI Semiconductor Alloy. References. 11 Elasto-optic, Electro-optic and Nonlinear Optical Properties. 11.1 Elasto-optic Effect. 11.2 Linear Electro-optic Constant. 11.3 Quadratic Electro-optic Constant. 11.4 Franz–Keldysh Effect. 11.5 Nonlinear Optical Constant. References. 12 Carrier Transport Properties. 12.1 Introductory Remarks. 12.2 Low-field Mobility. 12.3 High-field Transport. 12.4 Minority-carrier Transport. 12.5 Impact Ionization Coefficient. References. Index.

Read more less

Book Synopsis* Comprehensive treatment of the key theories and technologies associated with the design of modern communications networks. * Provides models and analytical methods for evaluating the performance of communications networks and systems.Trade Review“I think the book is very well designed as a textbook for students and as a handbook for engineers.” (Zentralblatt MATH, 1 December 2012) Table of ContentsPreface xiii List of Acronyms xvii List of Symbols xxi 1 Introduction to Telecommunication Services, Networks and Signaling 1 1.1 Telecommunication Services 1 1.1.1 Definition 1 1.1.2 Taxonomies According to Different Criteria 2 1.1.3 Taxonomies of Information Sources 4 1.2 Telecommunication Networks 5 1.2.1 Introduction 5 1.2.2 Access Network and Core Network 9 1.3 Circuit-Switched and Packet-Switched Communication Modes 11 1.4 Introduction to the ISO/OSI Model 13 1.4.1 The Layered Model 13 1.4.2 The ISO/OSI Model 16 1.5 Signaling 18 1.5.1 Introduction 19 1.5.2 Channel-Associated and Common-Channel Signaling 19 1.5.3 SS7 20 1.5.4 PDH Networks 22 1.5.5 SDH Networks 24 References 25 2 Deterministic and Random Signals 27 2.1 Time and Frequency Domain Representation 27 2.1.1 Continuous Time Signals 27 2.1.2 Frequency Domain Representation for Periodic Signals 34 2.1.3 Discrete Time Signals 36 2.2 Energy and Power 39 2.2.1 Energy and Energy Spectral Density 39 2.2.2 Instantaneous and Average Power 42 2.3 Systems and Transformations 46 2.3.1 Properties of a System 46 2.3.2 Filters 47 2.3.3 Sampling 50 2.3.4 Interpolation 51 2.4 Bandwidth 54 2.4.1 Classification of Signals and Systems 56 2.4.2 Uncertainty Principle 58 2.4.3 Practical Definitions of Band 58 2.4.4 Heaviside Conditions 60 2.4.5 Sampling Theorem 61 2.4.6 Nyquist Criterion 64 2.5 The Space of Signals 66 2.5.1 Linear Space 66 2.5.2 Signals as Elements in a Linear Space 70 2.5.3 Gram–Schmidt Orthonormalization in Signal Spaces 71 2.5.4 Vector Representation of Signals 76 2.5.5 Orthogonal Projections onto a Signal Space 79 2.6 Random Variables and Vectors 81 2.6.1 Statistical Description of Random Variables 82 2.6.2 Expectation and Statistical Power 84 2.6.3 Random Vectors 88 2.6.4 Second Order Description of Random Vectors and Gaussian Vectors 94 2.6.5 Complex-Valued Random Variables 97 2.7 Random Processes 99 2.7.1 Definition and Properties 99 2.7.2 Point and Poisson Processes 101 2.7.3 Stationary and Ergodic Random Processes 108 2.7.4 Second Order Description of a WSS Process 110 2.7.5 Joint Second-Order Description of Two Random Processes 115 2.7.6 Second-Order Description of a Cyclostationary Process 117 2.8 Systems with Random Inputs and Outputs 118 2.8.1 Filtering of a WSS Random Process 119 2.8.2 Filtering of a Cyclostationary Random Process 122 2.8.3 Sampling and Interpolation of Stationary Random Processes 123 Appendix: The Complementary Normalized Gaussian Distribution Function 126 Problems 130 References 136 3 Sources of Digital Information 137 3.1 Digital Representation of Waveforms 137 3.1.1 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) 138 3.1.2 Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) 140 3.1.3 Quantizer 142 3.1.4 Uniform Quantizers 143 3.1.5 Quantization Error 145 3.1.6 Quantizer SNR 148 3.1.7 Nonuniform Quantizers 150 3.1.8 Companding Techniques and SNR 152 3.2 Examples of Application 158 3.3 Information and Entropy 162 3.3.1 A Measure for Information 162 3.3.2 Entropy 164 3.3.3 Efficiency and Redundancy 171 3.3.4 Information Rate of a Message 172 3.4 Source Coding 173 3.4.1 The Purpose of Source Coding 173 3.4.2 Entropy Coding 174 3.4.3 Shannon Theorem on Source Coding 177 3.4.4 Optimal Source Coding 180 3.4.5 Arithmetic Coding 183 Problems 188 References 196 4 Characterization of Transmission Media and Devices 197 4.1 Two-Terminal Devices 198 4.1.1 Electrical Representation of a Signal Source 198 4.1.2 Electrical Power 198 4.1.3 Measurement of Electrical Power 200 4.1.4 Load Matching and Available Power 201 4.1.5 Thermal Noise 203 4.1.6 Other Sources of Noise 205 4.1.7 Noise Temperature 205 4.2 Two-Port Networks 206 4.2.1 Reference Model 206 4.2.2 Network Power Gain and Matched Network 207 4.2.3 Power Gain in Terms of Electrical Parameters 208 4.2.4 Noise Temperature 209 4.2.5 Noise Figure 211 4.2.6 Cascade of Two-Port Networks 213 4.3 Transmission System Model 216 4.3.1 Electrical Model 216 4.3.2 AWGN Model 217 4.3.3 Signal-to-noise Ratio 217 4.3.4 Narrowband Channel Model and Link Budget 220 4.4 Transmission Media 223 4.4.1 Transmission Lines and Cables 223 4.4.2 Power-Line Communications 229 4.4.3 Optical Fiber 234 4.4.4 Radio Links 237 4.4.5 Underwater Acoustic Propagation 242 Problems 250 References 256 5 Digital Modulation Systems 259 5.1 Introduction 259 5.2 Digital Modulation Theory for an AWGN Channel 260 5.2.1 Transmission of a Single Pulse 260 5.2.2 Optimum Detection 262 5.2.3 Statistical Characterization of Random Vectors 263 5.2.4 Optimum Decision Regions 265 5.2.5 Maximum A Posteriori Criterion 269 5.2.6 Maximum Likelihood Criterion 270 5.2.7 Minimum Distance Criterion 270 5.2.8 Implementation of Minimum Distance Receivers 273 5.2.9 The Theorem of Irrelevance 276 5.3 Binary Modulation 277 5.3.1 Error Probability 277 5.3.2 Antipodal and Orthogonal Signals 282 5.3.3 Single Filter Receivers 285 5.4 M-ary Modulation 288 5.4.1 Bounds on the Error Probability 288 5.4.2 Orthogonal and Biorthogonal Modulations 292 5.5 The Digital Modulation System 296 5.5.1 System Overview 296 5.5.2 Front-end Receiver Implementation 301 5.5.3 The Binary Channel 302 5.5.4 The Inner Numerical Channel 303 5.5.5 Realistic Receiver Structure 306 5.6 Examples of Digital Modulations 307 5.6.1 Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) 307 5.6.2 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) 313 5.6.3 Phase Shift Keying (PSK) 323 5.6.4 Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) 329 5.6.5 Code Division Modulation 333 5.7 Comparison of Digital Modulation Systems 336 5.7.1 Reference Bandwidth and Link Budget 336 5.7.2 Comparison in Terms of Performance, Bandwidth and Spectral Efficiency 338 5.8 Advanced Digital Modulation Techniques 339 5.8.1 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 339 5.8.2 Spread Spectrum Techniques 342 5.9 Digital Transmission of Analog Signals 344 5.9.1 Transmission through a Binary Channel 345 5.9.2 Evaluation of the Overall SNR 346 5.9.3 Digital versus Analog Transmission 348 5.9.4 Digital Transmission over Long Distances: Analog versus Regenerative Repeaters 352 Problems 355 References 370 6 Channel Coding and Capacity 373 6.1 Principles of Channel Coding 373 6.1.1 The Purpose of Channel Coding 373 6.1.2 Binary Block Codes 375 6.1.3 Decoding Criteria. Minimum Distance Decoding 376 6.2 Linear Block Codes 383 6.2.1 Construction of Linear Codes 383 6.2.2 Decoding of Linear Codes 386 6.2.3 Cyclic Codes 390 6.2.4 Specific Classes of Linear Block Codes 392 6.2.5 Performance of Linear Codes 395 6.3 Convolutional Codes 397 6.3.1 Construction and Properties 397 6.3.2 Decoding of Convolutional Codes and the Viterbi Algorithm 401 6.4 Channel Capacity 405 6.4.1 Capacity of a Numerical Channel 405 6.4.2 Capacity of the AWGN Channel 411 6.5 Codes that Approach Capacity 420 6.5.1 Soft Decoding 420 6.5.2 Concatenated Codes 422 6.5.3 Low Density Parity Check Codes 423 Problems 424 References 429 7 Markov Chains Theory 431 7.1 Introduction 432 7.2 Discrete-Time Markov Chains 432 7.2.1 Definition of Discrete-Time MC 432 7.2.2 Transition Probabilities of Discrete-Time MC 435 7.2.3 Sojourn Times of Discrete-Time MC 437 7.2.4 Chapman–Kolmogorov Equations for Discrete-Time MC 439 7.2.5 Transition Diagram of Discrete-Time MC 440 7.2.6 State Probability of Discrete-Time MC 441 7.2.7 Classification of Discrete-Time Markov Chains 444 7.2.8 Asymptotic Behavior of Discrete-Time MC 455 7.3 Continuous-Time Markov Chains 467 7.3.1 Definition of Continuous-Time MC 468 7.3.2 Transition Probabilities of Continuous-Time MC 468 7.3.3 Sojourn Times of Continuous-Time MC 469 7.3.4 Chapman–Kolmogorov Equations for Continuous-Time MC 474 7.3.5 The Infinitesimal Generator Matrix Q 474 7.3.6 Forward and Backward Equations for Continuous-Time MC 476 7.3.7 Embedded Markov Chain 478 7.3.8 Flow Diagram of Continuous-Time MC 482 7.3.9 State Probability of Continuous-Time MC 482 7.3.10 Classification of Continuous-Time MC 487 7.3.11 Asymptotic Behavior of Continuous-Time MC 488 7.4 Birth-Death Processes 492 7.4.1 Definition of BDP 492 7.4.2 Time-Dependent Behavior of BDP 494 7.4.3 Asymptotic Behavior of BDP 500 Problems 507 References 516 8 Queueing Theory 517 8.1 Objective of Queueing Theory 518 8.2 Specifications of a Queueing System 518 8.2.1 The Arrival Process 521 8.2.2 The Service Process 523 8.2.3 The Queueing Structure 524 8.2.4 The Service Discipline 525 8.2.5 Kendall Notation 526 8.3 Performance Characterization of a QS 527 8.3.1 Occupancy Measures 528 8.3.2 Time Measures 529 8.3.3 Traffic Measures 531 8.4 Little’s Law 534 8.5 Markovian Queueing Models 537 8.5.1 The M/M/1 Queueing System 542 8.5.2 The M/M/m Queueing System 554 8.5.3 The M/M/1/K Queueing System 565 8.5.4 The M/M/m/m Queueing System 573 8.5.5 The M/M/m/K Queueing System 577 8.6 The M/G/1 Queueing System 581 8.7 The M/D/1 Queueing System 589 Problems 590 References 596 9 Data Link Layer 597 9.1 Introduction 598 9.2 Medium Access Control 599 9.2.1 Deterministic Access: TDMA and FDMA 604 9.2.2 Time-Division Multiple Access 604 9.2.3 Frequency-Division Multiple Access 606 9.2.4 Comparison between TDMA and FDMA 607 9.2.5 Demand-Based Access: Polling and Token Ring 609 9.2.6 Random Access Protocols: ALOHA and Slotted ALOHA 624 9.2.7 Carrier Sense Multiple Access 633 9.2.8 Performance Comparison of Channel Access Schemes 659 9.3 Automatic Retransmission Request 662 9.3.1 Stop-and-Wait ARQ 666 9.3.2 Go Back N ARQ 668 9.3.3 Selective Repeat ARQ 671 9.3.4 Performance Comparison of ARQ Schemes 675 9.3.5 Optimal PDU Size for ARQ 677 9.4 Examples of LAN Standards 679 9.4.1 Ethernet 679 9.4.2 Wireless Local Area Networks 682 9.4.3 IEEE 802.11 684 9.4.4 Bluetooth 691 Problems 697 References 703 10 Network Layers 707 10.1 Introduction 708 10.1.1 Switching and Connecting 708 10.1.2 Networks and Network Topology 710 10.2 Routing 714 10.2.1 Routing Objectives 715 10.2.2 Routing Algorithms 722 10.2.3 Technical Aspects of Routing Implementation 732 10.2.4 Routing Strategies 738 10.2.5 Routing Protocols 744 10.3 The Internet and IP 747 10.3.1 The Internet Protocol 748 10.3.2 IP Addressing System 750 10.3.3 Control Protocols 756 10.4 The Transport Layer 759 10.4.1 User Datagram Protocol 762 10.4.2 Transmission Control Protocol 763 10.5 The Application Layer 769 10.5.1 Domain Name Server 769 10.5.2 Email Exchange and the World Wide Web 772 References 774 Index 777

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe high level of technical detail included in standards specifications can make it difficult to find the correlation between the standard specifications and the theoretical results. This book aims to cover both of these elements to give accessible information and support to readers.Trade Review“This is a timely book on wireless communications, with twelve chapters covering theoretical results and material of Standards … The effort dedicated by the authors to bridge technology with standards for sure will be very well appreciated by the readers.” (IEEE Communications Magazine, 1 June 2012)Table of ContentsAbout the Editors xi List of Contributors xiii Acknowledgements xv Introduction xvii 1 Channel Models and Reliable Communication 1 Evgenii Krouk, Andrei Ovchinnikov, and Jussi Poikonen 1.1 Principles of Reliable Communication 1 1.2 AWGN 2 1.2.1 Baseband Representation of AWGN 2 1.2.2 From Sample SNR to Eb /N0 5 1.3 Fading Processes in Wireless Communication Channels 6 1.3.1 Large-Scale Fading (Path Loss) 7 1.3.2 Medium-Scale Fading (Shadowing) 10 1.3.3 Small-Scale Fading (Multipath Propagation) 11 1.4 Modelling Frequency-Nonselective Fading 14 1.4.1 Rayleigh and Rice Distributions 14 1.4.2 Maximum Doppler Frequency Shift 15 1.4.3 Wide-Sense Stationary Stochastic Processes 15 1.4.4 Rayleigh and Rice Models for Frequency-Nonselective Fading 15 1.4.5 SNR in Rayleigh Fading Channels 17 1.5 WSSUS Models for Frequency-Selective Fading 18 1.5.1 Basic Principles 18 1.5.2 Definitions 19 References 19 2 Modulation 21 Sergei Semenov 2.1 Basic Principles of Bandpass Modulation 21 2.1.1 The Complex Representation of a Bandpass Signal 22 2.1.2 Representation of Signal with Basis Functions 27 2.1.3 Pulse Shaping 31 2.1.4 Matched Filter 35 2.2 PSK 38 2.2.1 BPSK 38 2.2.2 QPSK 43 2.2.3 M-PSK 47 2.2.4 DPSK 48 2.2.5 OQPSK 50 2.2.6 π/4-QPSK 51 2.3 MSK 54 2.3.1 GMSK 54 2.4 QAM 60 2.5 OFDM 66 References 81 3 Block Codes 83 Grigorii Kabatiansky, Evgenii Krouk, Andrei Ovchinnikov, and Sergei Semenov 3.1 Main Definitions 83 3.2 Algebraic Structures 86 3.3 Linear Block Codes 94 3.4 Cyclic Codes 98 3.5 Bounds on Minimum Distance 114 3.6 Minimum Distance Decoding 119 3.7 Information Set Decoding 120 3.8 Hamming Codes 128 3.9 Reed-Solomon Codes 131 3.10 BCH Codes 133 3.11 Decoding of BCH Codes 135 3.12 Sudan Algorithm and Its Extensions 139 3.13 LDPC Codes 146 3.13.1 LDPC Constructions 148 3.13.2 Decoding of LDPC Codes 154 References 157 4 Convolutional Codes and Turbo-Codes 161 Sergei Semenov and Andrey Trofimov 4.1 Convolutional Codes Representation and Encoding 161 4.2 Viterbi Decoding Algorithm 169 4.2.1 Hard Decision Viterbi Algorithm 170 4.2.2 Soft Decision Viterbi Algorithm 174 4.3 List Decoding 178 4.4 Upper Bound on Bit Error Probability for Viterbi Decoding 178 4.5 Sequential Decoding 183 4.5.1 Stack Algorithm 184 4.5.2 Fano Algorithm 187 4.6 Parallel-Concatenated Convolutional Codes and Soft Input Soft Output Decoding 190 4.7 SISO Decoding Algorithms 195 4.7.1 MAP Algorithm and Its Variants 195 4.7.2 Soft-In/Soft-Out Viterbi Algorithm (SOVA) 201 References 205 4.a Modified Chernoff Bound and Some Applications 206 Andrey Trofimov References 219 5 Equalization 221 Sergei Semenov 5.1 Equalization with Filtering 222 5.1.1 Zero-Forcing Equalization 226 5.1.2 MMSE Equalization 228 5.1.3 DFE 233 5.2 Equalization Based on Sequence Estimation 239 5.2.1 MLSE Equalization 239 5.2.2 Sphere Detection 242 5.3 RAKE Receiver 251 5.4 Turbo Equalization 254 5.5 Performance Comparison 259 References 261 6 ARQ 263 Evgenii Krouk 6.1 Basic ARQ Schemes 263 6.1.1 Basic Concepts 263 6.1.2 Stop-and-Wait ARQ 265 6.1.3 ARQ with N Steps Back (Go Back N, GBN) 267 6.1.4 ARQ with Selective Repeat (SR) 268 6.2 Hybrid ARQ 269 6.2.1 Type-I Hybrid ARQ (Chase Combining) 269 6.2.2 Type-II Hybrid ARQ (Full IR) 270 6.2.3 Type-III Hybrid ARQ (Partial IR) 273 References 275 7 Coded Modulation 277 Andrey Trofimov 7.1 Principle of Coded Modulation 277 7.1.1 Illustrative Example 280 7.2 Modulation Mapping by Signal Set Partitioning 282 7.3 Ungerboeck Codes 285 7.4 Performance Estimation of TCM System 287 7.4.1 Squared Distance Structure of PSK and QAM Constellations 287 7.4.2 Upper Bound on Error Event Probability and Bit Error Probability for TCM 289 References 299 8 MIMO 301 Andrei Ovchinnikov and Sergei Semenov 8.1 MIMO Channel Model 301 8.1.1 Fading in Narrowband Channels 301 8.1.2 Fading Countermeasures: Diversity 303 8.1.3 MIMO Channel model 306 8.2 Space-Time Coding 310 8.2.1 Maximum Ratio Combining 310 8.2.2 Definition of Space-Time Codes 311 8.2.3 Space-Time Codes with Two Transmit Antennas 312 8.2.4 Construction Criteria for Space-Time Codes 314 8.3 Orthogonal Designs 317 8.3.1 Real Orthogonal Designs 317 8.3.2 Complex Orthogonal Designs 319 8.3.3 Decoding of Space-Time Codes 323 8.3.4 Error Probability for Orthogonal Space-Time Codes 326 8.4 Space-Time Trellis Codes 327 8.4.1 Space-Time Trellis Codes 327 8.4.2 Space-Time Turbo Trellis Codes 330 8.5 Differential Space-Time Codes 334 8.6 Spatial Multiplexing 337 8.6.1 General Concepts 337 8.6.2 V-BLAST 339 8.6.3 D-BLAST 341 8.6.4 Turbo-BLAST 342 8.7 Beamforming 344 References 348 9 Multiple Access Methods 351 Dmitry Osipov, Jarkko Paavola, and Jussi Poikonen 9.1 Frequency Division Multiple Access 353 9.1.1 Spectral Reuse 355 9.1.2 OFDMA 356 9.1.3 SC-FDMA 358 9.1.4 WDMA 359 9.2 Time Division Multiple Access 359 9.3 Code Division Multiple Access 360 9.3.1 Direct-Sequence CDMA 360 9.3.2 Frequency-Hopping CDMA 366 9.4 Advanced MA Methods 367 9.4.1 Multicarrier CDMA 367 9.4.2 Random OFDMA 368 9.4.3 DHA-FH-CDMA 369 9.5 Random Access Multiple Access Methods 371 9.6 Conclusions 376 References 376 10 Standardization in IEEE 802.11, 802.16 381 Tuomas Laine, Zexian Li, Andrei Malkov, and Prabodh Varshney 10.1 IEEE Overview 381 10.2 Standard Development Process 384 10.3 IEEE 802.11 Working Group 385 10.4 IEEE 802.16 Working Group 386 10.5 IEEE 802.11 388 10.5.1 Overview and Scope 388 10.5.2 Frequency Plan 388 10.5.3 Reference Model 389 10.5.4 Architecture 390 10.5.5 802.11a 391 10.5.6 802.11b 392 10.5.7 802.11g 394 10.5.8 802.11n 395 10.5.9 Future Developments 397 10.6 IEEE 802.16x 398 10.6.1 Key PHY Features of the IEEE 802.16e 398 10.6.2 IEEE 802.16m 400 References 428 11 Standardization in 3GPP 429 Asbjørn Grøvlen, Kari Hooli, Matti Jokimies, Kari Pajukoski, Sergei Semenov, and Esa Tiirola 11.1 Standardization Process and Organization 429 11.1.1 General 429 11.1.2 Organization of 3GPP 430 11.1.3 Organization of TSG RAN 430 11.1.4 Standardization Process 431 11.1.5 3GPP Releases 432 11.1.6 Frequency Bands and 3GPP Releases 433 11.1.7 RAN Specifications 433 11.2 3G WCDMA 433 11.2.1 WCDMA Concept. Logical, Transport and Physical Channels 434 11.2.2 Logical and Transport Channels 435 11.2.3 Physical Channels 440 11.2.4 Coding, Spreading and Modulation 459 11.2.5 Cell Search 476 11.2.6 Power Control Procedures 476 11.2.7 Handover Procedures 479 11.2.8 Transmit Diversity 486 11.3 3.5G HSDPA/HSUPA 490 11.3.1 HSDPA 490 11.3.2 HSUPA 536 11.3.3 CPC 574 11.4 4G LTE 577 11.4.1 LTE Downlink 577 11.4.2 LTE Uplink 592 References 602 12 CDMA2000 and Its Evolution 605 Andrei Ovchinnikov 12.1 Development of 3G CDMA2000 Standard 605 12.1.1 IS-95 Family of Standards (cdmaOne) 605 12.1.2 IS-2000 Family of Standards 606 12.2 Reverse Channel of Physical Layer in CDMA2000 Standard 611 12.2.1 Reverse Channel Structure 611 12.2.2 Forward Error Correction (FEC) 612 12.2.3 Codeword Symbols Repetition 615 12.2.4 Puncturing 618 12.2.5 Block Interleaving 618 12.2.6 Orthogonal Modulation and Orthogonal Spreading 619 12.2.7 Direct Sequence Spreading and Quadrature Spreading 619 12.2.8 Frame Quality Indicator 622 12.3 Forward Channel of Physical Layer in CDMA2000 Standard 623 12.3.1 Forward Channel Structure 623 12.3.2 Forward Error Correction 625 12.3.3 Codeword Symbols Repetition 629 12.3.4 Puncturing 630 12.3.5 Block Interleaving 630 12.3.6 Sequence Repetition 630 12.3.7 Data Scrambling 630 12.3.8 Orthogonal and Quasi-Orthogonal Spreading 631 12.3.9 Quadrature Spreading 631 12.3.10 Frame Quality Indicator 631 12.4 Architecture Model of CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Standard 631 12.4.1 Structure of Physical Layer Packet 632 12.4.2 FCS Computation 632 12.5 Access Terminal of the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Standard 633 12.5.1 Power Control 633 12.5.2 Reverse Channel Structure 633 12.5.3 Modulation Parameters and Transmission Rates 634 12.5.4 Access Channel 634 12.5.5 Reverse Traffic Channel 636 12.5.6 Encoding 640 12.5.7 Channel Interleaving and Repetition 641 12.5.8 Quadrature Spreading 641 12.6 Access Network of the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Standard 643 12.6.1 Forward Channel Structure 643 12.6.2 Modulation Parameters and Transmission Rates 645 12.6.3 Pilot Channel 645 12.6.4 Forward MAC Channel 645 12.6.5 Control Channel 647 12.6.6 Forward Traffic Channel 647 12.6.7 Time-Division Multiplexing 651 12.6.8 Quadrature Spreading 651 References 654 Index 655

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe microelectronics evolution has given rise to many modern benefits but has also changed design methods and attitudes to learning. Technology advancements shifted focus from simple circuits to complex systems with major attention to high-level descriptions. The design methods moved from a bottom-up to a top-down approach. For today's students, the most beneficial approach to learning is this top-down method that demonstrates a global view of electronics before going into specifics. Franco Maloberti uses this approach to explain the fundamentals of electronics, such as processing functions, signals and their properties. Here he presents a helpful balance of theory, examples, and verification of results, while keeping mathematics and signal processing theory to a minimum. Key features: Presents a new learning approach that will greatly improve students' ability to retain key concepts in electronics studies Match the evolution of ComputTable of ContentsPreface xvii List of Abbreviations xxi 1 Overview, Goals and Strategy 1 1.1 Good Morning 1 1.2 Planning the Trip 4 1.3 Electronic Systems 5 1.3.1 Meeting a System 8 1.4 Transducers 11 1.4.1 Sensors 11 1.4.2 Actuators 14 1.5 What is the Role of the Computer? 16 1.6 Goal and Learning Strategies 19 1.6.1 Teamwork Attitude 20 1.6.2 Creativity and Execution 20 1.6.3 Use of Simulation Tools 21 1.7 Self Training, Examples and Simulations 21 1.7.1 Role of Examples and Computer Simulations 22 1.8 Business Issues, Complexity and CAD Tools 23 1.8.1 CAD Tools 23 1.8.2 Analog Simulator 24 1.8.3 Device and Macro-block Models 25 1.8.4 Digital Simulation 26 1.9 ELectronic VIrtual Student Lab (ElvisLab) 27 Problems 29 2 Signals 31 2.1 Introduction 31 2.2 Types of Signals 35 2.3 Time and Frequency Domains 45 2.4 Continuous-time and Discrete-time Signals 51 2.4.1 The Sampling Theorem 55 2.5 Using Sampled-Data Signals 57 2.5.1 The z-transform 58 2.6 Discrete-amplitude Signals 59 2.6.1 Quantized Signal Coding 64 2.7 Signals Representation 65 2.7.1 The Decibel 67 2.8 DFT and FFT 69 2.9 Windowing 70 2.10 Good and Bad Signals 75 2.10.1 Offset 76 2.10.2 Interference 77 2.10.3 Harmonic Distortion 78 2.10.4 Noise 82 2.11 THD, SNR, SNDR, Dynamic Range 86 Problems 89 Additional Computer Examples 92 3 Electronic Systems 95 3.1 Introduction 95 3.2 Electronics for Entertainment 96 3.2.1 Electronic Toys 96 3.2.2 Video Game and Game Console 100 3.2.3 Personal Media Player 101 3.3 Systems for Communication 103 3.3.1 Wired Communication Systems 103 3.3.2 Wireless: Voice, Video and Data 104 3.3.3 RFID 107 3.4 Computation and Processing 108 3.4.1 Microprocessor 110 3.4.2 Digital Signal Processor 111 3.4.3 Data Storage 112 3.5 Measure, Safety, and Control 114 3.5.1 The Weather Station 115 3.5.2 Data Fusion 116 3.5.3 Systems for Automobile Control 119 3.5.4 Noise-canceling Headphones 120 3.6 System Partitioning 122 3.7 System Testing 124 Problems 125 Additional Computer Examples 126 4 Signal Processing 127 4.1 What is Signal Processing? 127 4.2 Linear and Non-linear Processing 130 4.3 Analog and Digital Processing 135 4.3.1 Timing for Signal Processing 138 4.4 Response of Linear Systems 141 4.4.1 Time Response of Linear Systems 141 4.4.2 Frequency Response of Linear Systems 144 4.4.3 Transfer Function 147 4.5 Bode Diagram 151 4.5.1 Amplitude Bode Diagram 151 4.5.2 Phase Bode Diagram 155 4.6 Filters 158 4.6.1 Analog Design and Sensitivity 162 4.6.2 Sampled-data Analog and Digital Design 167 4.7 Non-linear Processing 169 Problems 175 Additional Computer Examples 179 5 Circuits for Systems 181 5.1 Introduction 181 5.2 Processing with Electronic Circuits 183 5.2.1 Electronic Interfaces 184 5.2.2 Driving Capability 188 5.2.3 Electrostatic Discharge Protection 191 5.2.4 DC and AC Coupling 193 5.2.5 Ground and Ground for Signal 197 5.2.6 Single-ended and Differential Circuits 198 5.3 Inside Analog Electronic Blocks 200 5.3.1 Simple Continuous-time Filters 201 5.3.2 Two-Pole Filters 205 5.4 Continuous-time Linear Basic Functions 205 5.4.1 Addition of Signals 206 5.4.2 The Virtual Ground Concept 209 5.4.3 Multiplication by a Constant 212 5.4.4 Integration and Derivative 214 5.5 Continuous-time Non-linear Basic Functions 221 5.5.1 Threshold Detection 222 5.5.2 Analog Multiplier 223 5.6 Analog Discrete-time Basic Operations 225 5.7 Limits in Real Analog Circuits 227 5.8 Circuits for Digital Design 229 5.8.1 Symbols of Digital Blocks 230 5.8.2 Implementation of Digital Functions 233 Problems 234 6 Analog Processing Blocks 239 6.1 Introduction 239 6.2 Choosing the Part 241 6.3 Operational Amplifier 242 6.3.1 Ideal Operation 242 6.4 Op-Amp Description 244 6.4.1 General Description 244 6.4.2 Absolute Maximum Ratings and Operating Rating 244 6.4.3 Electrical Characteristics 245 6.4.4 Packaging and Board Assembly 254 6.4.5 Small-signal Equivalent Circuit 255 6.5 Use of Operational Amplifiers 257 6.5.1 Inverting Amplifier 257 6.5.2 Non-inverting Amplifier 261 6.5.3 Superposing Inverting and Non-inverting Amplification 262 6.5.4 Weighted Addition of Signals (with Inversion) 264 6.5.5 Unity Gain Buffer 265 6.5.6 Integration and Derivative 266 6.5.7 Generalized Amplifier 268 6.6 Operation with Real Op-amps 269 6.6.1 Input Offset 269 6.6.2 Finite Gain 270 6.6.3 Non-ideal Input and Output Impedances 271 6.6.4 Finite Bandwidth 276 6.6.5 Slew-rate Output Clipping and Non-linear Gain 277 6.7 Operational Transconductance Amplifier 280 6.7.1 Use of the OTA 280 6.8 Comparator 284 6.8.1 Comparator Data Sheet 286 6.8.2 Clocked Comparator 289 Problems 289 7 Data Converters 293 7.1 Introduction 293 7.2 Types and Specifications 295 7.2.1 General Features 295 7.2.2 Electrical Static Specifications 296 7.2.3 Electrical Dynamic Specifications 299 7.2.4 Digital and Switching Data 302 7.3 Filters for Data Conversion 303 7.3.1 Anti-aliasing and Reconstruction Filters 303 7.3.2 Oversampling and Digital Filters 305 7.4 Nyquist-rate DAC 306 7.4.1 Resistor-based Architectures 306 7.4.2 Capacitance-based Architectures 312 7.4.3 Parasitic Insensitivity 314 7.4.4 Hybrid Resistive–capacitive Architectures 316 7.4.5 Current-based Architectures 317 7.5 Nyquist-rate ADC 321 7.5.1 Flash Converter 322 7.5.2 Two-step Flash 324 7.5.3 Pipeline Converters 327 7.5.4 Slow Converters 328 7.6 Oversampled Converter 332 7.6.1 Quantization Error and Quantization Noise 332 7.6.2 Benefit of the Noise View 336 7.6.3 Sigma–Delta Modulators 337 7.7 Decimation and Interpolation 342 Problems 344 8 Digital Processing Circuits 347 8.1 Introduction 347 8.2 Digital Waveforms 348 8.2.1 Data Transfer and Data Communication 350 8.2.2 Propagation Delay 354 8.2.3 Asynchronous and Synchronous Operation 355 8.3 Combinational and Sequential Circuits 356 8.3.1 Combinational Circuits 356 8.3.2 Sequential Circuits 358 8.4 Digital Architectures with Memories 360 8.5 Logic and Arithmetic Functions 362 8.5.1 Adder and Subtracter 362 8.5.2 Multiplier 365 8.5.3 Registers and Counters 371 8.6 Circuit Design Styles 377 8.6.1 Complex Programmable Logic Devices (CPLDs) and FPGAs 378 8.7 Memory Circuits 381 8.7.1 Random-access Memory Organization and Speed 382 8.7.2 Types of Memories 384 8.7.3 Circuits for Memories 386 Problems 391 9 Basic Electronic Devices 393 9.1 Introduction 393 9.2 The Diode 395 9.2.1 Equivalent Circuit 398 9.2.2 Parasitic Junction Capacitance 400 9.2.3 Zener and Avalanche Breakdown 402 9.2.4 Doping and p–n Junction 403 9.2.5 Diode in Simple Circuits 407 9.3 The MOS Transistor 411 9.3.1 MOS Physical Structure 412 9.3.2 Voltage–current Relationship 414 9.3.3 Approximating the I–V Equation 416 9.3.4 Parasitic Effects 417 9.3.5 Equivalent Circuit 419 9.4 MOS Transistor in Simple Circuits 421 9.5 The Bipolar Junction Transistor (BJT) 423 9.5.1 The BJT Physical Structure 426 9.5.2 BJT Voltage–current Relationships 427 9.5.3 Bipolar Transistor Model and Parameters 431 9.5.4 Darlington Configuration 433 9.5.5 Small-signal Equivalent Circuit of the Bipolar Transistor 434 9.6 Bipolar Transistor in Simple Circuits 435 9.7 The Junction Field-effect Transistor (JFET) 439 9.8 Transistors for Power Management 441 Problems 443 10 Analog Building Cells 445 10.1 Introduction 445 10.2 Use of Small-signal Equivalent Circuits 446 10.3 Inverting Voltage Amplifier 447 10.4 MOS Inverter with Resistive Load 451 10.4.1 Small-signal Analysis of the CMOS Inverter 452 10.5 CMOS Inverter with Active Load 454 10.5.1 CMOS Inverter with Active Load: Small-signal Analysis 456 10.6 Inverting Amplifier with Bipolar Transistors 459 10.6.1 Small-signal Analysis of BJT Inverters 462 10.7 Source and Emitter Follower 471 10.7.1 Small-signal Equivalent Circuit of Source and Emitter Follower 473 10.7.2 Small-signal Input and Output Resistance 474 10.8 Cascode with Active Load 477 10.8.1 Equivalent Resistances 480 10.8.2 Cascode with Cascode Load 482 10.9 Differential Pair 483 10.10 Current Mirror 487 10.10.1 Equivalent Circuit 488 10.10.2 Current Mirror with High Output Resistance 489 10.10.3 Differential to Single-ended Converter 490 10.11 Reference Generators 492 Problems 493 11 Digital Building Cells 495 11.1 Introduction 495 11.2 Logic Gates 496 11.2.1 Gate Specifications 497 11.3 Boolean Algebra and Logic Combinations 499 11.4 Combinational Logic Circuits 504 11.4.1 Exclusive-OR and Exclusive-NOR 505 11.4.2 Half-adder and Full-adder 507 11.4.3 Logic Comparators 509 11.4.4 Decoders 511 11.4.5 Parity Generator and Parity Checker 513 11.5 Sequential Logic Circuits 514 11.5.1 Latch 514 11.5.2 Gated Latch 516 11.5.3 Edge-triggered Flip-flop 517 11.5.4 Master–slave Flip-flop 519 11.6 Flip-flop Specifications 520 11.7 Transistor Schemes of Logic Cells 522 11.7.1 CMOS Inverter 522 11.7.2 Dynamic Response of CMOS Inverters 526 11.7.3 Power Consumption 529 11.7.4 NOR and NAND 530 11.7.5 Pass-gate Logic 532 11.7.6 Tri-state Gates 534 11.7.7 Dynamic Logic Circuits 535 Problems 536 12 Feedback 539 12.1 Introduction 539 12.2 General Configuration 540 12.2.1 Linear Feedback Systems 541 12.3 Properties of Negative Feedback 543 12.3.1 Gain Sensitivity 545 12.3.2 Bandwidth Improvement 545 12.3.3 Reducing Distortion 547 12.3.4 Noise Behavior 549 12.4 Types of Feedback 551 12.4.1 Real Input and Output Ports 553 12.4.2 Input and Output Resistances 555 12.5 Stability 559 12.5.1 Frequency Response of Feedback Circuits 559 12.5.2 Gain and Phase Margins 562 12.5.3 Compensation of Operational Amplifiers 563 12.6 Feedback Networks 566 Problems 568 13 Power Conversion and Power Management 571 13.1 Introduction 571 13.2 Voltage Rectifiers 572 13.2.1 Half-wave Rectifier 573 13.2.2 Full-wave Rectifier 577 13.3 Voltage Regulators 581 13.3.1 Zener Regulator 581 13.3.2 Series Linear Regulator 583 13.3.3 Series Linear Regulator with Adjustable Voltage 588 13.3.4 Supply of Active Blocks and Drop-out Voltage 590 13.3.5 Low Drop-out (LDO) Voltage Regulator 591 13.3.6 Protection Circuits 593 13.4 Switched Capacitor Regulator 595 13.4.1 Power Consumed by SC Regulators 597 13.4.2 Generation of Negative Voltages 599 13.4.3 Voltage Ripple 600 13.5 Charge Pump 601 13.6 Switching Regulators 604 13.6.1 Buck Converter 605 13.6.2 Boost Converter 607 13.6.3 Buck–boost Converter 610 13.6.4 Loop Control and Switches 611 13.6.5 Efficiency of Switching Regulator 613 13.7 Power Management 615 13.7.1 Rechargeable Batteries 615 13.7.2 Power Harvesting 618 13.7.3 Power Management Techniques 620 Problems 622 14 Signal Generation and Signal Measurement 623 14.1 Introduction 623 14.2 Generation of Simple Waveforms 624 14.3 Oscillators 627 14.3.1 Wien-bridge Oscillator 629 14.3.2 Phase-shift Oscillator 630 14.3.3 Ring Oscillator 631 14.3.4 Tank and Harmonic Oscillator 634 14.3.5 Digitally Controlled and Voltage-controlled Oscillator (VCO) 636 14.3.6 Quartz Oscillator 638 14.3.7 Phase Noise and Jitter 640 14.3.8 Phase-locked Oscillator 642 14.4 DAC-based Signal Generator 647 14.5 Signal Measurement 649 14.5.1 Multimeter 651 14.5.2 Oscilloscope 652 14.5.3 Logic Analyzer 655 14.6 Spectrum Analyzer 657 Problems 658 Index 661

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis practical text is an essential source of information for those wanting to know how to deal with the variability that exists in every engineering situation. Using typical engineering data, it presents the basic statistical methods that are relevant, in simple numerical terms.Trade Review"This book appeals to students in all areas of engineering and also managers concerned with the quality of manufactured products. Academic engineers can use this text to teach their students basic practical skills in quality management and statistical engineering, without getting involved in the complex mathematical theory of probability on which statistical science is dependent." (Zentralblatt MATH, 1 August 2013) "This is a timely text that helps to support the development of these important skills. Its no-nonsense and useful approach gives a flavour of the main statistical tools and techniques in basic language." (Quality World, December 2009) "It deserves to become a standard text to encourage the best in industrial practice." (Engineering & Technology, November 2009)Table of ContentsAbout the Author vii Foreword ix Preface xi Acknowledgements xiii 1 Nature of Variability 1 2 Basic Statistical Methods 9 2.1 Variance 9 2.2 Divisor ‘n’ or ‘n-1’? 11 2.3 Covariance and Correlation 13 2.4 Normal Distribution 14 2.5 Cumulative Frequency Distributions 18 2.6 Binomial Distribution 20 2.7 Poisson Distribution 25 2.8 Chi-squared Distribution 26 Bibliography 31 3 Production 33 3.1 Sampling Inspection 34 3.2 Control Charts 37 3.3 Cusum Charts 40 3.4 Significance Tests 43 3.5 Analysis of Variance 49 3.6 Linear Regression 52 Bibliography 57 4 Engineering Design 61 4.1 Variance Synthesis 61 4.2 Factors of Safety 68 4.3 Tolerances 69 4.4 The Future 71 Bibliography 72 5 Research and Development 75 5.1 Design of Experiments 76 5.2 Evolutionary Operation 95 5.3 Multiple Regression 96 5.4 More Statistical Methods 111 Bibliography 115 6 Background 119 6.1 Measurement 119 6.2 Statistical Computing 121 Bibliography 127 7 Quality Management 129 7.1 Quality Planning 129 7.2 Quality Organisation 135 7.3 Directing the Quality Function 137 7.4 Controlling the Quality Function 140 7.5 Statistical Engineering 141 Bibliography 142 8 Conclusion 145 Appendix A: Guidelines 147 Appendix B: Recommended Books 151 Appendix C: Periodicals 161 Appendix D: Supplementary Bibliography 165 Appendix E: Statistical Tables 171 Index 173

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis text outlines the concepts of modern control theory applied to the design and analysis of general flight control systems in a concise and mathematically rigorous style. It presents a comprehensive treatment of atmospheric and space flight control systems including aircraft, rockets and entry vehicles and spacecraft.Table of ContentsSeries Preface xiii Preface xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Notation and Basic Definitions 1 1.2 Control Systems 3 1.2.1 Linear Tracking Systems 7 1.2.2 Linear Time-Invariant Tracking Systems 9 1.3 Guidance and Control of Flight Vehicles 10 1.4 Special Tracking Laws 13 1.4.1 Proportional Navigation Guidance 13 1.4.2 Cross-Product Steering 16 1.4.3 Proportional-Integral-Derivative Control 19 1.5 Digital Tracking System 24 1.6 Summary 25 Exercises 26 References 28 2 Optimal Control Techniques 29 2.1 Introduction 29 2.2 Multi-variable Optimization 31 2.3 Constrained Minimization 33 2.3.1 Equality Constraints 34 2.3.2 Inequality Constraints 38 2.4 Optimal Control of Dynamic Systems 41 2.4.1 Optimality Conditions 43 2.5 The Hamiltonian and the Minimum Principle 44 2.5.1 Hamilton–Jacobi–Bellman Equation 45 2.5.2 Linear Time-Varying System with Quadratic Performance Index 47 2.6 Optimal Control with End-Point State Equality Constraints 48 2.6.1 Euler–Lagrange Equations 50 2.6.2 Special Cases 50 2.7 Numerical Solution of Two-Point Boundary Value Problems 52 2.7.1 Shooting Method 54 2.7.2 Collocation Method 57 2.8 Optimal Terminal Control with Interior Time Constraints 61 2.8.1 Optimal Singular Control 62 2.9 Tracking Control 63 2.9.1 Neighboring Extremal Method and Linear Quadratic Control 64 2.10 Stochastic Processes 69 2.10.1 Stationary Random Processes 75 2.10.2 Filtering of Random Noise 77 2.11 Kalman Filter 77 2.12 Robust Linear Time-Invariant Control 81 2.12.1 LQG/LTR Method 82 2.12.2 H2/H?E?E Design Methods 89 2.13 Summary 96 Exercises 98 References 101 3 Optimal Navigation and Control of Aircraft 103 3.1 Aircraft Navigation Plant 104 3.1.1 Wind Speed and Direction 110 3.1.2 Navigational Subsystems 112 3.2 Optimal Aircraft Navigation 115 3.2.1 Optimal Navigation Formulation 116 3.2.2 Extremal Solution of the Boundary-Value Problem: Long-Range Flight Example 119 3.2.3 Great Circle Navigation 121 3.3 Aircraft Attitude Dynamics 128 3.3.1 Translational and Rotational Kinetics 132 3.3.2 Attitude Relative to the Velocity Vector 135 3.4 Aerodynamic Forces and Moments 136 3.5 Longitudinal Dynamics 139 3.5.1 Longitudinal Dynamics Plant 142 3.6 Optimal Multi-variable Longitudinal Control 145 3.7 Multi-input Optimal Longitudinal Control 147 3.8 Optimal Airspeed Control 148 3.8.1 LQG/LTR Design Example 149 3.8.2 H?E?E Design Example 160 3.8.3 Altitude and Mach Control 166 3.9 Lateral-Directional Control Systems 173 3.9.1 Lateral-Directional Plant 173 3.9.2 Optimal Roll Control 177 3.9.3 Multi-variable Lateral-Directional Control: Heading-Hold Autopilot 180 3.10 Optimal Control of Inertia-Coupled Aircraft Rotation 183 3.11 Summary 189 Exercises 192 References 194 4 Optimal Guidance of Rockets 195 4.1 Introduction 195 4.2 Optimal Terminal Guidance of Interceptors 195 4.3 Non-planar Optimal Tracking System for Interceptors: 3DPN 199 4.4 Flight in a Vertical Plane 208 4.5 Optimal Terminal Guidance 211 4.6 Vertical Launch of a Rocket (Goddard’s Problem) 216 4.7 Gravity-Turn Trajectory of Launch Vehicles 219 4.7.1 Launch to Circular Orbit: Modulated Acceleration 220 4.7.2 Launch to Circular Orbit: Constant Acceleration 227 4.8 Launch of Ballistic Missiles 228 4.8.1 Gravity-Turn with Modulated Forward Acceleration 232 4.8.2 Modulated Forward and Normal Acceleration 233 4.9 Planar Tracking Guidance System 237 4.9.1 Stability, Controllability, and Observability 241 4.9.2 Nominal Plant for Tracking Gravity-Turn Trajectory 243 4.10 Robust and Adaptive Guidance 247 4.11 Guidance with State Feedback 250 4.11.1 Guidance with Normal Acceleration Input 250 4.12 Observer-Based Guidance of Gravity-Turn Launch Vehicle 254 4.12.1 Altitude-Based Observer with Normal Acceleration Input 255 4.12.2 Bi-output Observer with Normal Acceleration Input 260 4.13 Mass and Atmospheric Drag Modeling 266 4.14 Summary 274 Exercises 275 References 275 5 Attitude Control of Rockets 277 5.1 Introduction 277 5.2 Attitude Control Plant 277 5.3 Closed-Loop Attitude Control 281 5.4 Roll Control System 281 5.5 Pitch Control of Rockets 282 5.5.1 Pitch Program 282 5.5.2 Pitch Guidance and Control System 283 5.5.3 Adaptive Pitch Control System 288 5.6 Yaw Control of Rockets 294 5.7 Summary 295 Exercises 295 Reference 296 6 Spacecraft Guidance Systems 297 6.1 Introduction 297 6.2 Orbital Mechanics 297 6.2.1 Orbit Equation 298 6.2.2 Perifocal and Celestial Frames 299 6.2.3 Time Equation 301 6.2.4 Lagrange’s Coefficients 304 6.3 Spacecraft Terminal Guidance 305 6.3.1 Minimum Energy Orbital Transfer 307 6.3.2 Lambert’s Theorem 311 6.3.3 Lambert’s Problem 313 6.3.4 Lambert Guidance of Rockets 322 6.3.5 Optimal Terminal Guidance of Re-entry Vehicles 327 6.4 General Orbital Plant for Tracking Guidance 334 6.5 Planar Orbital Regulation 339 6.6 Optimal Non-planar Orbital Regulation 345 6.7 Summary 352 Exercises 352 References 355 7 Optimal Spacecraft Attitude Control 357 7.1 Introduction 357 7.2 Terminal Control of Spacecraft Attitude 357 7.2.1 Optimal Single-Axis Rotation of Spacecraft 358 7.3 Multi-axis Rotational Maneuvers of Spacecraft 364 7.4 Spacecraft Control Torques 375 7.4.1 Rocket Thrusters 375 7.4.2 Reaction Wheels, Momentum Wheels and Control Moment Gyros 377 7.4.3 Magnetic Field Torque 378 7.5 Satellite Dynamics Plant for Tracking Control 379 7.6 Environmental Torques 380 7.6.1 Gravity-Gradient Torque 382 7.7 Multi-variable Tracking Control of Spacecraft Attitude 383 7.7.1 Active Attitude Control of Spacecraft by Reaction Wheels 385 7.8 Summary 389 Exercises 389 References 390 Appendix A: Linear Systems 391 A.1 Definition 391 A.2 Linearization 392 A.3 Solution to Linear State Equations 392 A.3.1 Homogeneous Solution 393 A.3.2 General Solution 393 A.4 Linear Time-Invariant System 394 A.5 Linear Time-Invariant Stability Criteria 395 A.6 Controllability of Linear Time-Invariant Systems 395 A.7 Observability of Linear Time-Invariant Systems 395 A.8 Transfer Matrix 396 A.9 Singular Value Decomposition 396 A.10 Linear Time-Invariant Control Design 397 A.10.1 Regulator Design by Eigenstructure Assignment 397 A.10.2 Regulator Design by Linear Optimal Control 398 A.10.3 Linear Observers and Output Feedback Compensators 398 References 400 Appendix B: Stability 401 B.1 Preliminaries 401 B.2 Stability in the Sense of Lagrange 402 B.3 Stability in the Sense of Lyapunov 404 B.3.1 Asymptotic Stability 406 B.3.2 Global Asymptotic Stability 406 B.3.3 Lyapunov’s Theorem 407 B.3.4 Krasovski’s Theorem 408 B.3.5 Lyapunov Stability of Linear Systems 408 References 408 Appendix C: Control of Underactuated Flight Systems 409 C.1 Adaptive Rocket Guidance with Forward Acceleration Input 409 C.2 Thrust Saturation and Rate Limits (Increased Underactuation) 415 C.3 Single- and Bi-output Observers with Forward Acceleration Input 417 References 432 Index 433

Read more less

Book SynopsisFollowing the success of the first edition, this thoroughly updated second edition of Image Processing: The Fundamentals will ensure that it remains the ideal text for anyone seeking an introduction to the essential concepts of image processing. New material includes image processing and colour, sine and cosine transforms, Independent Component Analysis (ICA), phase congruency and the monogenic signal and several other new topics. These updates are combined with coverage of classic topics in image processing, such as orthogonal transforms and image enhancement, making this a truly comprehensive text on the subject. Key features: Presents material at two levels of difficulty: the main text addresses the fundamental concepts and presents a broad view of image processing, whilst more advanced material is interleaved in boxes throughout the text, providing further reference for those who wish to examine each technique in depth. Contains a largTrade Review"Although many books are available in the area of image processing, this book Image Processing, the Fundamentals by Maria Petrou and Costas Petrou explains this subject in a distinctive way. In this book, the authors have attempted to capture new insights with a lot of examples in all the fundamental topics of image processing." (IAPR Newsletter, 1 January 2011) "This book is an ideal teaching resource for both undergraduate and postgraduate students. It will also be of value to researchers of various disciplines from medicine to mathematics with a professional interest in image processing." (Zentralblatt MATH, 2010) Table of ContentsPreface xxiii 1 Introduction 1 2 Image Transformations 47 2.1 Singular value decomposition 51 2.2 Haar, Walsh and Hadamard transforms 74 2.3 Discrete Fourier transform 94 2.4 The even symmetric discrete cosine transform (EDCT) 138 2.5 The odd symmetric discrete cosine transform (ODCT) 149 2.6 The even antisymmetric discrete sine transform (EDST) 157 2.7 The odd antisymmetric discrete sine transform (ODST) 167 3 Statistical Description of Images 177 3.1 Random fields 178 3.2 Karhunen-Loeve transform 201 3.3 Independent component analysis 234 4 Image Enhancement 293 4.1 Elements of linear filter theory 294 4.2 Reducing high frequency noise 311 4.3 Reducing low frequency interference 351 4.4 Histogram manipulation 367 4.5 Generic deblurring algorithms 383 5 Image Restoration 395 5.1 Homogeneous linear image restoration: inverse filtering 396 5.2 Homogeneous linear image restoration: Wiener filtering 419 5.3 Homogeneous linear image restoration: Constrained matrix inversion 436 5.4 Inhomogeneous linear image restoration: the whirl transform 468 5.5 Nonlinear image restoration: MAP estimation 490 5.6 Geometric image restoration 513 6 Image Segmentation and Edge Detection 527 6.1 Image segmentation 528 6.2 Edge detection 591 6.3 Phase congruency and the monogenic signal 625 7 Image Processing for Multispectral Images 669 7.1 Image preprocessing for multispectral images 671 7.2 The physics and psychophysics of colour vision 700 7.3 Colour image processing in practice 742 Bibliographical notes 775 References 777 Index 781

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides a broad survey of models and efficient algorithms for Nonnegative Matrix Factorization (NMF). This includes NMF's various extensions and modifications, especially Nonnegative Tensor Factorizations (NTF) and Nonnegative Tucker Decompositions (NTD).Trade Review"[A] focus on the algorithms that are most useful in practice and aim to derive and implement, in MATLAB, efficient and simple iterative algorithms that work with real-world data." (Book News, December 2009)Table of ContentsPreface. Acknowledgments. Glossary of Symbols and Abbreviations. 1 Introduction – Problem Statements and Models. 1.1 Blind Source Separation and Linear Generalized Component Analysis. 1.2 Matrix Factorization Models with Nonnegativity and Sparsity Constraints. 1.2.1 Why Nonnegativity and Sparsity Constraints? 1.2.2 Basic NMF Model. 1.2.3 Symmetric NMF. 1.2.4 Semi-Orthogonal NMF. 1.2.5 Semi-NMF and Nonnegative Factorization of Arbitrary Matrix. 1.2.6 Three-factor NMF. 1.2.7 NMF with Offset (Affine NMF). 1.2.8 Multi-layer NMF. 1.2.9 Simultaneous NMF. 1.2.10 Projective and Convex NMF. 1.2.11 Kernel NMF. 1.2.12 Convolutive NMF. 1.2.13 Overlapping NMF. 1.3 Basic Approaches to Estimate Parameters of Standard NMF. 1.3.1 Large-scale NMF. 1.3.2 Non-uniqueness of NMF and Techniques to Alleviate the Ambiguity Problem. 1.3.3 Initialization of NMF. 1.3.4 Stopping Criteria. 1.4 Tensor Properties and Basis of Tensor Algebra. 1.4.1 Tensors (Multi-way Arrays) – Preliminaries. 1.4.2 Subarrays, Tubes and Slices. 1.4.3 Unfolding – Matricization. 1.4.4 Vectorization. 1.4.5 Outer, Kronecker, Khatri-Rao and Hadamard Products. 1.4.6 Mode-n Multiplication of Tensor by Matrix and Tensor by Vector, Contracted Tensor Product. 1.4.7 Special Forms of Tensors. 1.5 Tensor Decompositions and Factorizations. 1.5.1 Why Multi-way Array Decompositions and Factorizations? 1.5.2 PARAFAC and Nonnegative Tensor Factorization. 1.5.3 NTF1 Model. 1.5.4 NTF2 Model. 1.5.5 Individual Differences in Scaling (INDSCAL) and Implicit Slice Canonical Decomposition Model (IMCAND). 1.5.6 Shifted PARAFAC and Convolutive NTF. 1.5.7 Nonnegative Tucker Decompositions. 1.5.8 Block Component Decompositions. 1.5.9 Block-Oriented Decompositions. 1.5.10 PARATUCK2 and DEDICOM Models. 1.5.11 Hierarchical Tensor Decomposition. 1.6 Discussion and Conclusions. 2 Similarity Measures and Generalized Divergences. 2.1 Error-induced Distance and Robust Regression Techniques. 2.2 Robust Estimation. 2.3 Csiszár Divergences. 2.4 Bregman Divergence. 2.4.1 Bregman Matrix Divergences. 2.5 Alpha-Divergences. 2.5.1 Asymmetric Alpha-Divergences. 2.5.2 Symmetric Alpha-Divergences. 2.6 Beta-Divergences. 2.7 Gamma-Divergences. 2.8 Divergences Derived from Tsallis and Rényi Entropy. 2.8.1 Concluding Remarks. 3 Multiplicative Iterative Algorithms for NMF with Sparsity Constraints. 3.1 Extended ISRA and EMML Algorithms: Regularization and Sparsity. 3.1.1 Multiplicative NMF Algorithms Based on the Squared Euclidean Distance. 3.1.2 Multiplicative NMF Algorithms Based on Kullback-Leibler I-Divergence. 3.2 Multiplicative Algorithms Based on Alpha-Divergence. 3.2.1 Multiplicative Alpha NMF Algorithm. 3.2.2 Generalized Multiplicative Alpha NMF Algorithms. 3.3 Alternating SMART: Simultaneous Multiplicative Algebraic Reconstruction Technique. 3.3.1 Alpha SMART Algorithm. 3.3.2 Generalized SMART Algorithms. 3.4 Multiplicative NMF Algorithms Based on Beta-Divergence. 3.4.1 Multiplicative Beta NMF Algorithm. 3.4.2 Multiplicative Algorithm Based on the Itakura-Saito Distance. 3.4.3 Generalized Multiplicative Beta Algorithm for NMF. 3.5 Algorithms for Semi-orthogonal NMF and Orthogonal Three-Factor NMF. 3.6 Multiplicative Algorithms for Affine NMF. 3.7 Multiplicative Algorithms for Convolutive NMF. 3.7.1 Multiplicative Algorithm for Convolutive NMF Based on Alpha-Divergence. 3.7.2 Multiplicative Algorithm for Convolutive NMF Based on Beta-Divergence. 3.7.3 Efficient Implementation of CNMF Algorithm. 3.8 Simulation Examples for Standard NMF. 3.9 Examples for Affine NMF. 3.10 Music Analysis and Decomposition Using Convolutive NMF. 3.11 Discussion and Conclusions. 4 Alternating Least Squares and Related Algorithms for NMF and SCA Problems. 4.1 Standard ALS Algorithm. 4.1.1 Multiple Linear Regression – Vectorized Version of ALS Update Formulas. 4.1.2 Weighted ALS. 4.2 Methods for Improving Performance and Convergence Speed of ALS Algorithms. 4.2.1 ALS Algorithm for Very Large-scale NMF. 4.2.2 ALS Algorithm with Line-Search. 4.2.3 Acceleration of ALS Algorithm via Simple Regularization. 4.3 ALS Algorithm with Flexible and Generalized Regularization Terms. 4.3.1 ALS with Tikhonov Type Regularization Terms. 4.3.2 ALS Algorithms with Sparsity Control and Decorrelation. 4.4 Combined Generalized Regularized ALS Algorithms. 4.5 Wang-Hancewicz Modified ALS Algorithm. 4.6 Implementation of Regularized ALS Algorithms for NMF. 4.7 HALS Algorithm and its Extensions. 4.7.1 Projected Gradient Local Hierarchical Alternating Least Squares (HALS) Algorithm. 4.7.2 Extensions and Implementations of the HALS Algorithm. 4.7.3 Fast HALS NMF Algorithm for Large-scale Problems. 4.7.4 HALS NMF Algorithm with Sparsity, Smoothness and Uncorrelatedness Constraints. 4.7.5 HALS Algorithm for Sparse Component Analysis and Flexible Component Analysis. 4.7.6 Simplified HALS Algorithm for Distributed and Multi-task Compressed Sensing. 4.7.7 Generalized HALS-CS Algorithm. 4.7.8 Generalized HALS Algorithms Using Alpha-Divergence. 4.7.9 Generalized HALS Algorithms Using Beta-Divergence. 4.8 Simulation Results. 4.8.1 Underdetermined Blind Source Separation Examples. 4.8.2 NMF with Sparseness, Orthogonality and Smoothness Constraints. 4.8.3 Simulations for Large-scale NMF. 4.8.4 Illustrative Examples for Compressed Sensing. 4.9 Discussion and Conclusions. 5 Projected Gradient Algorithms. 5.1 Oblique Projected Landweber (OPL) Method. 5.2 Lin’s Projected Gradient (LPG) Algorithm with Armijo Rule. 5.3 Barzilai-Borwein Gradient Projection for Sparse Reconstruction (GPSR-BB). 5.4 Projected Sequential Subspace Optimization (PSESOP). 5.5 Interior Point Gradient (IPG) Algorithm. 5.6 Interior Point Newton (IPN) Algorithm. 5.7 Regularized Minimal Residual Norm Steepest Descent Algorithm (RMRNSD). 5.8 Sequential Coordinate-Wise Algorithm (SCWA). 5.9 Simulations. 5.10 Discussions. 6 Quasi-Newton Algorithms for Nonnegative Matrix Factorization. 6.1 Projected Quasi-Newton Optimization. 6.1.1 Projected Quasi-Newton for Frobenius Norm. 6.1.2 Projected Quasi-Newton for Alpha-Divergence. 6.1.3 Projected Quasi-Newton for Beta-Divergence. 6.1.4 Practical Implementation. 6.2 Gradient Projection Conjugate Gradient. 6.3 FNMA algorithm. 6.4 NMF with Quadratic Programming. 6.4.1 Nonlinear Programming. 6.4.2 Quadratic Programming. 6.4.3 Trust-region Subproblem. 6.4.4 Updates for A. 6.5 Hybrid Updates. 6.6 Numerical Results. 6.7 Discussions. 7 Multi-Way Array (Tensor) Factorizations and Decompositions. 7.1 Learning Rules for the Extended Three-way NTF1 Problem. 7.1.1 Basic Approaches for the Extended NTF1 Model. 7.1.2 ALS Algorithms for NTF1. 7.1.3 Multiplicative Alpha and Beta Algorithms for the NTF1 Model. 7.1.4 Multi-layer NTF1 Strategy. 7.2 Algorithms for Three-way Standard and Super Symmetric Nonnegative Tensor Factorization. 7.2.1 Multiplicative NTF Algorithms Based on Alpha- and Beta-Divergences. 7.2.2 Simple Alternative Approaches for NTF and SSNTF. 7.3 Nonnegative Tensor Factorizations for Higher-Order Arrays. 7.3.1 Alpha NTF Algorithm. 7.3.2 Beta NTF Algorithm. 7.3.3 Fast HALS NTF Algorithm Using Squared Euclidean Distance. 7.3.4 Generalized HALS NTF Algorithms Using Alpha- and Beta-Divergences. 7.3.5 Tensor Factorization with Additional Constraints. 7.4 Algorithms for Nonnegative and Semi-Nonnegative Tucker Decompositions. 7.4.1 Higher Order SVD (HOSVD) and Higher Order Orthogonal Iteration (HOOI) Algorithms. 7.4.2 ALS Algorithm for Nonnegative Tucker Decomposition. 7.4.3 HOSVD, HOOI and ALS Algorithms as Initialization Tools for Nonnegative Tensor Decomposition. 7.4.4 Multiplicative Alpha Algorithms for Nonnegative Tucker Decomposition. 7.4.5 Beta NTD Algorithm. 7.4.6 Local ALS Algorithms for Nonnegative TUCKER Decompositions. 7.4.7 Semi-Nonnegative Tucker Decomposition. 7.5 Nonnegative Block-Oriented Decomposition. 7.5.1 Multiplicative Algorithms for NBOD. 7.6 Multi-level Nonnegative Tensor Decomposition - High Accuracy Compression and Approximation. 7.7 Simulations and Illustrative Examples. 7.7.1 Experiments for Nonnegative Tensor Factorizations. 7.7.2 Experiments for Nonnegative Tucker Decomposition. 7.7.3 Experiments for Nonnegative Block-Oriented Decomposition. 7.7.4 Multi-Way Analysis of High Density Array EEG – Classification of Event Related Potentials. 7.7.5 Application of Tensor Decompositions in Brain Computer Interface – Classification of Motor Imagery Tasks. 7.7.6 Image and Video Applications. 7.8 Discussion and Conclusions. 8 Selected Applications. 8.1 Clustering. 8.1.1 Semi-Binary NMF. 8.1.2 NMF vs. Spectral Clustering. 8.1.3 Clustering with Convex NMF. 8.1.4 Application of NMF to Text Mining. 8.1.5 Email Surveillance. 8.2 Classification. 8.2.1 Musical Instrument Classification. 8.2.2 Image Classification. 8.3 Spectroscopy. 8.3.1 Raman Spectroscopy. 8.3.2 Fluorescence Spectroscopy. 8.3.3 Hyperspectral Imaging. 8.3.4 Chemical Shift Imaging. 8.4 Application of NMF for Analyzing Microarray Data. 8.4.1 Gene Expression Classification. 8.4.2 Analysis of Time Course Microarray Data. References. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisHolographic Data Storage: From Theory to Practical Systems is a primer on the design and building of a holographic data storage system covering the physics, Servo, Data Channel, Recording Materials, and optics behind holographic storage, the requirements of a functioning system, and its integration into real-life systems. Later chapters highlight recent developments in holographic storage which have enabled readiness for commercial implementation and discuss the general outlook for the technology, including the transition from professional to consumer markets and the possibilities for mass reproduction.Table of ContentsForeword. Preface. List of Contributors. 1 Introduction (Kevin Curtis, Lisa Dhar and Liz Murphy). 1.1 The Road to Holographic Data Storage. 1.2 Holographic Data Storage. 1.3 Holographic Data Storage Markets. 1.4 Summary. Acknowledgements. References. 2 Introduction to Holographic Data Recording (William Wilson, Alan Hoskins, Mark Ayres, Adrian Hill and Kevin Curtis). 2.1 Introduction. 2.2 Brief History of Holography. 2.3 Holographic Basics. 2.4 Volume Holograms. 2.5 Multiplexing Techniques. 2.6 Address Space Limitations on Holographic Densities. 2.7 Summary. References. 3 Drive Architectures (Kevin Curtis, Adrian Hill and Mark Ayres). 3.1 Introduction. 3.2 Collinear/Coaxial Architecture. 3.3 InPhase Architecture. 3.4 Monocular Architecture. Acknowledgements. References. 4 Drive Components (Kevin Curtis and Brad Sissom). 4.1 Introduction. 4.2 Laser. 4.3 SLM. 4.4 Image Sensor. 4.5 Beam Scanners. 4.6 Isoplanatic Lenses. 4.7 Polytopic Filter. Acknowledgements. References. 5 Materials for Holography (Kevin Curtis, Lisa Dhar and William Wilson). 5.1 Introduction. 5.2 Requirements for Materials for HDS. 5.3 Candidate Material Systems. 5.4 Summary. References. 6 Photopolymer Recording Materials (Fred Askham and Lisa Dhar). 6.1 Introduction to Photopolymers. 6.2 Photopolymer Design. 6.3 Holographic Recording in Photopolymers. 6.4 Rewritable. References. 7 Media Manufacturing (David Michaels and Lisa Dhar). 7.1 Introduction. 7.2 Tapestry Media Overview. 7.3 Media Manufacturing Process. 7.4 Specifications for the Tapestry Media. 7.5 Manufacturing of Higher Performance Tapestry Media. Acknowledgements. References. 8 Media Testing (Kevin Curtis, Lisa Dhar, Alan Hoskins, Mark Ayres and Edeline Fotheringham). 8.1 Introduction. 8.2 Plane Wave Material Testing. 8.3 Bulk Index Measurements. 8.4 Scatter Tester. 8.5 Spectrophotometers/Spectrometers. 8.6 Scanning Index Microscope. 8.7 Interferometers. 8.8 Research Edge Wedge Tester. 8.9 Defect Detection. 8.10 Digital Testing of Media Properties. 8.11 Accelerated Lifetime Testing. Acknowledgements. References. 9 Tapestry Drive Implementation (Kevin Curtis, Ken Anderson, Adrian Hill and Aaron Wegner). 9.1 Introduction. 9.2 Optical Implementation. 9.3 Mechanical Implementation. 9.4 Electronics and Firmware. 9.5 Basic Build Process. 9.6 Defect Detection. 9.7 Read and Write Transfer Rate Models. 9.8 Summary. Acknowledgements. References. 10 Data Channel Modeling (Lakshmi Ramamoorthy, V. K. Vijaya Kumar, Alan Hoskins and Kevin Curtis). 10.1 Introduction. 10.2 Physical Model. 10.3 Channel Identification. 10.4 Simple Channel Models. Acknowledgements. References. 11 Data Channel (Adrian Hill, Mark Ayres, Kevin Curtis and Tod Earhart). 11.1 Overview. 11.2 Data Page Formatting. 11.3 Data Channel Metrics. 11.4 Oversampled Detection. 11.5 Page Level Error Correction. 11.6 Fixed-Point Simulation of Data Channel. 11.7 Logical Format. Acknowledgements. References. 12 Future Data Channel Research (Mark Ayres and Kevin Curtis). 12.1 Introduction. 12.2 Homodyne Detection. 12.3 Phase Quadrature Holographic Multiplexing. 12.4 Other Research Directions. Acknowledgements. References. 13 Writing Strategies and Disk Formatting (Kevin Curtis, Edeline Fotheringham and Paul Smith). 13.1 Introduction. 13.2 Media Consumption. 13.3 Scheduling and Write Pre-compensation. 13.4 Media Formatting. Acknowledgements. References. 14 Servo and Drive Control (Alan Hoskins, Mark Ayres and Kevin Curtis). 14.1 Introduction. 14.2 Holographic System Tolerances. 14.3 Algorithms. 14.4 Drive Controls. Acknowledgements. References. 15 Holographic Read Only Memories (Ernest Chuang and Kevin Curtis). 15.1 Introduction. 15.2 System Design Considerations. 15.3 Reader Design. 15.4 Media Design. 15.5 Two-Step Mastering. 15.6 Mastering and Replicating Disk Media. 15.7 Sub-mastering System. 15.8 Mastering System. 15.9 Replicating System. 15.10 Margin Tester System. 15.11 Experimental Results. 15.12 Asymmetric Phase Conjugation. 15.13 Non Fourier Plane Polytopic Filter Designs. 15.14 Cost Estimates. 15.15 Product Roadmap. 15.16 Summary and Future Improvements. Acknowledgements. References. 16 Future Developments (Kevin Curtis, Lisa Dhar, Liz Murphy and Adrian Hill). 16.1 Technology Evolution. 16.2 New Applications. 16.3 Summary. References. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisNetwork Routing: Fundamentals, Applications and Emerging Technologies serves as single point of reference for both advanced undergraduate and graduate students studying network routing, covering both the fundamental and more moderately advanced concepts of routing in traditional data networks such as the Internet, and emerging routing concepts currently being researched and developed, such as cellular networks, wireless ad hoc networks, sensor networks, and low power networks.Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xiii Foreword xv Preface xvii About the Companion Website xxi Part I Fundamental Concepts 1 1 Introduction to Network Routing 3 1.1 Introduction to Networks 3 1.2 Network Architecture and Standards 6 1.3 Glimpse at the Network Layer 13 1.4 Addressing in TCP/IP Networks 16 1.5 Overview of Routing 20 1.6 Delivery, Forwarding, Routing, and Switching 21 1.7 Routing Taxonomy 23 1.8 Host Mobility and Routing 26 References 27 Abbreviations/Terminologies 28 Questions 30 Exercises 32 2 Basic Routing Algorithms 35 2.1 Introduction to Routing Algorithms 35 2.2 Routing Strategies 40 2.2.1 Non]Adaptive Algorithms 43 2.2.2 Adaptive Algorithms 44 2.2.3 Flooding 44 2.3 Static Shortest Path Routing Algorithms 47 2.4 Dynamic Shortest Path Routing Algorithms 50 2.5 Stochastic Routing Algorithms 53 References 55 Abbreviations/Terminologies 55 Questions 56 Exercises 57 3 Fundamental Routing Protocols 59 3.1 Routing Protocols 59 3.2 Distance Vector Routing 61 3.2.1 Working of the Protocol 61 3.2.2 Convergence of Distance Vector Table 62 3.2.3 Issues in Distance Vector Routing 63 3.2.4 Improvements in Distance Vector Routing 67 3.2.5 Advantages and Disadvantages 68 3.3 Link State Routing 68 3.3.1 Working of the Protocol 68 3.3.2 Routing Tables 70 3.4 Path Vector Routing 71 3.4.1 Working of the Protocol 72 3.4.2 Advantages and Disadvantages 74 3.5 Unicast, Multicast, and Broadcast Routing 77 References 82 Abbreviations/Terminologies 83 Questions 83 Exercises 84 Part II Routing with Quality]of]Service and Traffic Engineering 89 4 Quality]of]Service Routing 91 4.1 Introduction 91 4.2 QoS Measures 95 4.3 Differentiated and Integrated Services 97 4.4 QoS Routing Algorithms 103 4.5 QoS Unicast Routing Protocols 106 4.6 QoS Multicast Routing Protocols 108 4.7 QoS Best]Effort Routing 112 References 113 Abbreviations/Terminologies 116 Questions 117 5 Routing and MPLS Traffic Engineering 119 5.1 MPLS Fundamentals 119 5.2 Traffic Engineering Routing Algorithms 120 5.3 Minimum Interference Routing Algorithm 121 5.3.1 The Algorithm 122 5.3.2 Limitations of MIRA 123 5.4 Profile]Based Routing Algorithm 124 5.5 Dynamic Online Routing Algorithm 125 5.6 Wang et al.’s Algorithm 126 5.7 Random Races Algorithm 126 References 127 Abbreviations/Terminologies 128 Questions 128 Exercises 129 Part III Routing on the Internet 131 6 Interior Gateway Protocols 133 6.1 Introduction 133 6.2 Distance Vector Protocols 135 6.2.1 Routing Information Protocol 137 6.2.2 Interior Gateway Routing Protocol 141 6.3 Link State Protocols 143 6.3.1 Open Shortest Path First Protocol 144 6.3.2 Intermediate System to Intermediate System Protocol 148 References 152 Abbreviations/Terminologies 152 Questions 153 Exercises 155 7 Exterior Gateway Protocol 159 7.1 Introduction 159 7.1.1 Hosts vs Gateways 161 7.1.2 Gateway]to]Gateway Protocol 162 7.1.3 Autonomous System 163 7.1.4 Characteristics of EGP 165 7.2 Exterior Gateway Protocol 166 7.2.1 Evolution of EGP Standards 166 7.2.2 EGP Terminology and Topology 166 7.2.3 EGP Operation Model 167 7.3 Border Gateway Protocol 169 7.3.1 Router Connectivity and Terminology 169 7.3.2 Routing Information Base 181 7.3.3 BGP Operation 182 7.3.4 Decision Process 184 7.3.5 Route Selection Process 185 References 188 Abbreviations/Terminologies 189 Questions 190 Exercises 191 Part IV Other Routing Contexts 195 8 Routing in ATM Networks 197 8.1 Introduction 197 8.1.1 ATM Frames 199 8.1.2 ATM Connection 199 8.1.3 ATM Architecture 203 8.1.4 Service Categories 204 8.2 PNNI Routing 206 8.2.1 PNNI Interface 207 8.2.2 PNNI Hierarchy 207 8.2.3 Building the Network Topology 209 8.2.4 Peer Group Leader 210 8.2.5 Advertizing Topology 211 8.2.6 Setting up Connection 212 References 213 Abbreviations/Terminologies 213 Questions 214 Exercises 216 9 Routing in Cellular Wireless Networks 219 9.1 Introduction 219 9.2 Basics of Cellular Wireless Networks 220 9.3 Resource Allocation 229 9.4 Routing in GSM Networks 231 9.4.1 Architecture 232 9.4.2 Call Routing 234 9.5 Challenges in Mobile Computing 235 References 238 Abbreviations/Terminologies 240 Questions 241 Exercises 242 10 Routing in Wireless Ad Hoc Networks 245 10.1 Introduction 245 10.1.1 Basics of Wireless Ad Hoc Networks 248 10.1.2 Issues with Existing Protocols 256 10.2 Table]Driven (Proactive) Routing Protocols 258 10.3 On]Demand (Reactive) Routing Protocols 260 10.4 Hybrid Routing Protocols 266 10.5 Hierarchical Routing Protocols 267 10.6 Geographic Routing Protocols 268 10.7 Power]Aware Routing Protocols 274 References 276 Abbreviations/Terminologies 278 Questions 280 Exercises 281 11 Routing in Wireless Sensor Networks 285 11.1 Basics of Wireless Sensor Networks 285 11.1.1 Hardware Architecture of Sensor Node 287 11.1.2 Network Topology 289 11.1.3 Design Factors 290 11.1.4 Classification of Routing Protocol 292 11.2 Routing Challenges in Wireless Sensor Networks 293 11.2.1 Self]Healing Networks 295 11.2.2 Security Threats 296 11.3 Flat Routing Protocols 297 11.4 Hierarchical Routing Protocols 303 11.5 Location]Based Routing Protocols 308 11.6 Multipath Routing Protocols 310 11.7 Query]Based Routing Protocols 312 11.8 Negotiation]Based Routing Protocols 314 11.9 QoS Routing Protocols 315 11.9.1 Challenges 316 11.9.2 Approach to QoS Routing 316 11.9.3 Protocols 317 References 317 Abbreviations/Terminologies 321 Questions 322 Exercises 324 12 Routing in 6LoWPAN 327 12.1 Introduction 327 12.1.1 IP for Smart Objects 328 12.1.2 6LoWPAN 329 12.1.3 ZigBee 330 12.1.4 ZigBee vs 6LoWPAN 330 12.2 6LoWPAN Fundamentals 331 12.2.1 Architecture 332 12.2.2 Header Format and Compression 332 12.2.3 Network Topology 335 12.2.4 Neighbor Discovery 335 12.2.5 Routing 336 12.3 Interoperability of 6LoWPAN 337 12.4 Applications 338 12.5 Security Considerations and Research Areas 341 References 342 Abbreviations/Terminologies 345 Questions 346 Exercises 348 Part V Advanced Concepts 349 13 Security in Routing 351 13.1 Introduction 351 13.1.1 Network Sniffer 353 13.1.2 Denial of Service Attack 357 13.1.3 Social Engineering 358 13.1.4 Packet Filtering 359 13.2 Attack Surface 360 13.2.1 Types of Attack Surface 361 13.2.2 Attack Surface and System Resources 361 13.2.3 Attack Surface Metric 362 13.2.4 Reduction in Attack Surface 362 13.3 Networked Battlefield 363 13.4 Mobile Agents 365 13.4.1 Architecture and Framework 368 13.4.2 Life Cycle 369 13.4.3 Challenges 370 13.5 Cognitive Security 370 13.5.1 Solution Concept 371 13.5.2 Cognitive Capabilities 372 13.5.3 General Capabilities 373 References 373 Abbreviations/Terminologies 374 Questions 375 Exercises 376 14 Reliability and Fault]Tolerant and Delay]Tolerant Routing 377 14.1 Fundamentals of Network Reliability 377 14.1.1 Importance of Reliability Calculation 378 14.1.2 Methods to Calculate the Reliability of a Network 379 14.2 Fault Tolerance 390 14.2.1 Fault]Tolerant Network 394 14.2.2 Autonomic Network 394 14.3 Network Management for Fault Detection 398 14.3.1 Traditional Network Management 399 14.3.2 Mobile Agent 400 14.3.3 Policy]Based Network Management 401 14.4 Wireless Tactical Networks 402 14.5 Routing in Delay]Tolerant Networks 403 14.5.1 Applications 404 14.5.2 Routing Protocols 404 References 405 Abbreviations/Terminologies 407 Questions 408 Exercises 409 Index 411

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides comprehensive, up-to-date coverage of the key MPEG standards used in the evolving digital multimedia landscape for the generation, storage, distribution, dissemination, and delivery of multimedia data to various platforms.Trade Review"The book will interest researchers, design engineers, developers, IT consultants, telecom system developers, and computer science and engineering students." (Booknews, 1 April 2011) "This book provides a comprehensive examination of the use of MPEG-2, MPEG-4, MPEG-7, MPEG-21, and MPEG-A standards, providing a detailed reference to their application." (TMCnet.com, 15 March 2011)Table of ContentsList of Contributors. MPEG Standards in Practice. 1 HD Video Remote Collaboration Application (Beomjoo Seo, Xiaomin Liu, and Roger Zimmermann). 1.1 Introduction. 1.2 Design and Architecture. 1.3 HD Video Acquisition. 1.4 Network and Topology Considerations. 1.5 Real-Time Transcoding. 1.6 HD Video Rendering. 1.7 Other Challenges. 1.8 Other HD Streaming Systems. 1.9 Conclusions and Future Directions. References. 2 MPEG Standards in Media Production, Broadcasting and Content Management (Andreas U. Mauthe and Peter Thoma). 2.1 Introduction. 2.2 Content in the Context of Production and Management. 2.3 MPEG Encoding Standards in CMS and Media Production. 2.4 MPEG-7 and Beyond. 2.5 Conclusions. References. 3 Quality Assessment of MPEG-4 Compressed Videos (Anush K. Moorthy and Alan C. Bovik). 3.1 Introduction. 3.2 Previous Work. 3.3 Quality Assessment of MPEG-4 Compressed Video. 3.4 MPEG-4 Compressed Videos in Wireless Environments. 3.5 Conclusion. References. 4 Exploiting MPEG-4 Capabilities for Personalized Advertising in Digital TV (Martín López-Nores, Yolanda Blanco-Fernández, Alberto Gil-Solla, Manuel Ramos-Cabrer, and José J. Pazos-Arias). 4.1 Introduction. 4.2 Related Work. 4.3 Enabling the New Advertising Model. 4.4 An Example. 4.5 Experimental Evaluation. 4.6 Conclusions. Acknowledgments. References. 5 Using MPEG Tools in Video Summarization (Luis Herranz and José M. Martínez). 5.1 Introduction. 5.2 Related Work. 5.3 A Summarization Framework Using MPEG Standards. 5.4 Generation of Summaries Using MPEG-4 AVC. 5.5 Description of Summaries in MPEG-7. 5.6 Integrated Summarization and Adaptation Framework in MPEG-4 SVC. 5.7 Experimental Evaluation. 5.8 Conclusions. References. 6 Encryption Techniques for H.264 Video (Bai-Ying Lei, Kwok-Tung Lo, and Jian Feng). 6.1 Introduction. 6.2 Demands for Video Security. 6.3 Issues on Digital Video Encryption. 6.4 Previous Work on Video Encryption. 6.5 H.264 Video Encryption Techniques. 6.6 A H.264 Encryption Scheme Based on CABAC and Chaotic Stream Cipher. 6.7 Concluding Remarks and Future Works. Acknowledgments. References. 7 Optimization Methods for H.264/AVC Video Coding (Dan Grois, Evgeny Kaminsky, and Ofer Hadar). 7.1 Introduction to Video Coding Optimization Methods. 7.2 Rate Control Optimization. 7.3 Computational Complexity Control Optimization. 7.4 Joint Computational Complexity and Rate Control Optimization. 7.5 Transform Coding Optimization. 7.6 Summary. References. 8 Spatiotemporal H.264/AVC Video Adaptation with MPEG-21 (Razib Iqbal and Shervin Shirmohammadi). 8.1 Introduction. 8.2 Background. 8.3 Literature Review. 8.4 Compressed-Domain Adaptation of H.264/AVC Video. 8.5 On-line Video Adaptation for P2P Overlays. 8.6 Quality of Experience (QoE). 8.7 Conclusion. References. 9 Image Clustering and Retrieval Using MPEG-7 (Rajeev Agrawal, William I. Grosky, and Farshad Fotouhi). 9.1 Introduction. 9.2 Usage of MPEG-7 in Image Clustering and Retrieval. 9.3 Multimodal Vector Representation of an Image Using MPEG-7 Color Descriptors. 9.4 Dimensionality Reduction of Multimodal Vector Representation Using a Nonlinear Diffusion Kernel. 9.5 Experiments. 9.6 Conclusion. References. 10 MPEG-7 Visual Descriptors and Discriminant Analysis (Jun Zhang, Lei Ye, and Jianhua Ma). 10.1 Introduction. 10.2 Literature Review. 10.3 Discriminant Power of Single Visual Descriptor. 10.4 Discriminant Power of the Aggregated Visual Descriptors. 10.5 Conclusions. References. 11 An MPEG-7 Profile for Collaborative Multimedia Annotation (Damon Daylamani Zad and Harry Agius). 11.1 Introduction. 11.2 MPEG-7 as a Means for Collaborative Multimedia Annotation. 11.3 Experiment Design. 11.4 Research Method. 11.5 Results. 11.6 MPEG-7 Profile. 11.7 Related Research Work. 11.8 Concluding Discussion. Acknowledgment. References. 12 Domain Knowledge Representation in Semantic MPEG-7 Descriptions (Chrisa Tsinaraki and Stavros Christodoulakis). 12.1 Introduction. 12.2 MPEG-7-Based Domain Knowledge Representation. 12.3 Domain Ontology Representation. 12.4 Property Representation. 12.5 Class Representation. 12.6 Representation of Individuals. 12.7 Representation of Axioms. 12.8 Exploitation of the Domain Knowledge Representation in Multimedia Applications and Services. 12.9 Conclusions. References. 13 Survey of MPEG-7 Applications in the Multimedia Lifecycle (Florian Stegmaier, Mario Döller, and Harald Kosch). 13.1 MPEG-7 Annotation Tools. 13.2 MPEG-7 Databases and Retrieval. 13.3 MPEG-7 Query Language. 13.4 MPEG-7 Middleware. 13.5 MPEG-7 Mobile. 13.6 Summarization and Outlook. References. 14 Using MPEG Standards for Content-Based Indexing of Broadcast Television, Web, and Enterprise Content (David Gibbon, Zhu Liu, Andrea Basso, and Behzad Shahraray.). 14.1 Background on Content-Based Indexing and Retrieval. 14.2 MPEG-7 and MPEG-21 in ETSI TV-Anytime. 14.3 MPEG-7 and MPEG-21 in ATIS IPTV Specifications. 14.4 MEPG-21 in the Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA). 14.5 Content Analysis for MPEG-7 Metadata Generation. 14.6 Representing Content Analysis Results Using MPEG-7. 14.7 Extraction of Audio Features and Representation in MPEG-7. 14.8 Summary. References. 15 MPEG-7/21: Structured Metadata for Handling and Personalizing Multimedia Content (Benjamin Köhncke and Wolf-Tilo Balke). 15.1 Introduction. 15.2 The Digital Item Adaptation Framework for Personalization. 15.3 Use Case Scenario. 15.4 Extensions of MPEG-7/21 Preference Management. 15.5 Example Application. 15.6 Summary. References. 16 A Game Approach to Integrating MPEG-7 in MPEG-21 for Dynamic Bandwidth Dealing (Anastasis A. Sofokleous and Marios C. Angelides). 16.1 Introduction. 16.2 Related Work. 16.3 Dealing Bandwidth Using Game Theory. 16.4 An Application Example. 16.5 Concluding Discussion. References. 17 The Usage of MPEG-21 Digital Items in Research and Practice (Hermann Hellwagner and Christian Timmerer). 17.1 Introduction. 17.2 Overview of the Usage of MPEG-21 Digital Items. 17.3 Universal Plug and Play (UPnP): DIDL-Lite. 17.4 Microsoft's Interactive Media Manager (IMM). 17.5 The DANAE Advanced MPEG-21 Infrastructure. 17.6 MPEG-21 in the European Projects ENTHRONE and AXMEDIS. 17.7 Information Asset Management in a Digital Library. 17.8 Conclusions. References. 18 Distributing Sensitive Information in the MPEG-21 Multimedia Framework (Nicholas Paul Sheppard). 18.1 Introduction. 18.2 Digital Rights Management in MPEG-21. 18.3 MPEG-21 in Copyright Protection. 18.4 MPEG-21 in Enterprise Digital Rights Management. 18.5 MPEG-21 in Privacy Protection. 18.6 Conclusion. Acknowledgments. References. 19 Designing Intelligent Content Delivery Frameworks Using MPEG-21 (Samir Amir, Ioan Marius Bilasco, Thierry Urruty, Jean Martinet and Chabane Djeraba). 19.1 Introduction. 19.2 CAM Metadata Framework Requirements. 19.3 CAM Metadata Model. 19.4 Study of the Existing Multimedia Standards. 19.5 CAM Metadata Encoding Using MPEG-21/7. 19.6 Discussion. 19.7 Conclusion and Perspectives. References. 20 NinSuna: a Platform for Format-Independent Media Resource Adaptation and Delivery (Davy Van Deursen, Wim Van Lancker, Chris Poppe, and Rik Van de Walle). 20.1 Introduction. 20.2 Model-Driven Content Adaptation and Packaging. 20.3 The NinSuna Platform. 20.4 Directions for Future Research. 20.5 Discussion and Conclusions. Acknowledgments. References. 21 MPEG-A and Its Open Access Application Format (Florian Schreiner and Klaus Diepold). 21.1 Introduction. 21.2 The MPEG-A Standards. 21.3 The Open Access Application Format. References. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis is the first book focusing on radio channel measurements and characterization with specific analysis of MIMO and bidirectional channels. It discusses the physical and technical considerations involved in the proper assessment of radio channel characteristics for efficient radio system planning, design, and implementation.Table of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv List of Symbols xvii Acronyms and Abbreviations xix 1 Radio Wave Fundamentals 1 1.1 Maxwell’s Equations 1 1.2 Free Space Propagation 3 1.3 Uniform Plane Wave Propagation 3 1.4 Propagation of Electromagnetic Waves in Isotropic and Homogeneous Media 5 1.5 Wave Polarization 8 1.6 Propagation Mechanisms 11 1.6.1 Reflection by an Isotropic Material 12 1.6.2 Reflection/Refraction by an Anisotropic Material 18 1.6.3 Diffuse Reflection/Scattering 19 1.6.4 Diffraction 20 1.7 Propagation in the Earth’s Atmosphere 21 1.7.1 Properties of the Earth’s Atmosphere 21 1.7.2 Radio Waves in the Ionosphere 25 1.8 Frequency Dispersion of Radio Waves 29 1.8.1 Phase Velocity versus Group Velocity 30 1.8.2 Group Path versus Phase Path 31 1.8.3 Phase Path Stability: Doppler Shift/Dispersion 32 References 33 2 Radio Wave Transmission 35 2.1 Free Space Transmission 35 2.1.1 Path Loss 35 2.1.2 Relating Power to the Electric Field 37 2.2 Transmission Loss of Radio Waves in the Earth’s Atmosphere 38 2.2.1 Attenuation due to Gases in the Lower Atmosphere and Rain: Troposphere 38 2.2.2 Attenuation of Radio Waves in an Ionized Medium: Ionosphere 41 2.3 Attenuation Due to Propagation into Buildings 43 2.4 Transmission Loss due to Penetration into Vehicles 46 2.5 Diffraction Loss 49 2.5.1 Fundamentals of Diffraction Loss: Huygen’s Principle 49 2.5.2 Diffraction Loss Due to a Single Knife Edge: Fresnel Integral Approach 50 2.6 Diffraction Loss Models 54 2.6.1 Single Knife Edge Diffraction Loss 54 2.6.2 Multiple Edge Diffraction Loss 55 2.7 Path Loss Due to Scattering 57 2.8 Multipath Propagation: Two-Ray Model 57 2.8.1 Two-Ray Model in a Nondispersive Medium 58 2.8.2 Two-Ray Model due to LOS and Ground Reflected Wave: Plane Earth Model 59 2.8.3 Two-Ray Propagation via the Ionosphere 63 2.9 General Multipath Propagation 66 2.9.1 Time Dispersion due to Multipath Propagation 66 2.9.2 Effects of Multipath Propagation in Frequency, Time and Space 69 2.10 Shadow Fading: Medium Scale 77 2.11 Measurement-Based Large-Scale Path Loss Models 78 References 82 3 Radio Channel Models 85 3.1 System Model for Ideal Channel: Linear Time-Invariant (LTI) Model 85 3.2 Narrowband Single Input–Single Output Channels 87 3.2.1 Single-Path Model 87 3.2.2 Multipath Scattering Model 88 3.3 Wideband Single Input–Single Output Channels 93 3.3.1 Single-Path Time-Invariant Frequency Dispersive Channel Model 93 3.3.2 Single-Path Time-Variant Frequency Dispersive Channel 98 3.3.3 Multipath Model in a Nonfrequency Dispersive Time-Invariant Channel 99 3.3.4 Multipath Propagation in a Nonfrequency Dispersive Time-Variant Channel 104 3.3.5 Multipath Propagation in a Frequency Dispersive Time-Variant Channel 106 3.4 System Functions in a Linear Randomly Time-Variant Channel 106 3.5 Simplified Channel Functions 108 3.5.1 The Wide-Sense Stationary (WSS) Channel 108 3.5.2 The Uncorrelated Scattering Channel (US) 109 3.5.3 The Wide-Sense Stationary Uncorrelated Scattering Channel (WSSUS) 109 3.6 Coherence Functions 110 3.7 Power Delay Profile and Doppler Spectrum 111 3.8 Parameters of the Power Delay Profile and Doppler Spectrum 111 3.8.1 First and Second Order Moments 111 3.8.2 Delay Window and Delay Interval 114 3.8.3 Angular Dispersion 115 3.9 The Two-Ray Model Revisited in a Stochastic Channel 115 3.10 Multiple Input–Multiple Output Channels 115 3.10.1 Desirable Channel Properties for Narrowband MIMO Systems 116 3.10.2 MIMO Capacity for Spatial Multiplexing 118 3.11 Capacity Limitations for MIMO Systems 120 3.12 Effect of Correlation Using Stochastic Models 120 3.12.1 Capacity Expressions Based on Stochastic Correlation Models 121 3.12.2 Capacity Expressions Based on Uniform and Exponential Correlation Models 122 3.12.3 The Kronecker Stochastic Model 123 3.13 Correlation Effects with Physical Channel Models 123 3.13.1 Distributed Scattering Model 124 3.13.2 Single-Ring Model 125 3.13.3 Double-Ring Model 126 3.13.4 COST 259 Models 127 3.13.5 Multidimensional Parametric Channel Model 127 3.13.6 Effect of Antenna Separation, Antenna Coupling and Angular Spread on Channel Capacity 128 3.13.7 Effect of Mutual Coupling 130 3.14 Effect of Number of Scatterers on Channel Capacity 134 3.14.1 Free Space Propagation 135 3.14.2 Limited Number of Multipath Components 136 3.15 Keyholes 137 3.16 Rician Channels 141 3.17 Wideband MIMO Channels 143 3.17.1 Wideband Channel Model 145 References 145 4 Radio Channel Sounders 149 4.1 Echoes of Sound and Radio 149 4.2 Definitions and Objectives of Radio Sounders and Radar 151 4.2.1 Modes of Operation 151 4.2.2 Basic Parameters 152 4.3 Waveforms 152 4.4 Single-Tone CW Waveforms 153 4.4.1 Analysis of a Single-Tone System 153 4.5 Single-Tone Measurements 158 4.5.1 Measurement Configurations 158 4.5.2 Triggering of Data Acquisition 160 4.5.3 Strategy of CW Measurements 162 4.6 Spaced Tone Waveform 164 4.7 Pulse Waveform 166 4.7.1 Properties of the Pulse Waveform 167 4.7.2 Factors Affecting the Resolution of Pulse Waveforms 171 4.7.3 Typical Configuration of a Pulse Sounder 171 4.7.4 Practical Considerations for Pulse Sounding 171 4.8 Pulse Compression Waveforms 174 4.8.1 Ideal Correlation Properties of Pulse Compression Sounding Waveforms 175 4.8.2 Pulse Compression Detectors 177 4.8.3 Comment on Pulse Compression Detectors 180 4.9 Coded Pulse Signals 182 4.9.1 Barker Codes (1953) 182 4.9.2 PRBS Codes 184 4.9.3 PRBS Related Codes: Gold Codes 192 4.9.4 Kasami Code 194 4.9.5 Loosely Synchronous Codes 196 4.10 Serial Correlation Detection of Coded Transmission 196 4.10.1 Sliding Correlator 196 4.10.2 Stepped Cross Correlator 198 4.11 Comment Regarding Coded Transmission 198 4.12 Frequency Modulated Continuous Wave (FMCW) Signal 199 4.12.1 Matched Filter Detector 199 4.12.2 Heterodyne Detector of FMCW Signals 203 4.12.3 Practical Consideration of Detection Methods of FMCW Signals 207 4.13 Range Doppler Ambiguity of Chirp Signals: Advanced Waveforms 207 4.13.1 Three-Cell Structure 208 4.13.2 Multiple WRF Structure 210 4.13.3 Target Movement 211 4.13.4 Doppler Shift Estimation 211 4.14 Architectures of Chirp Sounders 213 4.15 Monostatic Operation of FMCW Sounder/Radar 217 4.15.1 Reduction of Effective Mean Received Power 218 4.15.2 Spreading of the Spectrum and Interference 219 4.15.3 Blind Ranges and Range Ambiguity 220 4.15.4 Selection Criteria for Switching Sequences 221 4.15.5 Considerations for Edge Weighting 224 4.15.6 Length of the Window 224 4.15.7 Window Functions 224 4.15.8 Interpolation and Quantization 225 4.16 Single and Multiple Antenna Sounder Architectures 225 4.16.1 Single Input Single Output (SISO) Sounders 226 4.16.2 MISO, SIMO and MIMO Measurements with SISO Sounders 227 4.16.3 Semi-Sequential MIMO Sounders 228 4.16.4 Parallel MIMO Sounders 228 4.17 Ultra-wideband (UWB) Channel Sounders 232 4.18 Sounder Design 233 4.18.1 Sounder for Indoor Radio Channels in the UHF Band 239 4.18.2 Sounder for UHF Frequency Division Duplex Links for Outdoor Radio Channels 239 4.18.3 Sounder for Multiple Frequency Links for Outdoor Radio Channels 239 4.19 Performance Tests of a Channel Sounder and Calibration 239 4.19.1 Ambiguity Function 241 4.19.2 Linearity Test 242 4.19.3 Frequency Response 243 4.19.4 Calibration of Automatic Gain Control 243 4.19.5 Isolation between Multiple Channels 245 4.19.6 Sensitivity and Dynamic Range 246 4.19.7 Effect of Interference on the Dynamic Range 249 4.19.8 Stability of Frequency Sources 251 4.19.9 Temperature Variations 251 4.20 Overall Data Acquisition and Calibration 251 References 251 5 Data Analysis 255 5.1 Data Validation 255 5.2 Spectral Analysis via the Discrete Fourier Transform 256 5.3 DFT Analysis of the FMCW Channel Sounder Using a Heterodyne Detector 259 5.3.1 Snapshot Impulse Response Analysis 260 5.3.2 Frequency Response Analysis 263 5.3.3 Estimation of the Delay Doppler Function 266 5.4 Spectral Analysis of Network Analyzer Data via the IDFT 268 5.5 DFT Analysis of CW Measurements for Estimation of the Doppler Spectrum 268 5.6 Estimation of the Channel Frequency Response via the Hilbert Transform 269 5.7 Parametric Modelling 269 5.7.1 ARMA Modelling 271 5.7.2 AR Modelling 271 5.7.3 Practical Implementation of Parametric Modelling 271 5.7.4 Parametric Modelling for Interference Reduction 272 5.7.5 Parametric Modelling for Enhancement of Multipath Resolution 274 5.8 Estimation of Power Delay Profile 276 5.8.1 Noise Threshold 277 5.8.2 Stationarity Test 280 5.9 Small-Scale Characterization 286 5.9.1 Time Domain Parameters 287 5.9.2 Estimation of the Coherent Bandwidth 288 5.9.3 Statistical Modelling of the Time Variations of the Channel Response 291 5.10 Medium/Large-Scale Characterization 292 5.10.1 CDF Representation 292 5.10.2 Estimation of Path Loss 293 5.10.3 Relating RMS Delay Spread to Path Loss and Distance 296 5.10.4 Frequency Dependence of Channel Parameters 299 5.11 Multiple Antenna Array Processing for Estimation of Direction of Arrival 301 5.11.1 Theoretical Considerations for the Estimation of Direction of Arrival 303 5.11.2 Spectral-Based Array Processing Techniques 308 5.11.3 Parametric Methods 312 5.11.4 Joint Parametric Techniques 316 5.12 Practical Considerations of DOA Estimation 319 5.12.1 Choice of Antenna Array 320 5.12.2 Array Calibration 322 5.12.3 Estimation of Direction of Arrival 326 5.12.4 Estimation of Direction of the Arrival/Direction of Departure 331 5.13 Estimation of MIMO Capacity 333 References 333 6 Radio Link Performance Prediction 337 6.1 Radio Link Simulators 337 6.2 Narrowband Stochastic Radio Channel Simulator 338 6.2.1 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Simulator 339 6.2.2 Filtered Noise Method 339 6.2.3 Sum of Sinusoids Method (Jakes Method) 341 6.2.4 Frequency Domain Method 343 6.2.5 Reverberation Chambers (or Mode-Stirred Chambers) 344 6.3 Wideband Stochastic Channel Simulator 346 6.3.1 Time Domain Channel Simulators 346 6.3.2 Frequency Domain Simulators 348 6.4 Frequency Domain Implementation Using Fast Convolution 349 6.5 Channel Block Realization from Measured Data 351 6.6 Theoretical Prediction of System Performance in Additive White Gaussian Noise 353 6.6.1 Matched Filter and Correlation Detector 354 6.6.2 Bit Error Rate of the Matched Filter Detector in AWGN 356 6.6.3 Bit Error Rate with Noncoherent Detectors 357 6.6.4 Comparison of BER of Coherent and Noncoherent Detectors 358 6.6.5 Higher Order Modulation 358 6.7 Prediction of System Performance in Fading Channels 361 6.7.1 Narrowband Signals 361 6.7.2 Wideband Signals 363 6.8 Bit Error Rate Prediction for Wireless Standards 364 6.8.1 IEEE 802.16-d Standard 365 6.8.2 IEEE 802.11-a Standard 371 6.8.3 Third Generation WCDMA Standard 372 6.9 Enhancement of Performance Using Diversity Gain 376 6.9.1 Diversity Combining Methods 377 6.9.2 Diversity Gain Prediction of Rayleigh Fading Channels from Measurements in a Reverberation Chamber 382 References 383 Appendix 1 385 A. 1 Probability Distribution Functions 385 A. 2 The Gaussian (Normal) Distribution 385 A. 3 The Rayleigh Distribution 387 A. 4 The Rician Distribution 388 A. 5 The Nakagami m-Distribution 389 A. 6 The Weibull Distribution 390 A. 7 The Log-Normal Distribution 390 A. 8 The Suzuki Distribution 391 A. 9 The Chi-Square Distribution 391 References 391 Appendix 2 393 Index 395

Read more less

Book SynopsisTriple Playis a combination of Internet access, voice communication (telephony), and entertainment services such as IP television and video on demand. The erosion of the traditional voice service, together with the ever-increasing competition between companies, is pushing the telecommunications industry towards a major shift in its business models. Customers want more services in a more flexible way. Today, this shift can only be carried out by offering converged services built around the Internet Protocol (IP). Triple Play, a bundle of voice, video, and data services for residential customers, is the basis of this new strategy. Hens and Caballero explain how and why the telecommunications industry is facing this change, how to define, implement and offer these new services, and describes the technology behind the converged network. Triple Play analyses a number of business strategies to minimise costs, while migrating infrastructures and oTable of ContentsPreface. Chapter 1. Business Strategies. 1.1 Expanding Telco Businesses. 1.2 Triple Play Applications. 1.3 Driving Factors of Triple Play. 1.4 Telcos Strategies. 1.5 Infrastructures. 1.6 Triple Play Market. 1.7 Conclusions. Chapter 2. IP Telephony. 2.1 Coding of Voice Signals. 2.2 Network Performance Parameters. 2.3 Opinion Quality Rating. 2.4 Objective Quality Assessment. 2.5 Market Segments. Chapter 3. Audiovisual Services. 3.1 Digital Television. 3.2 Questioning the IPTV Business Models. 3.3 Regulatory Framework. 3.4 Architectural Design. 3.5 Television and Video Services and Applications. 3.6 Formats and Protocols. 3.7 How a Codec Works. 3.8 Windows Media and VC-1. 3.9 Service Provision. 3.10 Service Assurance. Chapter 4. Signalling. 4.1 The Real-time Transport Protocol. 4.2 The Real-time Control Protocol. 4.3 The Session Initiation Protocol. Chapter 5. IP Multicasting. 5.1 IP Multicast Groups and their Management. 5.2 Multicast Routing. Chapter 6. QoS in Packet Networks. 6.1 QoS Basics. 6.2 End-to-end Performance Parameters. 6.3 Marking. 6.4 Scheduling. 6.5 Congestion Avoidance. 6.6 Congestion Control and Recovery. Chapter 7. QoS Architectures. 7.1 QoS in ATM Networks. 7.2 QoS in IP Networks. Chapter 8. Broadband Access. 8.1 Broadband Services Over Copper. 8.2 The Passive Optical Network. 8.3 Ethernet in the First Mile 8.4 Service Provisioning. Chapter 9. Quadruple Play. 9.1 Cellular Communications Overview. 9.2 Wireless Communications Overview. 9.3 The IP Multimedia Subsystem. Chapter 10. Carrier-class Ethernet. 10.1 Ethernet as a MAN/WAN Service. 10.2 End-to-End Ethernet. 10.3 Limitations of Bridged Networks. 10.4 Multiprotocol Label Switching. 10.5 Migration. Chapter 11. Next-generation SDH/SONET. 11.1 Streaming Forces. 11.2 Legacy and Next-generation SDH. 11.3 The Next-generation Challenge. 11.4 Core Transport Services. 11.5 Generic Framing Procedure. 11.6 Concatenation. 11.7 Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. 11.8 Conclusions. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisComprehensive reference to successful service design for the telecommunications industry Telecommunications companies operate in increasingly competitive environments. The companies that survive and excel are those offering the most compelling range of products and services. These services are complex since they touch all aspects of business. Service design and implementation skills are therefore the key for staying on top of the competition. Successful Service Design for Telecommunications provides a comprehensive guide into service design and implementation. The author provides a consistent approach to designing scalable and operable processes that can be used when designing a variety of technologically based services; offering concepts, principles and numerous examples that the readers can easily adapt to their technological environment. Key features: Defines what telecommunications services are from business, technical and operatiTable of ContentsChapter 1. Introduction. 1.1 Who is this book for?. 1.2 Structure of the book and who should read which chapter 1.3 Definitions. Chapter 2. What is Service Design?. 2.1 What is a service?. 2.2 What is the difference between a service and a product?. 2.3 Service vs. network capabilities. 2.4 What are the difference between a service and an application?. 2.5 Intra-domain vs. Inter-domain services. 2.6 What is Service Design and what is the role of a Service Designer?. Chapter 3. Service – a Business Perspective. 3.1 Pre-conditions for service design. 3.2 Business requirements. 3.3 Market or marketing requirements. 3.4 Reporting requirements. 3.5 Security requirements. 3.6 Functional requirements. 3.7 Network planning requirements. 3.8 Non-functional requirements. 3.9 Regulatory, licensing and legislation considerations. 3.10 Financial constraints. 3.11 Physical location and space of network equipment and systems. 3.12 Service description template - a service description that fully defines the service 3.13 The success criteria for a service. Chapter 4. Service Design Process. 4.1 What are they key steps to develop new services and service enhancements?. 4.2 How should the process link to business approvals at various Phases of the development? 4.3 Organizational changes and structure required to develop new services. 4.4 Resource requirement for designing services. 4.5 How you can use the service development process for one off customer requests? 4.6 Programme management structure. 4.7 Documentation and control structure for Service Design. Chapter 5. Service Design – What needs to be done. . 5.1 Performing rapid impact analysis. 5.2 Performing feasibilities studies. 5.3 Design and develop. 5.4 Implementation and test 5.5 Service launch and operate. 5.6 Service withdrawal Chapter 6. Service Building Blocks. 6.1 The Building Blocks. 6.2 Conceptual network architecture for fixed and 3G mobile services. 6.3 Interactions between the network and the support systems. 6.4 System functions required for all services. 6.5 Operational support processes for all services. 6.7 Summary. Chapter 7. Network Design and Development 7.1 Network requirements. 7.2 Technical network considerations. 7.3 Service network design. 7.4 Network security. 7.5 Network Inventory. 7.6 Capacity planning, network planning and optimisation. 7.7 Service configuration in network elements. Chapter 8. System Functions and Development Systems requirements and methodology. 8.1 Inter-relationships between the functional areas in the systems domain. 8.2 Customer creation, order management and service termination. 8.3 Customer network provisioning and network termination. 8.4 Customer service provisioning (including moving, additions and changes) 8.5 End users creation and order management 8.6 End user network provisioning. 8.7 End users’ service provisioning, service control (esp. in QoS based services) and service termination 8.8 Billing, charging and rating. 8.9 Service accounting, revenue reporting, OLO bill reconciliation and revenue assurance 8.10 Fault management 8.11 Network management (monitoring and collecting events from the network) and service management 8.12 Performance management 8.13 Capacity management, traffic management and network planning. 8.14 Reporting. 8.15 System support and management Chapter 9. Operational Support Processes. 9.1 Sales engagement processes. 9.2 Customer service processes. 9.3 Service and network provisioning. 9.4 Service management processes. 9.5 Network management and maintenance processes. 9.6 Network traffic management, network capacity management and network planning processes 9.7 System support and maintenance process. 9.8 Revenue assurance processes. 9.9 Process mappings to eTOM model Chapter 10. Implementation Strategy. 10.1 What is implementation?. 10.2 What is implementation strategy?. 10.3 Why do we need an implementation strategy?. 10.4 What are the steps and approach to take when defining an implementation strategy? 10.5 Implementation strategy example. Chapter 11. Service Integration and Service Launch. 11.1 Service Integration Model 11.2 Service Integration Strategy. 11.3 Test Environment vs Live Service Environment 11.4 Post Service Launch Reviews. Chapter 12. Service Withdrawal, Migration and Termination. 12.1 Service Withdrawal 12.2 Service Migration. 12.3 Service Termination. 13 Glossary. 14 References. 15 Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisDigital signal processing plays a central role in the development of modern communication and information processing systems. The theory and application of signal processing is concerned with the identification, modelling and utilisation of patterns and structures in a signal process.Table of ContentsPreface xix Acknowledgements xxiii Symbols xxv Abbreviations xxix 1 Introduction 1 2 Noise and Distortion 35 3 Information Theory and Probability Models 51 4 Bayesian Inference 107 5 Hidden Markov Models 147 6 Least Square Error Wiener-Kolmogorov Filters 173 7 Adaptive Filters: Kalman, RLS, LMS 193 8 Linear Prediction Models 227 9 Eigenvalue Analysis and Principal Component Analysis 257 10 Power Spectrum Analysis 271 11 Interpolation – Replacement of Lost Samples 295 12 Signal Enhancement via Spectral Amplitude Estimation 321 13 Impulsive Noise: Modelling, Detection and Removal 341 14 Transient Noise Pulses 359 15 Echo Cancellation 371 16 Channel Equalisation and Blind Deconvolution 391 17 Speech Enhancement: Noise Reduction, Bandwidth Extension and Packet Replacement 423 18 Multiple-Input Multiple-Output Systems, Independent Component Analysis 467 19 Signal Processing in Mobile Communication 491 Bibliography 508 Index 509

Read more less